Skip to main content

Full text of "The Improvement Era"

See other formats 


V, 


> 


}/ 


^^Nn^vTt 


l<n 


y 


■m& 


■■-..'/  ■■'■-':- 


SEE  PAGE  2 


JANUARY,  1939 

VOLUME  42  NUMBER  1 
RETURN  POSTAGE  GUARANTEED 
SA  IT   LAKE     C  tTY,   UTAH 


WHttK  m  HUB  (ftp 


.ATER 


MIND  IF  I  STICK  AROUND 
AND  SEE  WHAT  KIND  OF  A  JOB 
YOU    SHELLUBRICATION 
FELLOWS    DO? 


GLAD  TO  HAVE  YOU, SIR 

I'LL  GIVE  YOU  THE 

HIGH  SPOTS  AS  WE 

GO  ALONG 


£3 


BEFORE   WE  LIFT  A  FINGER 
TO  SERVICE  YOUR  CAR, WE 
GET  OUT  THIS    CHART  OF 
YOUR    MAKE  AND  MODEL. 
DEVISED  JOINTLY  BY  SHELL 

ENGINEERS    AND  THE 
ENGINEERS  WHO  BUILT  YOUR 
CAR,  IT  TELLS  US  EXACTLY 
HOW  THE  JOB  SHOULD 
BE   DONE 


^ 


....WE  USE  AS  MANY  AS  ELEVEN 
KINDS  OF  LUBRICANTS   FOR  A 
SINGLE  CAR.  AND  THIS  VERY 
LATEST  EQUIPMENT  ENABLES 
US  TO  REACH  ALL  THE    "HARD- 
TO- GET- AT  "POINTS 


m 


i  nnfT)[i)(i, 


Don't  take  chances  with  any  kind  of 
car  greasing.  Investigators  recently 
discovered  that  only  one  out  of  every 
hundred  greasing  stations  is  equipped 
to  service  a  car  properly. 

Is  it  any  wonder  that  faulty  lubri- 
cation is  estimated  to  cause  over  50% 
of  all  repair  bills  today! 

Play  safe  ...  go  to  your  neighbor- 
hood Shell  dealer  for  error- proof, 
thorough  SHELLUBRICATION. 
Working  with  special  equipment  and  a  complete  stock  of  Shell  - 
engineered  oils  and  greases,  trained  Shellubrication  men  see  that 
every  point  on  your  car  gets  precisely  the  service  it  needs. 

Look  for  the  Shellubrication  sign  in  your  own  neighborhood. 
Drive  in  and  ask  about  this  modern  car  upkeep  system. 


l^L^LiLtlJJ^L^l^LlI 
The  Modern 
eep  Service 

f 


ALL  THESE  EXTRAS  WITHOUT  EXTRA  CHARGE! 

We  rubber  -  dress  tires  and  running  boards  . . .  vacuum 
or  brush  out  upholstery . . .  polish  windows  and  shine 
chromium  . . .  wipe  off  body  . . .  silence  body  squeaks  . . . 
check  lights  . .  .check  battery —  clean  lenses  . . .  and  give 
you  many  other  extra  services — all  without  extra  charge 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


3-Unrnatched  ability  for 
all  row-crop  work. 


Bnnas  You    All  of  These 

VALUABLE ■FEATURES 


•  SCORES  of  valuable  improvements 
have  been  made  in  Farmall  tractors 
since  the  original  FARMALL  revolution- 
ized tractor  design  16  years  ago.  The 
greatest  all-purpose  tractor  value  on 
the  market  is  today's  FARMALL.  If  you 
want  power,  insist  on  smooth,  4-cylin- 
der  FARMALL  power,  with  valve-in-head 
efficiency  and  economy.  If  you  want 
beauty,  insist  on  the  useful  beauty  of 


FARMALL  power  and  performance.  If 
you  want  accessibility,  insist  on  the  con- 
venience of  Farmall's  simple,  unclut- 
tered design.  If  you  want  to  be  sure, 
insist  on  the  Red  Tractor — the  one 
and  only  genuine  FARMALL.  On  display 
in  McCormick-Deering  dealer  and 
Company -owned  branch  showrooms 
everywhere.  Remember  the  farmer's 
proudest  boast:  "I  Own  a  FARMALL !" 


International  Harvester  Company 

(IHCOHPOHATED) 

180  North  Michigan  Avenue  Chicago,  Illinois 


J>ft 


PRICES 


«% 


<?&**  't3  *  *» 


FARMALL  20  equipped 
with  rubber  tires.  This 
rubber-tired  tractor 
has  been  reduced  $140. 


McCORMICK-DEERING  FARMALL 


Hi  • 


>        -  .■  .-,■-' 


/MmprooementEra 


'The  Glory  of  God  is  Intelligence' 


JANUARY,    1939 


VOLUME    42 


NUMBER    1 


VTHE    VOICE    OF    THE    CHURCH' 


OFFICIAL  ORGAN  OF  THE  PRIESTHOOD  QUORUMS, 
MUTUAL  IMPROVEMENT  ASSOCIATIONS,  DEPART- 
MENT OF  EDUCATION,  MUSIC  COMMITTEE,  WARD 
TEACHERS,  AND  OTHER  AGENCIES  OF  THE  CHURCH 
OF     JESUS     CHRIST     OF     LATTER-DAY     SAINTS. 


Heber  J. 

Grant, 

John  A. 

Widtsoe, 

Editors 

Richard  L.  Evans, 

Managing 

Editor 

Marba  C 

.  Josephson, 

Associate  Editor 

George  Q. 

Morris,  General  Mgr. 

Lucy  G.  Cannon,  Associate  Mgr. 

I.  K.  Orton 

,  Business  Mgr, 

JjobJbL  d$*  CofdtsmiA. 


Anti-Liquor-Tobacco  Campaign 


.Heber  J,  Grant     7 


Greetings  of  the  First  Presidency 5 

Evidences  and  Reconciliations John  A»  Widtsoe     6 

Tribute  to  a  Leader Richard  L»  Evans     8 

There  Stands  a  Man Richard  L.  Evans     9 

Portrait  of  a  Young  Man — Part  3 Rachel  Grant  Taylor  12 

The  Story  of  Our  Hymns George  D,  Pyper  22 

An  Imperial  Luau Emma  K.  Mossman  24 

Lehi's  Route  to  America C.  Douglas  Barnes  26 

Song:  Seek  Not  for  Riches Music  by  George  H*  Durham  30 


Church  Moves  On  33 

Priesthood:      Melchizedek 36 

Aaronic  39 

Ward  Teaching  41 

Genealogical  Society 42 

Mutual  Messages: 

Executives'  Greeting  43 

Executives 43 

Effective     Librarianship,     Au- 


relia  Bennion 45 

Adults   45 

M  Men  45 

Gleaners    47 

M  Men-Gleaners  47 

Explorers 48 

Juniors  48 

Boy  Scouts  ..48 

Bee-Hive  Girls  48 

Field  Photos .....44,  46 


Sp&ooL  JszobuMA. 


The  Power  to  Achieve Earl  J,  Glade  10 

Utah's  Pioneer  Women  Doctors — Part  I — Romania  B.  Pratt 

Claire  W*  Noall  16 

The  Protestors  of  Christendom — Part  X James  L,  Barker  20 


Exploring    the  Universe,   Frank- 
lin S.  Harris,  Jr 3 

On  the  Book  Rack 31 

Homing:       Spice    of    the    Meal, 


Mathilda  Buron 34 

Here's  How  35 

Index  to  Advertisers  44 

Your  Page  and  Ours 64 


"Of  One  Blood" John  A,  Widtsoe  32 

Young  People  Going  to  Large  Cities Presiding  Bishopric  32 

Jidwn,  (posdfuy,  tfAjoA&tvjcfuL  (pu&lsL 

"O  Frabjous  Day" Estelle  Webb  Thomas  14 

The  Native  Blood— Chapter  3 Albert  R,  Lyman  18 

Confidence — A  Short  Short  Story Lorin  F.  Butler  23 

Frontispiece:    Pattern   of  Trees,  Wallace 8 

Vesta  P.  Crawford 4      Poetry  Page  29 

To  Heber  J.  Grant,  by  John  M.  Scriptural   Crossword   Puzzle 62 

JhsL  Qov&Jv 

This  prize-winning  photograph  is  by  John  Muller  of  New  York  City,  by  whose 
generous  courtesy  it  is  reproduced  as  our  January  cover.  Its  intense  feeling  is 
composed  both  of  realism  and  symbolism,  as  it  makes  one  aware  of  winter  with  its 
beauties  and  its  ravages. 


(Dd  y^UL  JilWW- 

How  one  man  stopped  smoking? 
Page    1 

What  relationship  has  been  dis- 
covered between  tobacco  and  can- 
cer of  the  lungs? Page  3 

What  the  First  Presidency  have  to 

say  in  their  annual  greeting? 

Page    5 

Where  the  "lost  tribes"  are? Page  6 

What  President  Grant  says  concern- 
ing the  Church-wide  Anti-tobacco- 
liquor  Campaign? Page  7 

What  notables  of  Church,  state,  and 
business  said  about  the  President 
of  the  Church  on  the  Twentieth 
Anniversary  of  his  Presidency  ?_„. 
Page   8 

How  a  young  man  can  acquire  the 
power  to  achieve? Page  10 

Who  were  the  pioneer  women  doc- 
tors of  the   West   and  how  they 

"broke"  into  the  profession? 

Page  16 

What  changed  Luther  from  a  de- 
vout priest  to  a  Protestor?.._.Page  20 

What  is  an  "Imperial  Luau?"__Page  24 

What  are  some  of  the  speculative 
views  concerning  Lehi's  Route  to 
America? Page  26 

What  word  has  gone  out  to  young 
people  who  are  living  away  from 
home?  Page  32 

What  two  spices  come  from  the 
same  tree?  Page  34 

What  is  the  cost  of  the  new  Mel- 
chizedek Priesthood  Course  of 
Study?    Page   36 

What  family   is   raising   money   to 

microfilm  European  records? 

Page  42 

How  the  stake  missions  are  progress- 
ing?   Page  38 


EXECUTIVE    AND    EDITORIAL 
OFFICES: 

50  North  Main  Street,  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah 

Copyright  1939,  by  the  Young  Men's  Mutual 
Improvement  Association  Corporation  of  the 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints. 
All  rights  reserved.  Subscription  price,  $2.00 
a  year,  in   advance;  20c  Single  Copy. 

Entered  at  the  Post  Office,  Salt  Lake  City, 
Utah,  as  second-class  matter.  Acceptance  for 
mailing  at  special  rate  of  postage  provided 
for  in  section  1103,  Act  of  October,  1917, 
authorized  July   2,   1918. 

The  Improvement  Era  is  not  responsible 
for  unsolicited  manuscripts,  but  welcomes  con- 
tributions. All  manuscripts  must  be  accompanied 
by  sufficient  postage  for  delivery  and  return. 

NATIONAL  ADVERTISING 
REPRESENTATIVES 

Francis  M.  Mayo,  Salt  Lake  City 
Edward  S.  Townsend,  San  Francisco 
George  T.  Hopewell  &  Co.,  New  York 
E.  J.  Powers  &  Co.,  Chicago 
Hil.  F.  Best,  Detroit 

MEMBER  OF  THE  AUDIT  BUREAU  OF 
CIRCULATIONS 


A  MAGAZINE  FOR  EVERY 
MEMBER  OF  THE   FAMILY 


£xphfdnq.  ihiL  lAnw&JtAJL 


Tt  is  estimated  that  from  60  to  70  per 
cent  of  all  four-ply  passenger  car 
tire  failures  result  from  injuries  to  the 
tires  made  by  jamming  the  tire  against 
the  curb  in  careless  parking. 
4 

/"^ver  4,000  photographs  of  snowflakes 
^^  have  been  made  by  Wilson  Bentley. 
Though  all  the  snowflakes  had  the  same 
symmetry,  no  two  were  alike. 

«♦ : 

Cmoking  of  tobacco  is  responsible  for 
*^  the  increased  deaths  due  to  cancer 
of  the  lung,  according  to  Drs.  Alton 
Ochsner  and  Michael  De  Bakey,  in  a 
report  to  a  cancer  symposium.  Inhal- 
ing smoke,  constantly  repeated,  over 
long  periods,  irritates  the  lining  of  the 
bronchial  tubes. 


'T'he  supposed  love  for  music  of  snakes 
is  a  myth  believed  all  over  the 
world.  Actually  no  snake  is  interested 
in  music  of  any  kind.  The  music  played 
on  flutes  by  charmers  is  bluff;  the  move- 
ment of  the  snake  is  fencing  for  an 
opening  as  the  charmer  moves  from 
side  to  side  with  rhythmic  motion. 
4 

*M[ansen  and  other  Arctic  explorers 
^  have  studied  the  thickening  of  sea 
ice.  They  found  that  in  the  first  win- 
ter's freezing  the  ice  is  from  7  to  9  feet 
thick;  the  second  winter  adds  1  to  3 
feet,  and  the  third  probably  less  than 
another  foot. 


/California  has  its  own  Grand  Can- 
^  yon,  but  it  is  under  the  sea,  off  the 
shore  at  Monterey.  The  course  of  the 
submarine  canyon,  which  goes  to 
depths  of  6,000  feet,  has  been  followed 
for  over  30  miles,  and  its  contours, 
similar  to  those  of  the  Grand  Canyon 
of  the  Colorado,  have  been  studied. 
> 

HPhere  is  some  evidence  that  fear  may 
be  a  factor  in  behavior  in  higher 
animals.  A  dog  was  once  frightened 
into  a  sort  of  fit  by  a  bone  drawn  across 
the  floor  on  an  invisible  thread. 


T_Tow  cold  is  Iceland  in  the  winter? 
A  *•  The  average  temperature  of  Reyk- 
javik, the  capital,  is  about  the  same  as 
in  Philadelphia,  or  Milan,  Italy,  in  Jan- 
uary. Also  surprising  is  that  tourist 
companies  which  promise  to  show  their 


By  FRANKLIN  S.  HARRIS,  JR. 

passengers  the  ice-pack  are  sometimes 
forced  to  carry  them  200  miles  beyond 
Spitsbergen  Islands,  which  are  them- 
selves 360  miles  north  of  Norway  into 

the  Arctic  Ocean. 

4 

"VTS/hen  blindfolded  persons  walk  in 
*"  what  they  intend  to  be  a  straight 
path  they  actually  move  in  more  or 
less  of  a  regular  clock-spring  spiral. 
The  same  is  true  if  a  blindfolded  man 
drives  a  car  in  a  field  or  gives  directions 
to  the  driver.  The  blindfolded  swimmer 
does  the  same.    Unexpectedly  the  same 


person  may  walk,  swim,  or  drive  in 
both  right  and  left  spiral  turns  in  the 
same  experiment.  The  direction  does 
not  seem  to  have  anything  to  do  with 

right-or  left-handedness. 

4 — ; , 

■\\7hen  a  picture  has  been  taken  in  a 
vv  camera  by  exposing  the  film  to 
light,  the  "image"  in  the  film  can  be 
destroyed  by  exposure  to  infra  red  light, 
so  that  the  film  is  as  though  no  exposure 
had  been  made  as  shown  on  develop- 
ment. The  "image"  becomes  more 
stable  with  time  and  is  less  easily  de- 
stroyed. 


Ixperience 


says  y 


STAt* 


o^s 


tvtfc* 


VJHE*1 


UT*H 


(ptdieAn, /$.  Jag&a. 


E 


By  VESTA  P.  CRAWFORD 


i  THEREAL  tapestry  the  winter  weaves 
With  broidered  loops  of  ivory  thread, 
And  boughs  forget  their  web  of  summer  leaves 
To  wear  the  winter  gossamer  instead, 
And  branches  bent  from  weight  of  stormy  loom 
Now  trace  in  frost  their  ancient  filigree, 
A  pearled  and  velvety  pattern  of  bloom 
In  splendor  woven  for  the  lovely  tree. 


T 


HE  boughs  forget  the  scent  of  April  night- 
No  twig  recalls  the  flame  of  autumn  glow; 
But  regal  wears  its  raiment  new  and  white 
Spun  from  the  gauzy  weft  of  gleaming  snow. 
In  gratitude  for  this,  the  jewelled  tree, 
I  shall  forget  the  summer  tapestry. 


Protograph   by    Walter  P.  Cottam. 


vm^-MMW 


WS«1« 


^m-iz 


Wwmi 


■  .      ■  ■■:..■■■■:: 


QrZTr^S  °/~5T>&  °/"57>->9  °J^T>-&  °^Tj-^&  °/~S?Tr-^  °/^Tt-^$  °/~2T>^S  °J~Z?>J1  °/^?T^-5  o 


i 


Tribune  Photograph. 
THE    FIRST    PRESIDENCY,    LEFT   TO    RIGHT,    PRESIDENT   J. 
REUBEN   CLARK,  JR.,    PRESIDENT  HEBER   J.   GRANT,   PRESI- 
DENT DAVID  0.  McKAY. 

7H  T  THIS  Christmas  Time  we  give 
f — I  to  the  Saints  and  to  the  world  a 
Christian  greeting. 

We  proclaim  to  the  peoples  of  the 
earth  that  Jesus  is  the  Christ,  the  Only 
Begotten  of  the  Father,  the  Redeemer 
of  the  World,  the  First  Fruits  of  the 
Resurrection. 

We  testify  to  the  truth  of  His  own 
words  when  He  said: 

I   am  the  way,  the  truth,   and  the  life:  no  man 
cometh  unto   the  Father,  but  by  me.      (John   14:6) 

We  deeply  deplore  the  spirit  of  the 
anti-Christ  that  is  abroad  in  the 
world,  and  with  sorrowing  hearts 
contemplate  the  brutality  of  war  and 
other  forms  of  cruelty  and  injustice 
that  even  in  this  professedly  enlight- 
ened age  are  still  manifest. 


dtwttnga 

OF  THE  FIRST 
PRESIDENCY 


We  declare  that  the  Lord  expects 
men  to  forsake  the  ways  He  has  for- 
bidden, and  that  He  beckons  them  to 
come  into  the  straight  and  narrow 
path  which  leads  to  peace  and  hap- 
piness. 

We  admonish  every  man  of  high 
or  low  degree,  and  in  whatever  land, 
to  act  and  live  in  accordance  with  the 
revealed  will  of  the  Lord,  and  we 
promise  to  every  one  of  God's  chil- 
dren who  does  so  live,  not  only  a  joy 
in  life  and  in  living  that  nothing  else 
can  bring,  but  also  salvation  in  the 
world  to  come,  with  an  eternity  of 
service,  of  unspeakable  happiness, 
and  a  progression  that  shall  never 
end. 

We  thank  God  for  His  bounteous 
gifts  to  His  children.  We  praise  His 
name  for  His  mighty  works  among 
men.  We  are  ever  grateful  for  His 
boundless  mercy  which  we  invoke 
upon  both  the  righteous  and  the  un- 
righteous. We  pray  that  to  darkened 
minds  there  shall  come  light,  and  that 
to  the  righteous  there  shall  come  a 
fulness  of  blessing  under  God's  wis- 
dom. 


The  First  Presidency 


Evidences  and 
reconciliations 


J/ribsiA.  ogL  Qam&L? 

Tn  the  field  of  historical  speculation,  few  themes 

have  been  more  assiduously  theorized  about  than 
the  location  of  the  lost  tribes  of  Israel.  The  vol- 
uminous literature  concerning  the  subject,  "proves" 
that  the  tribes  may  be  in  any  land  under  the  sun, 
according  to  the  theory  accepted.  In  our  Church, 
several  books  on  the  subject,  presenting  differing 
views,  have  been  written  by  thoughtful,  honest  men. 
Fortunately,  so  far  as  human  happiness  here  or 
hereafter  is  concerned,  it  matters  not  a  whit  where 
they  are  located.  Unfortunately,  some  brethren 
have  entangled  the  subject  with  the  theology  of  the 
Gospel  to  their  own  discomfiture. 

Throughout  its  long  history  as  one  nation,  the 
Hebrews  had  been  in  almost  continuous  warfare 
with  neighboring  people;  and  indeed  the  people  of 
the  valley  of  the  Euphrates  on  the  east,  and  of 
Egypt  on  the  south  and  west,  mighty  nations,  had 
paid  their  warlike  respects  to  the  children  of  Abra- 
ham. Wars  and  warfare  form  a  large  part  of  the 
history  of  united  Israel.  Only  under  David  and 
Solomon  was  the  kingdom  made  into  an  empire 
strong  enough  to  dictate  terms  to  weaker  neighbors 
and  engender  wholesome  respect  among  larger 
powers. 

After  the  death  of  Solomon,  the  divided  king- 
doms, divided  also  in  strength,  were  subject  to 
similar  warfare.  Invasion  followed  invasion;  the 
larger  powers  to  the  East,  viewing  Palestine  as  a 
strategically  important  corridor  to  Egypt,  de- 
scended, with  powerful  armies  upon  the  now  petty 
kingdoms.  The  southern  kingdom  of  Judah  and 
the  northern  kingdom  of  Israel  became  little  more 
than  vassals  to  Babylonian  powers. 

Following  the  practice  of  the  times,  the  victors 
carried  large  numbers  of  the  vanquished  people  into 
captivity,  to  serve  as  slaves,  craftsmen,  builders,  or 
even  statesmen,  according  to  their  gifts  and  talents. 
There  were  many  such  captivities  from  among  the 
people  of  Israel. 

The  captivity  connected  with  the  lost  tribes  is 
mentioned  in  2  Kings  17:6 — "In  the  ninth  year  of 
Hoshea  the  King  of  Assyria  took  Samaria,  and 
carried  Israel  away  into  Assyria,  and  settled  them 
in  Khalah  and  on  the  Khabur,  a  river  of  Gozan, 
and  in  the  cities  of  the  Medes."  A  similar  state- 
ment is  made  in  1  Chronicles  5:26.  That  is  all  we 
hear  of  them.  From  that  time  they  are  literally 
"lost"  to  history,  except  for  a  passage  in  the 
Apocrypha,  II  Esdras,  13:40-47: 

Those  are  the  ten  tribes,  which  were  carried  away  pris- 
oners out  of  their  own  land,  in  the  time  of  Osea  the  King, 


whom  Salmanasar  the  King  of  Assyria  led  away  captive, 
and  he  carried  them  over  the  waters,  and  so  came  they  into 
another  land.  But  they  took  this  counsel  among  themselves, 
that  they  would  leave  the  multitude  of  the  heathen,  and  go 
forth  into  a  further  country,  where  never  mankind  dwelt, 
that  they  might  there  keep  statutes,  which  they  never  kept 
in  their  own  land.  And  they  entered  into  Euphrates  by  the 
narrow  passages  of  the  river.  For  the  Most  High  then 
showed  signs  for  them,  and  held  still  the  flood,  till  they  were 
passed  over.  For  through  that  country  there  was  a  great 
way  to  go,  namely  of  a  year  and  a  half:  and  the  same 
region  is  called  Arsareth.  Then  they  dwelt  there  until  the 
latter  time;  and  now  when  they  shall  begin  to  come,  the 
Highest  shall  stay  the  springs  of  the  stream  again,  that  they 
may  go  through. 

Many  fantastic  theories  have  been  set  up  con- 
cerning the  location  of  the  lost  tribes.  One  declares,- 
for  example,  that  in  the  northern  countries  are 
vast  subterranean  caverns  in  which  the  lost  tribes 
live  and  prosper,  awaiting  the  day  of  their  return. 
Another,  by  diagram  and  argument  suggests  that 
a  secondary  small  planet  is  attached  at  the  north 
pole,  to  the  earth  by  a  narrow  neck,  and  that  the 
lost  tribes  live  there.  (See  Dalton,  The  Key  to 
This  Earth. )  Others,  even  more  unacceptable  are 
in  circulation. 

The  view  most  commonly  held  by  members  of 
the  Church  is  that  a  body  of  Israelites  are  actually 
living  in  some  unknown  place  on  earth,  probably  in 
the  north.  In  support  of  this  opinion  are  the  com- 
mon knowledge  that  the  earth  is  not  yet  fully  ex- 
plored, and  numerous  scriptural  references  to  a 
gathering  of  Israel  from  the  north  countries.  Jere- 
miah speaks  of  the  house  of  Israel  coming  "out  of 
the  north  country."  (Jeremiah  3: 18;  23:8;  31 : 8-1 1; 
Hosea  1:11.)  In  the  Book  of  Mormon,  also,  there 
are  references  to  Israel  coming  out  of  the  north  in 
the  latter  days.  Ether  prophesies  of  those  "who 
were  scattered  and  gathered  in  from  the  four 
quarters  of  the  earth,  and  from  the  north  countries." 
In  modern  revelation  the  north  countries  are  men- 
tioned in  connection  with  the  restoration  of  the  ten 
tribes.  "They  who>  are  in  the  north  countries  shall 
come  in  remembrance  before  the  Lord,  and  their 
prophets  shall  hear  His  voice,  and  shall  no  longer 
stay  themselves,  and  they  shall  smite  the  rocks,  and 
the  ice  shall  flow  down  at  their  presence."  ( Doc.  and 
Cov.  133:26-34. )  Moreover,  in  the  Kirtland  Tem- 
ple, Moses  appeared  to  Joseph  Smith  and  Oliver 
Cowdery  and  "committed  unto  us  the  keys  of  .  .  . 
the  leading  of  the  ten  tribes  from  the  land  of  the 
north."     (Doc.  and  Cov.  110:11.) 

Another  view  held  by  many  is  that  the  lost  tribes 
are  in  the  northern  part  of  the  earth,  thus  fulfilling 
that  scriptural  requirement,  but  not  necessarily  in 
one  body.  In  support  are  quoted  the  many  refer- 
ences in  scripture  to  the  gathering  of  Israel  from 
the  four  corners  of  the  earth  and  the  isles  of  the 
sea.  Further  than  that,  while  north  countries  are 
mentioned,  nowhere  is  it  specifically  stated  that 
the  lost  tribes  are  in  one  body  apart  from  other 


Uhs  EDITOR'S  P 


Under  date  of  April  26,  1937,  the  First  Presidency  wrote  to  the  Council  of 
the  Twelve  in  part  as  follows: 
"You  may  proceed  to  organize  a  campaign  throughout  the  Church  against 
the  use  of  alcoholic  beverages.  We  suggest,  however,  that  you  continue  to  lay 
special  emphasis  upon  the  evils  that  follow  the  use  of  the  cigarette  and  other  forms 
of  tobacco. 

"We  commend  your  plan  to  make  this  campaign  a  project  for  all  the  Priest- 
hood quorums,  both  Melchizedek  and  Aaronic,  charging  the  quorums  with  the 
responsibility  of  (a)  keeping  their  own  members  free  from  the  vice  of  using 
alcohol  and  tobacco,  and  (b)  assisting  all  others  to  do  likewise.  .  .  . 

"Auxiliary  organizations  should  give  to  the  Priesthood  quorums  such  help 
in  the  campaign  as  may  be  consistently  requested  of  them  by  Priesthood  quo- 
rums." 

Since  this  letter  was  written,  an  educational  campaign  throughout  all  the 
stakes  of  the  Church  for  the  non-use  of  alcoholic  beverages  and  tobacco  has 
been  inaugurated  along  the  lines  indicated  in  the  letter  of  the  First  Presidency. 
I  commend  this  movement  to  all  stake,  ward,  Priesthood  quorum,  and  auxiliary 
organization  authorities,  and  urge  them  to  cooperate  through  committees  and 
special  workers  to  make  the  campaign  thorough  and  complete. 

The  youth,  as  well  as  all  adult  members  of  the  Church,  should  be  reached  by 
this  movement  to  the  end  that  they  may  become  free  from  the  use  of  these  things 
that  the  Lord  has  said  are  not  good  for  man. 


FS 


peoples.  It  is  contended  that  the  wandering  tribes 
actually  settled  in  northern  Europe  and  Asia,  and 
throughout  the  centuries  mingled  with  the  people 
there,  until  the  blood  of  Israel  runs  strong  among 
the  northern  peoples.  Thus  is  explained  the  rela- 
tively ready  acceptance  of  the  Gospel  by  the  British, 
Scandinavian,  and  German  peoples.  Those  who 
hold  this  view  feel  that  prophecy  has  been  literally 
fulfilled  by  the  gathering  of  Latter-day  Saints  from 
Northern  Europe  to  the  Church  in  Western  Amer- 
ica. The  notable  British-Israel  movement  is  built 
upon  such  a  dispersion  of  the  lost  tribes.  (See 
Stephen  Malan,   The  Ten   Tribes), 

A  third  view  attempts  to  reconcile  the  two  pre- 
ceding ones.  We  are  reminded  that  historically 
and  prophetically  it  is  well  known  that  Israel  has 
been  scattered  among  the  nations.  By  removal  from 
the  Holy  Land  through  successive  captivities,  and 
voluntary  migrations,  often  due  to  persecution, 
and  by  intermarriage  with  other  races,  the  blood  of 
Israel  is  now  found  in  almost  every  land  and  among 
every  people.  The  ancient  writers  spoke  of  "the 
twelve  tribes  which  are  scattered  abroad."  It  is 
suggested  that  on  the  northward  march  of  the  lost 
tribes,  many  fell  from  the  company,  remained  at 
various  points  of  the  journey,  there  became  mixed 
with  the  people  living  there,  until  today,  along  the 
line  of   the   exodus,  the  blood  of   Israel  may  be 


found.  It  is  further  suggested  that  a  part  of  the 
ten  tribes  may  be  somewhere  in  seclusion,  but  also 
that  their  blood  may  be  among  the  nations  through 
which  they  passed  on  their  long  migration,  thou- 
sands of  miles  if  they  reached  the  arctic  regions. 
( See  George  Reynolds,  Are  We  of  Israel?  Also, 
Allen  H.  Godbey,  The  Lost  Tribes,  a  Myth.) 

The  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints 
believes  in  the  restoration  of  the  ten  tribes;  and  that 
it  is  a  part  of  the  mission  of  the  Church  to  gather 
scattered  Israel  into  the  fold  of  truth.  It  knows 
that  throughout  the  ages,  under  the  wise  economy 
of  the  Lord,  the  blood  of  Israel,  most  susceptible 
to  Gospel  truth,  has  been  mingled  with  all  nations. 
The  scattering  of  Israel  is  a  frequent  theme  of 
writers  of  the  Bible.  So  firm  is  this  belief  that  the 
Latter-day  Saints,  for  over  a  hundred  years,  at 
great  sacrifices  of  money,  energy,  and  life  itself, 
have  gone  out  over  the  earth  to  preach  the  restored 
Gospel,  and  bring  all  men  into  the  House  of  Israel. 

The  question  concerning  the  location  of  the  lost 
tribes,  of  itself  unimportant,  is  interesting  in  show- 
ing how  such  matters  are  allowed  to  occupy  men's 
time  and  tempers,  in  a  day  that  calls  for  helpful 
action  among  those  who  are  within  our  reach. 
Time  will  reveal  the  whereabouts  of  the  lost  tribes. 
It  is  our  concern  to  help  fulfil  the  plan  of  God,  by 
eager  daily  service. — J.  A.  W, 


Tribune  Photograph. 


THE  GUESTS  AT  THE  HEAD  TABLE  MARCH  IN 


J/JJbjuJjL  to cl  3bwudsuc 

Overriding  all  lines  of  race,  religion,  and  material 
interests,  the  business  contemporaries  of  President 
Grant  called  together  more  than  five  hundred  leaders 
of  the  West  and  the  Nation  to  do  him  honor,  on  the 
Twentieth  Anniversary  of  his  Presidency  of  the 
Church. 

By  RICHARD  L.  EVANS 

Of  the  First  Council 
of  the  Seventy 

eighty-second  birthday  anniversary 
(November  22,  1856),  and  marked 
the  twentieth  anniversary  of  his 
Presidency  of  the  Church  ( Novem- 
ber 23,  1918). 

(Continued  on  page   54) 


A   GENERAL  VIEW  OF  THE  LAFAYETTE   ROOM 
AND  THE  SEATED  BANQUET  GUESTS. 

Photograph  by  D.  F.   Davis. 


TO  HEBER  J.  GRANT 

( Written  by  the  Hon.  John  M.  Wal- 
lace, Mai/or  o[  Salt  Lake  City,  as 
part  of  his  tribute  for  the  occasion  of 
November  23,  1938.) 

I   STOOD   apart  from   the   granite 
shaft 
That  is  the  Great  White  Throne, 
That  distance  might  in  truth  impart 
The  vastness  of  the  mighty  dome. 

Great  clefts  that  marked  the  vaulting 

thrust 
That  raised  a  mountain  crest  so  high 
Were  moulded  in  the  gathering  dusk, 
Its  crags  were  softened  in  a  cloudless 

sky. 

I  stood  apart  from  a  man  of  men 
And  beyond,  in  timeless  space. 
His  labors  had  fashioned  a  monument 
Which  weathering  years  will  not  ef- 
face. 

I  stood  apart  from  a  servant  of  Him 
Who  sits  on  the  Great  White  Throne; 
His  monument  is  a  spire  of  grace 
Built  from  God's  work  alone. 


Tribune  Photograph. 
PRESIDENT    GRANT     AND     PRESIDENT     McKAY 
ARE  SEEN  STANDING  BY  THE  BIRTHDAY  CAKE. 


There  are  times  when  the  use  of 
superlatives  is  justifiable,  and 
such  a  time  was  the  occasion 
of  November  23,  1938,  when,  over- 
riding all  lines  of  race,  religion,  poli- 
tics, or  material  interests,  more  than 
five  hundred  national  and  western 
leaders  of  business,  industry,  and 
the  professions  gathered  at  a  ban- 
quet and  program  in  the  Lafayette 
Room  of  the  Hotel  Utah,  Salt  Lake 
City,  to  join  in  saying  of  the  guest  of 
honor,  President  Heber  J.  Grant: 
"There  stands  a  man!" 

The  affair  was  spontaneously  con- 
ceived and  executed  by  a  group  of 
Salt  Lake  City  business  men,  widely 
diversified  as  to  religious  affiliations, 
political  persuasions,  and  business 
interests.  The  occasion  was  one  of 
unblemished  good  will,  high  honor, 
and  affectionate  regard  for  President 
Grant.  The  day  followed  his 
8 


RE  STANDS  A  MAN 


''This  brief  characterization  of  the 
life  of  a  man  appeared  originally 

UNDER  THE  TITLE  "PORTRAIT  OF  A  Man" 
AS  PART  OF  THE  HeBER  J,  GRANT  SOUVE- 
NIR PROGRAM  PREPARED  FOR  THE  OCCA- 
SION REFERRED  TO  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE. 


O 


|n  A  bleak  day  of  winter,  November  22, 
1856,  an  unheralded  infant  opened  his 
eyes  upon  the  snow-covered  barrenness  of  a  desert  outpost 
whose  political  and  economic  future  was  insecure.  The  meagre 
help  afforded  by  a  frontier  community  attended  the  heroic 
pioneer  mother  at  the  birth  of  this,  her  first  and  only  child; 
and  the  father,  first  Mayor  of  Salt  Lake  City,  died  of  pneu- 
monia nine  days  later- — an  able  but  overworked  leader  in  the 
spiritual,  economic,  and  political  life  of  the  struggling  settle- 
ment. Thus  it  was  that  widowhood  came  to  a  noble  woman, 
and  a  fatherless  future  to  an  unknown  boy. 

The  stubborn  drive  of  necessity  from  without,  and  the 
ceaseless  urge  of  persistence  from  within,  carried  the  boy 
from  delicate  health  to  early  achievement  in  sports,  and  from 
poverty  to  early  success  in  business.  With  formal  education 
limited,  he  nevertheless  became  proprietor  of  his  own  in- 
surance and  investment  business  at  nineteen;  an  officer 
of  a  banking  institution  at  twenty;  professor  of  penmanship 
and  accounting  in  his  early  twenties;  and  before  citizenship 
was  conferred  upon  him  at  twenty-one  he  had  built  his 
mother  a  new  home,  and  married  and  begun  to  establish  his 
own  family.  Before  the  age  of  twenty-four  he  had  been  called 
away  from  Salt  Lake  City  to  fill  a  difficult  and  important 
Stake  President's  post  in  Tooele.  Still  under  twenty-six,  he 
set  aside  his  own  cherished  ambitions  of  wealth  and  political 
honor  (he  could  undoubtedly  have  been  first  Governor  of 
the  State  of  Utah) ,  to  become  "the  servant  of  all,"  in  response 
to  a  call  to  the  Apostleship  from  the  Church  that  brought  his 
parents  West  and  claimed  his  father's  life. 

To  look  at  this  man  now  one  might  be  led  to  suppose  that 
the  obstacles  of  his  life  had  faded  away  before  him.  It  would 
be  possible  to  believe  that  the  rough  places  had  been  easily 
traversed  by  his  determined  stride,  that  success  had  come 
with  moderate  effort,  that  Providence  had  spared  him  much  of 
life's  travail.  The  flawless  performance  of  a  master  musi- 
cian looks  easy,  too,  and,  in  our  enjoyment  of  his  art,  we 
sometimes  close  our  thoughts  to  the  toil  and  heartbreak,  the 
faith  and  vision,  that  mark  the  upward  course. 

This  man  is  great,  not  because  he  has  been  spared  the 
hardships  of  life,  but  because  he  has  overcome  them.  Provi- 
dence gave  him  strength,  not  ease;  courage,  not  protection; 
faith,  not  a  favored  lot;  integrity,  not  freedom  from  tempta- 
tion. He  has  buried  the  beloved  companions  of  his  youth, 
and  has  seen  death  take  his  only  sons  in  childhood,  while 
none  are  left  to  carry  on  his  name,  and  yet  there  has  been 
found  no  bitterness  in  his  heart,  but  only  faith  in  God  and  in 
His  ability  to  bring  ultimate  good  from  all  things.  He  has 
seen  ambitions  swept  aside  and  business  ventures  crushed, 
but  was  never  found  without  courage  to  carry  on.  He  has 
seen  personal  wealth  change  to  staggering  debt  overnight, 
but  yet  has  refused  the  legal  protection  of  bankruptcy,  pre- 
ferring to  work  through  years  of  deprivation,  and  his  family 
with  him,  to  pay  off  every  dollar  of  obligation. 

Save  only  Brigham  Young,  perhaps  no  man  has  organized, 
fostered,  or  encouraged  more  industries  and  economic  enter- 
prises in  the  inland  West  than  Heber  J.  Grant.  His  name 
appears   upon   the  officers'   and  directors'  rosters   of  banks. 


railroads,  insurance  companies,  implement  houses,  mercantile 
institutions,  and  manufacturing  enterprises- — not  only  because 
he  is  the  leader  of  a  world-wide  people — but  because  he  has 
always  stood  with  and  for  industry,  economic  integrity,  and 
individual  security.  More  than  any  other  living  man,  he 
symbolizes  growth  in  the  West  from  the  old  to  the  new. 

It  is  well  to  remember  as  we  look  back  through  the  life 
of  Heber  J.  Grant  that  our  perspective  now  presents  a  much 
different  picture  from  the  view  he  had  when  he  was  at  the 
other  end  looking  this  way.  We  know  now  what  he  was 
destined  to  become,  but  he  knew  then  only  that  life  must 
be  lived  honorably  and  industriously,  in  order  that  a  widowed 
mother  might  be  cared  for,  that  a  family  might  be  reared, 
and  that  the  Lord,  his  Maker,  might,  at  that  day  when  all 
shall  stand  before  Him,  say  "Well  done." 

The  life  of  the  man  we  honor,  he  himself  has  builded 
upon  the  bedrock  of  correct  principles — undeviating  de- 
votion to  his  religious  convictions;  unfaltering  faith  in  a 
Supreme  Being  who  is  the  Father  of  mankind;  generosity  and 
brotherly  kindness;  industry,  persistence,  loyalty;  financial, 
political,  and  moral  integrity — and  these  he  has  pursued  in 
times  of  convenience  and  in  times  of  inconvenience.  Con- 
cerning these  foundation  principles  he  has  not  asked  what 
is  expedient.  He  has  asked  only  what  is  right,  and,  having 
determined  it,  straightway  he  has  done  it. 

And  thus  it  is  that  as  President  Heber  J.  Grant  begins  the 
eighty- third  year  of  his  life,  leaders  of  business,  industry,  and 
the  professions,  from  throughout  the  inland  West  and  the 
Nation,  gather  to  say:     "There  stands  a  man!" 

— Richard  L.  Evans. 


aF*&*i: 


HE  POWER 


TO  ACHIEVE 


(fauL  diow  Qfoidk. 
May.  CkqiwvL  Qt 


The  formula  is  simple! 
It  is  so  simple,  if  we  are  to  fol- 
low the  biographies  and  careers 
of  the  world's  greatest  business  and 
professional  men,  that  we  laymen 
are  afraid  it  won't  work.  Too 
often  we  will  have  none  of  it,  even 
when  it  is  so  easily  ours  for  the  do- 
ing! 

The  way  for  us  to  secure  a 
definite  and  continuing  increase 
in  our  power  or  ability  to 
achieve  is  simply  to  do  the  jobs 
immediately  at  hand,  with  all  of 
the  skill,  excellence,  and  superb 
ority  of  which  we  are  capable. 

There  has  long  been  a  struggle  be- 
tween ability  and  achievement.  Ac- 
cording to  scientific  authorities,  on 
the  average,  we  do  our  work  only 
about  eleven-sixteenths  as  well  as 
we  might.  In  other  words,  we 
usually  don't  do  it  as  well  as  we  ac- 
tually know  how. 

Question: 

How  can  we  expect  an  increase 
in  our  power  or  ability  to  do  when 
we  have  hardly  begun  to  use  the 
power  we  already  have? 

If  the  counsel  of  wisdom,  there- 
fore, is  heeded,  winning  our  spurs  in 
the  field  of  world  achievement  is  not 
an  insuperably  difficult  or  involved 
thing,  provided  we  realize  that  all 
10 


By  EARL  J.  GLADE 


Of  the  General  Board,  Deseret  Sun- 
day School  Union,  and  General 
Manager    of    Radio    Station   KSL. 


work,  no  matter  how  menial,  is  im- 
portant, if  it  truly  helps  mankind  and 
points  toward  world  betterment. 

To  Begin 

Tn  the  first  instance,  we  may  well 
discredit  certain  occult  theories  or 
systems  of  building  will  power.  Al- 
though they  sound  impressive,  at- 
tempts to  coerce  the  brain  almost 
never  have  the  effect  sought.  When 
we  set  out  to  influence  our  own  de- 
meanor, it  should  be  kept  in  mind 
that  we  all  behave  in  harmony  with 
natural  law.  In  building  a  program  of 
achievement,  therefore,  we  should 
proceed  accordingly. 

A  lot  of  so-called  inspirational 
stuff  has  been  written  about  building 
will  power  and  stimulating  self-con- 
fidence.    Most  of  it  is  very  frothy. 

The  facts  are  that  so-called 
will  power  is  not  worth  a  snap 
of  one's  finger  in  achieving  ob- 
jectives, unless  it  is  harnessed  to 
a  specific  program  of  activity. 

About  nineteen  hundred  and  six 
years  ago  the  Savior  Himself  laid 
down  the  facts  underlying  the  law 
of  achievement.     He  said,  in  sub- 


stance, "If  ye  would  know,  ye  must 
do." 

It  was  He  who  graphically  re- 
vealed the  actual  and  potential 
power  of  doing. 

Merely  chanting,  "Every  day,  in 
every  way,  I  am  becoming  better  and 
better,"  for  instance,  won't  help 
anyone  very  much  unless  it  is  fol- 
lowed up  by  definite  activity  pro- 
cedures. 

Today  we  know  that  learning  to 
achieve  comes  only  by  doing.  We 
learn  by  an  intelligent  "practicing" 
of  that  which  we  would  learn. 

Paderewski  once  said: 

"If  I  miss  my  practice  a  single  day, 
I  certainly  know  it.  If  I  miss  it 
two  days,  the  whole  world  knows  it." 

How  to  Proceed 

At  this  moment,  you  are  reading 
these  words.  Let  us  assume  in- 
stead that  you  are  reading  The 
Mind  in  the  Making  by  James 
Harvey  Robinson.  If  you  are  read- 
ing casually,  you  will  retain  less 
than  10%  of  what  your  eyes  glance 
over. 

It  is  pretty  well  agreed  that  we 
remember  about  as   follows:    10% 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


of  what  we  read;  20%  of  what  we 
hear;  30%  of  what  we  visualize; 
50%  of  what  we  see  and  hear  at  the 
same  time;  70%  of  what  we  say  with 
care  and  deliberation,  and  90%  of 
what  we  do. 

Obviously,  if  the  subject  matter  is 
worthy,  as  it  is  in  the  instance  refer- 
red to,  we  can  only  gain  power  in 
mastering  it  by  reading  with  care 
and  earnestly  endeavoring  to  make 
it  our  own.  Taking  notes,  under- 
scoring high  points,  writing  stimu- 
lating marginalia  that  jot  down  our 
own  reactions — that's  about  the  only 
way  we  can  really  drive  these  good 
things  home.  It  is  well  to  remember 
that  he  who  reads  to  retain  and  to  use 
is  already  on  the  way  to  power. 

So  then,  no  matter  what  we  are 
doing  at  the  moment,  we  can  begin 
here  and  now  to  augment  our  power 
to  achieve  by  doing  it  better  than 
we  have  ever  done  it  before,  and, 
if  utterly  possible,  better  than  it 
was  ever  done  before  by  anyone! 
No  man,  regardless  of  his  years, 
should  ever  forget  the  admonition 
to  our  youth:  When  you  play, 
play  hard;  when  you  work,  don't 
play  at  all! 

A  Carpenter  Points  the  Way 

A  contracting  carpenter  recently 
called  at  our  home  as  a  ward 
teacher.  He  was  humble  in  appear- 
ance and  manner,  but  self-confident. 
Accepting  Dr.  Link's  definition  of 
personality,  which  is;  "the  extent 
to  which  the  individual  has  develop- 
ed habits  and  skills  which  interest 
and  serve  other  people,"  I  could  not 
help  making  inquiry  about  this  man. 

As  a  youth,  he  worked  his  way 
through  a  carpenter  apprenticeship. 
He  later  studied  estimating,  all  the 
while  increasing  his  manual  skill. 
He  gradually  qualified  as  building 
contractor. 

It  was  apparent  that  his  jobs  were 
well  in  hand.  He  stressed  his  in- 
sistence on  superior  workmanship 
and  looked  upon  every  job  as  a  true 
reflection  of  his  personality  and 
character.  It  was  evident  that  he 
had  a  way  of  getting  excellent  work- 
manship out  of  his  men  by  expecting 
it  in  no  uncertain  way,  and  nobody 
around  any  of  his  jobs  was  going  to 
let  him  down.  His  bills  were  paid 
and  he  had  a  bank  balance  and 
credit. 

By  word  and  bearing  here  truly 
is  a  man  of  power.  He  knows  the 
strength  of  excellence  and  system 
and  he  puts  the  power  they  represent 
to  work  for  himself. 


Another  example  of  how  be- 
ing inwardly  aware  of  one's 
strength  and  modestly  sure  of 
oneself,  adds  to  one's  power. 

Power  Through   Saving  Money 

T  know  of  nothing  in  the  field  of 
business  affairs  that  gives  one  a 
finer  physical  and  mental  tone  and 
that  makes  one. more  conscious  of 
power  than  to  have  been  able,  in 
honor,  to  meet  one's  debts  and  still 
have  a  modest  bank  balance. 

The  energizing  effect  on  a  young 
man,  of  $500  honorably  earned, 
saved  and  placed  securely  away,  is 
so  stimulating  that  every  reasonable 
effort  should  be  forthcoming  to 
achieve  it.  Being  ahead  financially 
just  naturally  steps  up  one's  power. 

How  to  Save 

HThe  formula  for  saving  is  so  sim- 
pie  that  relatively  few  of  us  will 
have  anything  to  do  with  it.  We 
seem  to  want  schemes  that  are 
grandiose  and  complex  before  we 
begin. 

The  hardest  part  of  saving  is  for 
us  to  convince  ourselves  that  we  can 
positively  do  without  this  particular 


half  dollar  and  that  it  can  be  put 
safely  away  without  causing  much 
discomfort.  Usually  we  want  to 
wait  until  we  have  $500  before  we 
really  begin.  The  result:  we  never 
begin! 

Therefore,  a  desire  and  a  will  to 
save  must  first  be  cultivated. 

On  being  asked  how  he  spent  his 
income,  a  young  man  once  said: 

"About  30  percent  for  shelter; 
30  percent  for  clothing,  40  percent 
for  food  and  20  percent  for  amuse- 
ment." 

"But,"  said  his  friend,  "That  adds 
up  to  120  percent." 

"That's  right,"  rejoined  the  young 
man. 

Without  personal  discipline  in 
spending  and  thoughtful  budgeting, 
saving  is  surely  difficult.  They 
come  next. 

That  Vital  First  Step 

Tt  is  the  Chinese  who  say  that  a 

journey  of  a  thousand  miles  be- 
gins with  the  first  step.  So  with 
saving. 

Therefore,  the  best  possible  way 
to  begin,  as  successful  men  like  the 
late  Andrew  Carnegie,  Carl  R.  Gray, 
and  President  Heber  J.  Grant  have 
suggested  again  and  again,  is  to  take 
that  first  step  with  our  smallest  units 
of  coinage — pennies,  nickels,  and 
dimes.  If  we  are  good  personal  dis- 
ciplinarians we  shall  gradually  de- 
velop the  urge  to  save,  and  shall  es- 
tablish the  desire  as  well  as  the 
power  to  have  and  to  hold. 

We  shall  get  away  from  that  com- 
plex of  so  many  young  men  who  do 
not  earn  the  funds  they  personally 
use,  which  is:  Money  is  something 
to  get  rid  of;  and  substitute  there- 
for: No  matter  by  whom  it  is  earned, 
money  is  something  to  treasure  and 
to  save.  A  share  of  it  may  be  prop- 
erly used  but  not  a  cent  of  it  dissi- 
pated. 

By  making  saving  a  game  and  in- 
jecting somewhat  the  spirit  of  play, 
the  small  sacrifices  necessary  are 
soon  forgotten. 

Therefore,  the  vital  point  is 
to  begin  to  save  now — first  with 
the  smallest  units  of  coinage, 
and  then,  as  rapidly  as  is  con- 
sistent with  one's  affairs,  the 
larger  units. 

A  Specific  Saving  Procedure 

"Rffective  saving  procedures  usu- 
ally  embrace  three  vital  points: 
( 1  )  A  specific  amount  of  money  as 
a  saving  objective;  (2)  over  a  defi- 
nite period  of  time;  (3)  to  be  ac- 
complished in  a  particular  way. 

(Continued  on  page  60) 

11 


Portrait 


£L 


YOUNG  MAN 

By  RACHEL  GRANT  TAYLOR 


Part  III 

Traveling  in  the  eighties  and 
traveling  today  present  a 
marked  contrast.  Today  visit- 
ing a  stake  some  distance  away 
as  one  of  the  General  Authorities 
or  as  a  member  of  an  auxiliary 
board  means  a  day  or  two  on  a 
Pullman  with  meals  on  the  diner  or 
a  ride  in  a  speedy  auto  with  con- 
venient eating  places  along  the 
road.  In  the  eighties  it  meant  carry- 
ing provisions  and  bedding  and 
traveling  slowly  by  team  over  rough 
roads,  roads  so  dusty  that  the  wagon 
tires  dug  deep  into  the  loose  soil,  or 
so  muddy  that  the  horses  did  double 
duty — pulling  the  load  and  pulling 
the  wheels  free  from  the  grasp  of 
clinging  clay. 

An  account  of  Father's  presidency 
of  Tooele  Stake  would  be  incom- 
plete without  going  with  him  to  the 
then  far-off  branches  of  the  stake 
in  the  vicinity  of  Oakley,  Idaho. 
From  ten  to  fourteen  days  were 
spent  when  wagons  were  used.  Now 
it  takes  five  hours  in  an  automobile. 

Most  of  the  traveling  in  those 
days  was  done  in  white  tops — four- 
spring  wagons  with  white  canvas 
coverings,  the  sides  of  which  could 
be  rolled  up.  They  were  large 
enough  to  carry  provisions  and  to 
make  a  bed  in  the  back.  Besides 
food,  a  party  would  take  baled  hay 
and  grain  for  their  animals  but  de- 
pended on  the  Saints  for  most  of 
their  meals. 

During  one  of  these  trips  Father 
had  the  misfortune  to  have  a  recur- 
rence of  his  poison  ivy  rash.  To  cure 
this  the  brethren  dug  a  hole  in  the 
mud,  so  that  as  he  sat  in  it  only  his 
head  was  above  the  surface  of  the 
ground.  They  then  filled  up  the  hole. 
As  they  were  in  the  process  of  shov- 
eling in  the  mud,  a  young  fellow  on  a 
horse  appeared  on  the  neighboring 
bluff.  He  appeared  terrified  as  he 
saw  a  man  being  buried  and  drove 
off  as  quickly  as  possible.  The 
party  had  a  laugh  at  the  stories 
which  he  would  probably  tell.  The 
remedy  may  have  appeared  a  severe 
one  but  it  effected  a  cure.  Their  trip 
included  a  visit  to  the  great  Sho- 
12 


shone  Falls.  On  the  road  leading  to 
the  Falls,  they  saw  rabbits  by  the 
thousands  which  as  they  ran  would 
stir  the  dust  into  great  hovering 
clouds.  Miles  distant  they  could  see 
the  high-flung  spray  and  hear  the 
roar  of  the  cataract.  They  camped 
at  the  Falls  and  all  went  fishing,  but 
only  a  single  white  fish  was  lured 
from  the  stream. 

There  is   no  record   of   Father's 
having    kept   a    journal    from    July, 

1881,  to  September,  1882. 

His   last  visit  to  Oakley  is   de- 
scribed day  by  day  in  his  journal  of 

1882.  Traveling  day  and  night, 
camping  out,  sleeping  in  a  loft  or  in  a 
wagon  box  when  the  homes  were 
crowded,  entertained  in  a  home 
where  the  mother  was  in  bed  with 
her  seven-day  old  baby,  were  ex- 
periences which  seem  strange  today; 


for  Ogden  on  my  way  for  Oakley, 
Cassia  Co.,  Idaho,  in  company  with 
Apostles  F.  M.  Lyman  and  John 
Henry  Smith,  Bishop  Edward 
Hunter  (of  Grantsville ) ,  and  his 
daughter,  Miss  Etta  Hunter.  .  .  . 
Apostle  Lorenzo  Snow  was  on  the 
train  .  ,  .  also  E.  R.  Young  of 
Wanship,  Summit  Co. 

"I  had  a  visit  with  Brother  Young 
riding  to  Ogden.  Among  other 
things  he  told  me  that  he  had  heard 
my  name  mentioned  with  others  in 
connection  with  the  next  delegate  to 
Congress.  In  and  of  myself  I  could 
not  possibly  fill  the  place  as  my  edu- 
cation and  daily  life  have  not  been 
of  such  a  character  as  to  qualify  me 
for  this  position,  but  I  have  full  con- 
fidence that  I  could  fill  the  place  with 
honor  to  myself  and  our  people  with 
the    assistance    of    Our    Heavenly 


but  from  the  record  we  see  how 
smoothly  they  fitted  into  the  lives  of 
the  men  and  women  of  yesterday. 
The  journal  record  reads: 

"Salt  Lake  City,  Tuesday,  Sept. 
19r7i/82:  Spent  the  day  at  my  of- 
fice. In  the  evening  wife  and  I  at- 
tended the  Walker  Opera  House. 
The  Union  Square  Company  of 
New  York  played  'The  Banker's 
Daughter.'  The  acting,  (playing, 
should  say),  was  splendid,  as  good 
as  I  have  ever  seen.  Wednesday. 
Spent  the  day  at  the  office.  Apos- 
tle F.  M.  Lyman,  John  C.  Sharp 
( Vernon,  Tooele  Co. )  wife  and  chil- 
dren took  dinner  with  us.  We  Had 
a  short  but  pleasant  visit.  Wife  and 
I  again  went  to  see  the  Union  Square 
Company  play,  'The  False  Friend.' 
Thursday,  Spent  the  day  at  the 
office  and  in  getting  ready  to  start 
for  Idaho  .  .  .  Took  the  3.40  train 


OLD  TOOELE  SOUTH  WARD 
This  pioneer  stone  structure  was  the  scene  of 
much  of  President  Grant's  public  activity  as  Presi- 
dent of  Tooele  Stake.  It  was  the  principal  meeting 
place  of  the  region.  This  picture  was  taken  at  the 
funeral  of  Richard  R.  Lyman's  mother  and  brother 
some  time  after  President  Grant  was  president  there. 
Most  of  the  General  Authorities  of  the  Church  are 
in  the  picture,  including  Heber  J.  Grant,  the  young 
man. 

Father.  If  it  is  His  will  that  I  go 
there,  there  is  nothing  that  I  know 
of  that  would  give  me  more  pleas- 
ure. But  I  hope  and  pray  that  I  will 
not  be  selected  unless  I  have  the 
assistance  of  our  Heavenly  Father, 
as  I  know  that  I  would  make  a  com- 
plete failure  and  in  a  great  degree 
destroy  what  little  reputation  I  now 
have.  I  am  not  big  headed  enough 
to  think  that  the  brethren  will  select 
a  boy  for  delegate  to  congress."  .  . 
"Jas.  Sharp  of  the  Utah  Central 
Railroad  gave  me  a  pass  from  Salt 
Lake  to  Ogden  and  return  for 
Bishops  Hunter  and  Burridge,  Miss 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


Hunter,  and  myself — Jas.  Sharp  has 
been  kind  to  me  in  this  way  once  or 
twice  before  and  some  day  trust  I 
shall  have  a  chance  to  do  him  a 
favor.  We  reached  Terrace  shortly 
after  12  o'clock  a.  m." 

"Oakley,  Cassia  Co.,  Idaho,  Fri., 
Sept.  22nd/S2:  We  were  met  at 
Terrace  by  Bishop  Horton  D.  Haight 
of  Oakley  and  Bishop  Hunter's 
son,  William.  We  left  Terrace 
about  1 :30  a.  m.  Drove  15  miles  to 
a  stock  ranch  for  breakfast.  At  7 
a.  m.  continued  our  journey  until 
between  11  and  12.  Stopped  for 
feed  and  lunch.  Left  our  camp  at 
12:45  and  reached  Oakley  shortly 
after  6  p.  m.  I  found  my  brother 
George  and  his  mother  well — I  was 
pleased  to  find  he  had  things  in 
such  good  shape. 

"Saturday.  Am  feeling  much  bet- 
ter than  last  evening.  Was  some- 
what tired  after  yesterday's  ride. 
The  road  was  not  very  good  and  in 
my  opinion  it  is  fully  65  miles  from 
here  to  Terrace. 

"At  1 1  o'clock  attended  meeting. 
Bishop  Horton  D.  Haight  expressed 
his  pleasure  at  having  Apostles  Ly- 
man and  Smith,  also  other  brethren 
present  with  the  Saints  in  Oakley. 
Apostle  Lyman  followed.  He  spoke 
50  minutes.  Complimented  the 
Saints  on  the  many  material  im- 
provements that  had  been  made  since 
our  visit  of  last  year.  His  discourse 
was  a  most  excellent  one.  Gave  the 
people  a  great  amount  of  good  ad- 
vice, of  such  a  character  as  the  Saints 
needed  for  the  government  of  their 
daily  lives.  He  entreated  the  people 
to  be  kind,  to  be  patient,  to  be  up- 
right, honest,  to  live  in  harmony 
with  each  other.  Advised  the  Saints 
to  fence  their  farms  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible, as  good  fences  were  calculated 
to  keep  out  bad  feelings.  .  .  . 

"Sunday.  Meeting  at  10  a.  m. 
Bishop  Hunter  spoke  12  minutes. 
...  I  then  spoke  27  minutes;  felt 
good  liberty  in  talking  to  the  Saints. 
Apostle  John  Henry  Smith  followed; 
spoke  52  minutes.  The  people  of 
the  world  had  endeavored  to  break 
down  the  influence  of  our  leaders  by 
blackening  their  characters.  Our 
Prophet  Joseph  had  been  tried  on 
different  charges  56  times,  and  al- 
ways cleared  himself.  When  the 
Prophet  Joseph  was  killed  the  world 
thought  our  Church  would  be  sure  to 
go  to  pieces.  When  President  Young 
died  they  thought  the  same,  and  for 
a  time  left  us  alone.  But  finding  that 
we  are  growing  and  increasing  they 
are  again  wide-awake  in  trying  to 
crush  the  unity  of  our  people.  There 
are   none   of  the  principles   of  our 


HEBER  J.  GRANT  AS   HE  APPEARED   AT  ABOUT 
THE  TIME  HE  BECAME  AN  APOSTLE. 


faith  but  what  are  calculated  to  make 
us  better  and  to  inspire  a  love  of  the 
good  and  pure." 

"Monday:  Lyman,  Smith,  Haight, 
Whittle,  Martindale  and  I  drove 
down  Goose  Creek  several  miles. 
I  was  much  pleased  to  notice  the 
marked  improvement  on  all  sides. 
We  called  at  Brother  Hyrum  Wells. 
He  treated  us  to  melons.  Lyman, 
Smith  and  I  took  dinner  with  my 
brother  George  and  his  mother. 
About  four  o'clock  we  called  on 
Bro.Worthington.  His  wife  had  as 
fine  a  flower  garden  as  I  have  seen 
for  many  a  day.  Bro.  Worthington 
had  a  large  number  of  trees  growing 
in  nice  shape;  they  were  of  many 
different  kinds.  Brother  and  Sister 
Worthington  came  to  Oakley  last 
December  and  I  must  say  that  they 
deserve  much  credit  for  the  fine  start 
made  by  them.  The  flower  garden 
was  very  fine.  About  five  o'clock 
our  party  left  for  the  Little  Basin. 
.  .  .  Meeting  at  7  p.  m.  Bishop 
Hunter  spoke  15  minutes.  .  .  . 
Bishop  Haight  spoke  ....  minutes.  I 
spoke  18  minutes.  I  felt  good  free- 
dom in  speaking,  I  don't  know  that 
I  ever  felt  better.  John  Hy.  Smith 
spoke  37  minutes,  F.  M.  Lyman, 
39  minutes.  I  never  heard  them 
speak  any  better  in  my  life.  Their 
remarks  were  very  refreshing  and 
encouraging  to  me.  I  remember  that 
our  meeting  held  here  in  August  /81 
was  a  most  excellent  one,  just  about 
such  a  one  as  we  have  had  this 
evening." 

"Little  Basin,  Cassia  Co.,  Idaho, 
Tuesday,  September  26,  1 882 :  Rain- 
ing this  a.  m.  Our  party  .  .  .  left 
for  Albion.  Reached  Albion  about 
12  m.  Meeting  at  3  p.  m.  I  was 
thankful  that  our  Heavenly  Father 
.gave  the  brethren  a  goodly  portion 
of  His  Spirit  in  the  meeting  today, 


more  particularly  on  account  of  the 
audience  being  mostly  non-Mor- 
mons. After  meeting,  our  party 
drove  to  the  residence  of  Brother 
Jas.  S,  Lewis.  We  expected  to  di- 
vide up  but  Sister  Lewis  insisted 
upon  our  all  stopping.  We  had  a 
very  pleasant  visit  with  Brother 
Lewis  and  family.  Whittle,  Dayley, 
Polton,  and  I  slept  in  the  wagons 
so  as  not  to  crowd  the  folks  in  the 
house.  The  liberal  and  hospitable 
manners  of  Brother  Lewis  and  fam- 
ily were  most  pleasing  and  I  felt  to 
be  thankful  and  to  wish  for  their 
success  and  prosperity.  It  has 
rained  off  and  on  all  day,  mixed  with 
a  little  hail.  Snow  on  the  moun- 
tains." 


•     •     •     • 


Albion,  Wednesday,  September 
27/82:  The  storm  has  passed  off. 
Our  party  left  for  Cassia  Creek  at 
8:45.  We  reached  the  residence  of 
Brother  Cole  shortly  before  12  m . 
His  wife  gave  us  a  most  excellent 
dinner. 

"Meeting  at  2  p.  m.  The  meeting- 
house was  very  good  and  a  credit  to 
the  Saints  in  Cassia.  ,  .  .  Our 
meeting  was  a  good  one  and  I  have 
no  doubt  the  people  felt  to  rejoice 
and  be  thankful  for  the  many  good 
instructions  given  by  Brothers  Ly- 
man and  Smith.  The  following 
children  were  blessed  and  named: 
Elijah  Bion,  Lyman,  mouth;  Julia 
Alberta  Harris,  Lyman,  mouth; 
George  Wells,  Smith,  mouth, 

"After  meeting,  our  party  drove 
to  Almo  Valley.  Lyman,  Smith, 
Whittle,  and  I  stopped  with  Brother 
M.  Durfee.  We  were  kindly  re- 
ceived by  Brother  Durfee.  Found 
his  wife  in  bed.  Had  a  baby  seven 
days  old.  Whittle  and  I  slept  in 
the  loft  of  Brother  Durfee's  barn- 
slept  fine." 

"Thursday,  September  28th:  Held 
meeting  at  eleven  o'clock.  .'".  .  The 
Saints  voted  to  have  a  branch  of 
Cassia  Ward.  ...  There  were 
about  thirty  people  present  at  our 
meeting.  A  good  spirit  was  with  us 
and  I  was  pleased  that  a  branch 
organization  was  given  the  Saints 
at  this  place.  At  2:30  our  party  left 
for  Kelton,  a  distance  of  forty  miles. 
Reached  Kelton  shortly  after  10 
p.  m.  The  last  part  of  bur  ride  was 
not  very  pleasant,  too  much  dust." 

"Kelton,  Box  Elder  Co.,  Friday, 
September  29,  1882:  Leaving  Broth- 
ers Haight,  Daley,  and  Whittle  at 
Kelton,  the  balance  of  our  party  took 
the  5  a.  m.  train  for  Ogden.  Found 
my  wife,  little  ones,  and  also  mother 
all  well,  for  which  I  am  thankful. 
{Continued  on  page  60) 

13 


\\ 


O  FRABJOUS  DAY" 


C 


'uthbert  always 
thought  it  rank  injustice  when  peo- 
ple said  he  and  Tubby  deliberately 
wrecked  the  Tenth  Grade's  Christ- 
mas play.  Or,  at  least,  as  Mark 
Twain  remarked  when  he  read  the 
report  of  his  own  death  in  a  news- 
paper, it  was  grossly  exaggerated. 
And  the  story  that  went  around  that 
he  had  insulted  Mr.  Beamish  and 
that  Tubby  had  pulled  his  nose — ■ 
and  then,  on  top  of  all  that,  to  be 
accused  of  Hallowe'en  tricks  on 
Christmas — well,  it  all  goes  to  show 
how  scandals  get  started. 

The  trouble  all  began  on  the  ill- 
omened  day  when  Miss  Norwood, 
the  pretty  new  English  teacher,  de- 
cided that  the  Tenth  Grade  students 
of  Pleasantville  High  should  put  on 
a  Christmas  play.  Nothing  that 
would  interfere  with  the  Senior's 
annual  Christmas  play,  of  course; 
just  some  little  thing  that  would  help 
them  to  express  themselves  and  per- 
haps make  a  few  pennies  for  the  class 
coffers. 

Cuthbert,  wrestling  with  mid-year 
exams,  had  never  known  until  that 
evening  how  Tubby  felt  about  Miss 
Norwood;  though  experience  should 
have  taught  him  that  whenever  a  new 
and  pretty  face  appeared  on  the 
horizon,  Tubby  (known  as  Harold 
to  parents  and  teachers )  was  imme- 
diately head-over-heels  in  love;  and 
he,  Cuthbert,  cast  for  the  role  of 
Cupid,  by  a  malign  Fate  long  ago, 
would  be  involved  in  the  plot  sooner 
or  later.  Now,  watching  his  friend's 
face  at  the  Class  meeting,  while  the 
English  teacher  earnestly  discussed 
plays,  he  felt  an  old  familiar  sinking 
at  the  pit  of  his  stomach  at  what  he 
saw. 

"Have  you  any  suggestions  as  to 
a  suitable  play,  Harold?"  Miss  Nor- 
wood asked,  prettily  appealing  to 
Tubby,  whose  fatuous  expression 
was  causing  Cuthbert  such  acute 
embarrassment. 

"Well,"  Tubby  said,  judicially,  "it 
all  depends  on  what  we  are  going 
in  for.  If  we're  going  in  for  tragedy, 
my  idea  is,  we  couldn't  do  better  than 
Shakespeare.  For  instance,"  he  en- 
larged in  the  stunned  silence  that 
followed  this  bomb,  "Romeo  and 
Juliet  can't  be  beat  when  it  comes  to 
good  old-fashioned  tragedy.  Of 
course,"  he  added  hastily,  "You'd 
have  to  be  Juliet,  Miss  Norwood,  and 
14 


By  ESTELLE  WEBB  THOMAS 

(hwih&Jv  QjudhbsUiL  M&uf  ire  which, 
ihsL  Afii/uL  d$,  QhhL&ijmaA.  ihwvnphA, 
oju&A.  alt  impA.  x>^  adv&Mjfy. 


— and — most  any  of  us  fellows  could 
take  the  part  of  Romeo!" 

Tubby  modestly  forebore  to  men- 
tion that  he  already  saw  himself  in 
that  romantic  role. 

"Nonsense!"  said  Mr.  Beamish, 
briskly,  "You  youngsters  try  Shake- 
speare! I  suggest  Dickens'  'Christ- 
mas Carol'!"  Mr.  Beamish,  the 
Natural  History  teacher,  was  also 
new  to  Pleasantville  High  School — 
round-faced,     smiling,     assured 


a 


young  man,  who  would  know  a 
great  deal  more  about  the  psychology 
of  youth  when  he  became  a  little 
older  himself.  At  his  crass  sugges- 
tion, Tubby  turned  a  look  of  anguish 
upon  his  unconscious  back.  So 
pained  was  his  expression,  that 
Cuthbert  leaned  nearer  and  whis- 
pered, sympathetically,  "Stomach 
ache,  Tubby?" 

"No,  a  pain  in  the  neck!"  Tubby 
muttered,  eying  Mr.  Beamish  malev- 
olently, "What's  he  doing  here,  any- 
way? He  hasn't  any  say  about  our 
English  class!" 

"O,  just  helping  Miss  Norwood, 
I  guess,"  answered  Cuthbert,  "I 
notice  he's  generally  around  where 
she's  at." 

Tubby  winced,  not  at  the  gram- 
matical error,  and  Cuthbert  swal- 
lowed hard.  At  least  he  knew. 
"Now,  listen,  Tubby,"  he  whisper- 
ed, earnestly,  "You  watch  out! 
You're  going  to  get  all  involved  up 
in  another  love  affair,  first  you  know, 
and  work  me  into  it!  I  can  always 
tell!    Now  you  just — " 

"Let's  have  everyone's  attention, 
Cuthbert!"  said  Miss  Norwood,  re- 
provingly, "We  must  get  on  with 
this.  Everyone  agree  to  'A  Christ- 
mas Carol'?" 

"I  don't!"  grunted  Butch,  the 
school  rough-neck,  "I've  seen  that 
thing  a  million  times,  at  least.  Why 
not  have  something  up-to-date?  A 
murder  mystery  or  something?" 

"Well,"  Miss  Norwood  hesitated, 
loath  to  hurt  anyone's  feelings,"  I 
hardly  think — " 

"Nonsense!"   said   Mr.    Beamish 
again,  positively,  "The  'Christmas. 
Carol'  is  always  suitable,  and  some- 


thing you  children  could  handle.  I 
think  you  should  be  the  one  to  de- 
cide on  a  play,  Nadine!" 

"Well,  then,"  Miss  Norwood 
smiled,  "if  it's  satisfactory  with  all 
of  you,  we'll  play  the  'Christmas 
Carol.'  Now,  we  must  get  on  with 
the  casting,  as  it's  getting  late." 

"Did  you  get  that  'Nadine'?" 
Tubby  nudged  Cuthbert  and  shot  a 
black  glance  in  the  direction  of  the 
beaming  Mr.  Beamish.  All  right 
for  you,  my  beamish  boy!"  And 
Cuthbert  jumped  when  Tubby's 
voice  rang  out,  "I  suggest  Mr. 
Beamish  for  the  part  of  Scrooge!" 

"O,  no,  thanks!"  Mr.  Beamish 
said,  hastily,  a  quick  flush  dyeing  his 
round,  shining  face,  "I'm  here  merely 
to  help.  But  if  I  should  take  a  part 
in  the  'Carol,'  it  would  certainly  not 
be  the  leading  one.  I  really  think 
the  role  of  the  Nephew  more  suited 
to  my  type,  don't  you,  Na —  Miss 
Norwood?" 

"Butch  would  make  a  good 
Scrooge!"  little  Helen  Ward  sug- 
gested, sweetly. 

"And  Harold  would  do  for  Mar- 
ley's  ghost,"  said  Mr.  Beamish. 
Tubby  glared. 

"If  I  got  to  be  in  it,  I'll  be  Mar- 
ley's  ghost!"  said  Cuthbert,  quickly, 
sensing  trouble,"  and  let's  have 
Tub — I  mean  Harold  for  Bob 
Cratchit,  the  clerk." 

Thus  with  many  heart-burnings 
and  subtle  under-currents  the  play 
was  finally  cast  and  rehearsals  got 
under  way.  There  was  very  little 
time,  for  Miss  Norwood  had  not  had 
her  bright  idea  until  a  short  two 
weeks  before  the  Christmas  holidays. 
But,  as  Mr.  Beamish  pointed  out, 
the  play  was  such  an  old  favorite, 
and  he  was  so  glad  to  help  out,  it 
should  go  off  with  a  bang. 

He  was  only  too  glad  to  help, 
Tubby  complained  to  Cuthbert, 
behind  the  wings.  Himself  a  very 
grouchy  Bob  Cratchit,  he  watched 
Mr.  Beamish's  pollyannish  interpre- 
tation of  the  worthy  clerk  with  a 
jaundiced  eye. 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


"That  kind  of  face  hooked  up  to 
that  kind  of  name  is  a  terrible  temp- 
tation," he  whispered,  later.  Cuth- 
bert  looked  blank.  "What  do  you 
mean?" 

"Why,  that  verse  from  Alice  in 
Wonderland,  you  know;  something 
about  'My  beamish  boy*.  I  think 
it's  in  'Alice  Through  the  Look- 
ing Glass.'  It's  hard  to  remember 
he's  a  teacher  and  not  quote  it  at 
him!" 

.From  the  very  first,  noth- 
ing went  right  with  the  play.  Mr. 
Beamish  was  genial  and  condes- 
cending. He  was  helpful  and  offi- 
cious. He  laughingly  mimicked  these 
adolescents  to  whom  dignity  was 
more  precious  than  life  itself,  and 
then  kindly  demonstrated  how  it 
should  be  done.    Miss  Norwood,  in 


futile  efforts  to  keep  the  peace  be- 
tween the  sullen  students  and  over- 
zealous  Mr.  Beamish,  fluttered  like 
a  wounded  dove. 

Then,  just  two  days  before  the 
play  was  to  be  presented,  Butch's 
little  sister  stopped  Miss  Norwood 
in  the  hall.  "Butch  said  to  tell  you 
he's  got  mumps  and  can't  even  come 
to  the  play,"  she  announced  calmly. 
Her  tone  conveyed  the  idea  that 
mumps  were  a  welcome  alternative 
to  Butch.  Before  night,  The  Spirit 
of  Christmas  Past,  Martha  Cratchit 
and  The  Spirit  of  Christmas  Yet  To 
Come,  had  all  succumbed,  and  Miss 
Blair,  of  the  Second  Grade,  sent 
word  that  Tiny  Tim  was  threatened. 

As  difficulties  increased,  Miss 
Norwood's  determination  increased 
in  proportion.  Like  most  gentle  per- 
sons, she  was  tenacious  as  glue.  De- 


IF  HE  NEVER  SAW  ANY  OF  HIS  DEAR  FRIENDS  AND  CLASS- 
MATES AGAIN,  IT  WOULD  STILL  BE  TOO  SOON.  SO  WITH 
A  FURTIVE  GLANCE  ABOUT,  HE  SLIPPED  OUT  THE  BACK 
DOOR   AND  STOLE  SILENTLY  AWAY. 


1Mlk0k 


fying  Fate,  which  had  certainly 
given  fair  warning,  at  the  eleventh 
hour  she  cast  and  re-cast  with  a 
reckless  hand. 

Mr.  Beamish,  who  from  much 
coaching,  knew  every  part,  nobly 
stepped  into  the  breach  and  took 
over  the  part  of  the  Nephew,  for 
which  he  had  delicately  declared 
himself  fitted  at  first.  Later,  though 
Tubby  was  never  quite  clear  as  to 
how  it  happened,  he  was  also  Bob 
Cratchit,  since  the  two  parts  did  not 
conflict,  and  Tubby  found  himself  a 
reluctant  Scrooge. 

The  fateful  night  eventually  ar- 
rived and  even  Cuthbert,  whose  his- 
trionic ability  was  nothing  to  write 
home  about,  was  too  excited  to  eat 
his  dinner.  Nothing  more  need  be 
said  to  indicate  the  high  tension  ex- 
isting in  the  cast,  generally.  The 
Cratchit  family,  having  been  struck 
most  disastrously  by  the  mumps  epi- 
demic, was  composed  almost  entirely 
of  new  recruits.  To  make  up  for 
what  they  lacked  in  knowledge  of 
their  parts,  they  had  provided  a 
really  sumptuous  Christmas  dinner. 
Miss  Norwood  was  aghast  when 
they  filed  in  laden  with  chicken 
(masquerading  as  goose)  pies,  pud- 
ding with  vinegar  sauce,  and  various 
delicacies  not  mentioned  in  the  text. 

"Why,  girls,  there'll  never  be 
time  to  eat  all  that!"  she  exclaimed, 
as  they  arranged  the  food  carefully 
on  a  convenient  bench  and  threw  a 
table  cloth  over  it. 

"Well,  the  actors  can  eat  what's 
left,  afterward,  if  they  all  went  with- 
out supper  like  I  did!"  declared 
Martha. 

Later,  Mr.  Beamish  and  Patsy 
Brown  insisted  that  Tubby  was  right 
there  and  heard  all  this,  but  he  and 
Cuthbert  proved  that  he  was  on  the 
other  side  of  the  stage,  getting  into 
Scrooge's  long-tailed  coat  and  chin 
whiskers. 

However  that  was,  the  initial  scene 
between  the  miser  and  his  friend 
Marley's  ghost  went  off  very  poorly 
indeed.  Cuthbert  had  been  in  the 
very  act  of  clanking  onto  the  stage 
at  Tubby's  cue,  delivered  in  a  point- 
edly raised  tone  of  voice,  when  he 
found  himself  jerked  swiftly  back 
by  Mr.  Beamish,  just  back  from  his 
own  encounter  with  Scrooge. 

"Why  are  those  long  black 
trousers  showing  a  foot  or  so  under 
your  shroud?"  he  demanded,  "ghosts 
don't  wear  black  pants!"  "Mother 
fixed  it  so  they  didn't  show,"  mut- 
tered Cuthbert, "  but  I  can't  seem  to 
get  the  hang  of  it.  Seems  to  be 
more  me  than  sheet!" 

"Take  them  off!     Take  them  off. 
(Continued  on  page  57) 

15 


Utah's  pioneer 


WOMEN  DOCTORS 


By   CLAIRE   WILCOX   NOALL 


INTRODUCTION 

The  Unique  Urgency  Which  Led 
to  the  Study  of  Medicine 
Among  Mormon  Women 

INTO  their  pioneer  Mormon  back- 
ground the  lives  of  Utah's  early 
women  doctors  inevitably  blend. 

In  the  far-spreading  settlement  of 
the  vast  Territory  of  Utah,  large 
families  were  an  infinite  blessing. 
However,  there  were  few  doctors  in 
this  Land  of  Promise.  Though 
certain  midwives  of  the  period 
have  left  records  that  reflect  the  in- 
estimable worth  of  their  long  and 
patient  service,  most  of  them  labored 
in  the  populous  counties  near  the 
original  colony. 

Distance  then  had  not  been  swal- 
lowed by  time,  and  in  remote  dis- 
tricts, all  too  often  dreadful  suffer- 
ing and  even  death  resulted  from 
the  absence  of  both  physician  and 
practiced  midwife. 

And  yet  into  the  dry  and  bloodless 
heart  of  arid  lands  as  well  as  into 
fertile  valleys,  the  staunch-hearted 
people  penetrated.  Even  after  hav- 
ing converted  barren  ground  into 
green  fields  they  would  once  more 
pack  their  belongings  into  the  deep 
cradles  of  their  covered  wagons  and 
move  again  if  the  command  came 
from  Brigham  Young. 

This  dynamic  man  combined  vis- 
ion with  action.  He  was  not  content 
to  limit  the  new  stronghold  to  nar- 
row boundaries.  As  he  cried:  "This 
is  the  place!"  from  his  high  vantage 
on  the  last  steep  slopes  of  the  Wa- 
satch, his  inspired  eyes  must  have 
seen   far  beyond  the   mountain-en- 


ROMANIA   BUNNELL  AT  AGE  15 


circled  valley  at  his  feet.  In  the 
diversion  of  population  and  settle- 
ment there  were  strength,  independ- 
ence, and  self-sufficiency,  three  of  the 
most  important  phases  of  the  great 
colonization. 

And  yet  the  farther  from  Salt 
Lake  City  that  families  settled,  the 
greater  the  hazard  of  childbirth  be- 
came. Mothers  were  fortunate  in 
the  outlying  stakes  if  they  were  min- 
istered to  by  another  woman  who 
had  received  any  training  at  all  in 
midwifery.  Children  were  born  un- 
der heartrending  circumstances.  At 
times,  when  a  mother's  frightful 
agony  lapsed  into  the  silence  of 
death,  babies  too  were  lost.  The 
hour  of  travail  was  fraught  with 
danger  and  the  dread  fever  left  many 
with  incurable  rheumatism. 

Even  so,  no  woman  refused  to  go 
into  the  far  and  unknown  places  of 
the  new  Zion.  Deep  snow  itself  was 
no  bar  to  moving  if  the  order  came 
when  it  lay  piled  upon  the  ground. 
Still  no  matter  how  harrowing  the 
conditions  which  Mormon  pioneer 
women  faced,  they  all  were  grateful 
to  their  Father  in  heaven  for  the 
privilege  of  becoming  mothers  in 
Israel. 

Brigham  Young  was  not  unmind- 
ful of  the  dangers  to  which  they 
were  subjected.  Nor  did  he  fail  to 
realize  that  cholera  infantum, 
whooping  cough,  and  diphtheria, 
which  at  times  were  not  even  rec- 
ognized as  such,  took  their  sad  toll. 
He  knew  that  woeful  loss  left  grief 
and  absence  in  their  wake  which 
were  hard  to  assuage.  His  heart 
bled  when  he  heard  tales  of  pitiable 
cases,  just  as  it  swelled  with  pride 
when  he  visited  the  stakes  of  Zion 
and  there  beheld  the  fine  healthy 
children  and  the  happy  women  who 
survived  to  live  their  wholesome, 
saintly,  and  religious  way  of  life. 
And  the  amazing  aspect  of  those 
pioneer  days  was  not  that  so  many 
lives  were  lost  from  disease  and 
childbirth  as  it  was  that  so  many 
women  studied  to  curtail  its  ravages. 

From  the  first,  Brigham  Young  did 
everything  within  his  power  to 
minimize     suffering     and     increase 


ROMANIA    BUNNELL   PRATT  AS  SHE   APPEARED 
ABOUT  1879. 


health.  Within  a  year  after  the  ar- 
rival of  the  Pioneers,  while  they  were 
still  living  in  the  old  walled  Fort, 
he  called  Dr.  Willard  Richards  and 
his  wife,  Hannah,  an  English  nurse, 
to  teach  women  practical  nursing, 
midwifery,  and  care  of  children.  But 
the  scope  of  this  couple  was  limited 
— they  lived  in  Salt  Lake  City;  the 
Territory  was  measureless.  And  a 
quarter  of  a  century  passed  before 
the  first  woman  studied  medicine. 
It  was  1873  when  Romania  Bun- 
nell Pratt  set  out  to  attend  the  Wom- 
an's Medical  College  in  Philadel- 
phia. 

Brigham  Young  had  asked  Heber 
John  Richards,  Willard's  son,  to  be- 
come one  of  Utah's  first  men  physi- 
cians. The  request  was  not  much  to 
this  young  man's  liking,  since  he  had 
intended  to  become  a  surveyor,  but 
he  deferred  to  President  Young's 
wishes,  and  studied  for  the  pro- 
fession. 

Now  Brigham  Young  proposed  to 
overcome  distance  in  behalf  of 
motherhood.  It  was  part  of  his 
design  that  Romania  B.  Pratt  should 
return  to  Utah  and  teach  other 
women  to  serve  competently  and 
with  scientific  cleanliness  in  cases 
of  childbirth.  Though  some  of  them 
lived  in  stakes  that  were  hundreds 
of  miles  from  Salt  Lake  City,  "sis- 
ters" were  to  come  to  her  from  their 
own  localities  for  training  in  mid- 
wifery. They  could  return  to  their 
homes  with  a  portion  of  her  vital 
knowledge  as  their  own,  and  life 
could  be  saved.  President  Young 
saw  this.  His  vision  resulted  in  the 
most  remarkable  flowering  of  medi- 
cine among  women  during  the  sec- 
ond quarter  century  of  the  Mormon 
settlement  of  Utah,  and  the  large 
territory  about  it,  that  ever  has 
existed  in  any  one  region  on  the 
face  of  the  earth. 


16 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


I 


T  almost  seems  as  if  the  Halls  of 
Medicine    had    been    opened    to 
welcome  these  very  women. 

In  1847 — significantly  coincident- 
al year — Elizabeth  Blackwell  pio- 
neered her  way  into  a  regular  school 
of  medicine.  She  was  the  first 
woman  in  the  world  to  be  graduated 
from  such  a  university — a  man's — 
Geneva  Medical  College  of  New 
York!  After  ridicule,  scorn,  and  be- 
littling in  other  places  this  persistent, 
English-born  but  American-bred 
woman  was  admitted  to  this  college 
because  the  student  personnel  was 
so  boisterous  and  rowdy  that  the 
young  men  thought  her  presence 
would  prove  hugely  amusing.  They 
put  the  matter  to  the  vote.  After 
coercing  the  only  dissenting  member 
they  decided  to  let  her  enroll,  look- 
ing forward  to  her  admission  with 
vulgar  anticipation.  But  a  strange 
hush  came  over  their  auditorium 
when  she  first  entered  it.  However, 
no  blush  mounted  to  her  cheek — 
there  was  no  cause.  She  brought 
dignity  into  chaos,  and  was  gradu- 
ated at  the  head  of  her  class.  And 
then  .  .  .  the  Women's  Medical 
College  at  Philadelphia  was  estab- 
lished. Women  came  to  it  from  the 
four  quarters  of  the  globe,  but  no 
concentration  of  women  in  medicine 
ever  occurred  proportionately  to 
equal  the  number  of  women  doctors 
among  the  pioneers  of  Utah. 

Most  of  these  women  led  lives  of 
great  activity  both  before  and  after 
studying  medicine.  Many  of  them 
were  mothers  of  several  children 
before  they  became  doctors;  most  of 
them  bore  children  while  they  were 
practicing.  Elvira  Stevens  Barney 
filled  a  mission  and  taught  school  in 
the  Hawaiian  Islands  before  she 
studied.  All  of  them — because  there 
was  hardlv  a  live-minded  woman  in 


Utah  who  did  not — took  active  in- 
terest in  woman  suffrage,  and  later 
two  of  them  became  members  of  the 
state  legislature. 

Among  those  who  followed  Dr. 
Pratt  in  the  profession  were  Ellis  R. 
Shipp,  Martha  Hughes  Paul  Can- 
non, Margaret  C.  Shipp  Roberts, 
Mary  Minor  Green,  Emma  Atkins, 
Mary  Emma  Van  Schoonhoven, 
and  Jane  M.  Skolfield. 

Belle  Anderson  Gemmell  and 
Justine  Anderson  Mclntyre,  daugh- 
ters of  Dr.  W.  F.  Anderson,  were 
non-Mormons  who  left  pioneer 
Utah  to  return  with  medical  degrees. 

Martha  Hughes,  as  she  was  then 
known,  and  Emma  Atkins  were  the 
most  youthful  of  the  group.  They 
made  up  their  minds  when  they 
were  girls  to  follow  the  profession. 
Martha  had  a  brilliant  career,  but 
Dr.  Atkins,  an  excellent  student  of 
Dr.  Pratt's  and  one  who  was  in- 
spired by  her  to  become  a  doctor, 
went  to  Nephi  to  practice,  where 
she  met  with  an  early  and  tragic 
death. 

Undoubtedly  there  is  no  more 
colorful  page  in  all  history  than  that 
which  is  illumined  by  this  group  of 
Mormon  women  who  bore  the  title, 
Doctor  of  Medicine.  But  even  they 
were  preceded  in  Salt  Lake  City  by 
one  other. 

In  one  of  the  earliest  numbers  of 
The  Women's  Exponent,  a  distin- 
guished magazine  and  for  many 
years  the  only  woman's  periodical 
between  Boston  and  Portland,  Ore- 
gon, an  interesting  advertisement  ap- 
peared. Mrs.  Ellen  B.  Ferguson, 
M.  D.,  a  convert  of  Elder  Orson  F. 
Whitney's,  announced  herself  as  a 
specialist  in  the  diseases  of  women. 
Extremely  intellectual  and  highly 
cultivated,  she  taught  drawing,  elo- 


DR.  PENROSE 
ON  THE  PORCH 
OF  THE  HOME 
OF  HER  LATER 
YEARS. 


ELDEST  GRANDDAUGHTER  AND  ELDEST  GREAT- 
GRANDCHILD OF  DR.  PENROSE— EDNA  PRATT 
SUTHERLAND      AND      HER      SON     WILLIAM    C. 

SUTHERLAND. 


cution,  and  piano  lessons  in  addition 
to  her  practice  of  medicine.  She 
also  was  interested  in  woman  suf- 
frage. A  great  traveler,  she  expound- 
ed Mormonism  wherever  she  went; 
and  she  mingled  among  America's 
most  brilliant  leaders  in  the  feminist 
movement.  However,  there  were  cer- 
tain characteristics  which  distin- 
guished Dr.  Ferguson  as  being  some- 
what different  from  the  sturdy  type 
of  true  pioneer  woman  doctor  of 
Utah.  The  accomplished  Dr.  Fer- 
guson, despite  her  tremendous  loy- 
alty to  the  Church  during  a  large 
part  of  her  life,  occupied  a  place 
almost  by  herself  in  the  community. 

Nearly  all  of  Utah's  women  doc- 
tors were  great  travelers;  and  they 
too  were  international  in  their  out- 
look. Many  of  them  were  strong- 
minded,  highly  opinionated,  forceful 
women.  Some  were  successful  in 
business;  a  few  of  them  had  more 
knowledge  and  ideas  than  friends, 
but  in  the  hearts  of  those  friends 
who  were  their  own,  true  admiration 
ruled.  And  if,  in  others,  their 
faults  had  not  been  so  few,  how 
could  their  goodness  have  been  so 
great?  Professional  jealousy  and 
over-ambition  were  largely  ruled 
from  their  lives.  Some  of  them 
were  great  women — truly  great. 
They  could  not  have  fallen  short  of 
this  high  standard  had  they  done 
nothing  more  than  disseminate  the 
knowledge  of  midwifery  in  the 
saintly  way  in  which  they  carried  on. 

Their  presence  in  the  measureless 

territory  of  the  new  Zion  was  almost 

like  the  unseen  hand  of  God,  who 

ministers  in  His  own  divine  way  to 

{Continued  on  page  51) 

17 


THE    LITTLE    HAND    AND    CONSTANT    FIGURES 
STANDING    EVER    NEAR    IT. 


THE  STORY  THUS  FAR:  Down  in 
the  land  of  the  Navajos,  where  the 
great,  weird  shapes  of  Monument  Valley 
punctuate  the  skyline  of  the  Southwest, 
Yoinsnez  and  his  son  and  his  daughter, 
Eltceesie,  live  in  a  hogan,  neighboring 
Husteele  and  his  little  son  Peejo.  But  de- 
spite their  neighborliness  in  all  other  things 
there  is  a  bitter  rivalry  between  the  two  for 
the  capture  of  a  phantom  horse — Beleeh 
thlizhen  (blackhorse) — a  stallion  of  Arabian 
type  that  appeared  full-grown  on  Husk- 
aniny  Mesa  on  the  Utah-Arizona  line,  and 
which  defied  all  efforts  for  his  capture, 
whether  of  trickery,  stealth,  or  force.  As 
the  occupants  of  each  hogan  would  attempt 
his  capture,  the  occupants  of  the  other  would 
lie  in  wait  to  see  if  they  were  successful. 
Suddenly,  however,  the  dread  influenza 
struck  the  hogan  of  Yoinsnez  and  crushed 
the  life  from  his  son  and  prostrated  all 
others.  While  they  were  so  stricken, 
Husteele  and  Peejo  sought  again  to  capture 
Blackhorse — but  without  success.  Then  the 
devastating  plague  visited  the  hogan  of 
Husteele.  Ten  days  later,  after  Yoinsnez 
had  finally  gained  strength  enough  to  visit 
his  neighbor,  only  eleven- year-old  Peejo 
was  still  alive.  Yoinsnez  took  the  boy  to 
his  own  roof  and  cared  for  him.  He  also 
took  Husteele's  horses  and  herds  and  min- 
gled them  with  his  own,  and  burned  down 
Husteele's  hogan  in  an  effort  to  blot  out 
the  destruction  of  the  dread  epidemic. 
Yoinsnez's  first  feeling  of  compassion  soon, 
however,  turned  to  rising  resentment  and 
bitter  distrust  when  Peejo  seemed  reluctant 
to  tell  all  that  he  and  his  father,  Husteele, 
had  learned  of  Blackhorse. 


Courtesy    Harry    Goulding,     Trading 
Post     Operator,     Monument     Valley. 


&>  NATIVE  BLOOD 


By  ALBERT  R.  LYMAN 


a  nother  gripping  story  comes  from  out  of 
the  Southwest  by  the  author  of  "The 
Outlaw  of  Navajo  Mountain." 


Chapter  III 


WH 


'hen  the  two  children 
had  proved  they  could  keep  the 
flock,  the  task  was  theirs — dawn  to 
dusk — dawn  to  dusk  again  They 
gazed  wearily  from  their  endless 
task  at  misty  distance  for  long, 
long  hours  at  a  time.  They  com- 
mented on  every  feature  of  its 
dreary  face,  suggesting  the  least 
break  in  its  killing  boredom,  and 
nothing  else  in  all  their  wide  hori- 
zon held  greater  charm  than  those 
18 


mysterious  "Mittens,"  raised  ever 
as  hands  in  solemn  affirmation. 

"That  big  hand  is  mine,"  declared 
the  boy.  "It  is  giving  command. 
Some  time  I'll  give  command." 

"Then  the  other  is  mine,"  ans- 
wered the  little  shepherdess,  "I  am 
answering  your  command." 

Yoinsnez  got  an  intoxicating 
thrill  from  riding  Husteele's  fleet, 
black  mare.  He  proved  the  bay  to 
be  almost  as  good,  and  even  the 
white  mare  could  pass  his  top  horse. 
They  fitted  gratifyingly  into  his  am- 
bitions and  he  appraised  them  with 
avaricious  hope.  The  momentary 
tide  of  love  or  pity  which  had  im- 
pelled him,  in  taking  Peejo,  to  reach 
beyond  the  narrow  bounds  of  his 
old  prejudices,  made  but  temporary 
change  in  the  ways  of  his  wonted 
self.  His  former  ambitions  began 
at  once  to  twist  the  new  situation — 
the  orphan  boy  felt  it  even  before 
he  was  able  to  leave  the  hogan.  He 
had  come  grieving  and  desolate  to 
the  home  of  his  father's  hard  rival 
only  to  meet  the  offensive  tenden- 
cies he  had  learned  to  hate  from 
infancy.  And  the  old  man  put  a 
testy  curb  around  the  motherly  ten- 
derness of  his  gentle  noloki  in  the 
love  she  wanted  to  offer  to  his  ri- 
val's son. 

Peejo  was  in  a  changed  world — 


a  world  in  which  no  one  but  the 
artless  little  girl  could  offer  com- 
fort from  a  full  and  trusting  heart, 
and  to  her,  with  childish  intuitions, 
he  betrayed  as  much  as  his  pride 
would  permit,  the  shattered  idols 
of  a  lost  home.  After  one  short, 
sick  look  at  the  black  ruin  which 
had  been  his  father's  hogan,  he 
made  it  a  point  to  go  that  way  no 
more.  The  deep  impulses  which 
had  bound  him  to  father,  mother, 
and  sisters,  groped  despairingly  in 
a  desolate  world  and  found  in  all 
the  narrow  limits  of  his  new  ex- 
istence no  responsible  one  but  the 
little  shepherdess  to  answer  the  si- 
lent cry  of  his  aching  soul. 

As  soon  as  Yoinsnez  perceived 
this  pronounced  attachment  be- 
tween his  only  child  and  his  rival's 
son,  he  disapproved  with  emphasis. 
The  big  furrows  deepened  across 
his  sloping  forehead,  and  he  al- 
lowed Eltceesie  to  go  with  the  flock 
at  less  frequent  intervals.  When 
the  rival's  son,  in  spite  of  his  game 
and  silent  efforts  could  not  tend 
them  alone,  the  old  man  had  Nat- 
awney  Begay  come  over  from  Klee 
Betow  and  take  part  of  the  respon- 
sibility. 

Not  yet  in  his  teens,  Natawney 
Begay,  son  of  the  big  medicine  man, 
was  vainly  aware  of  his  prepossess- 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


ing  appearance,  his  arched  nose, 
eagle  eye,  and  faultless  build.  Even 
before  he  spoke  or  made  a  gesture, 
he  was  a  haughty  and  offensive 
challenge  to  the  half-invalid  orphan 
from  the  burned  hogan. 

Whether  it  was  Begay's  charm 
for  Eltceesie  or  for  her  father,  or 
because  the  sheep  really  needed  a 
third  herder  as  the  spring  advanced, 
the  little  girl  still  spent  much  of 
her  time  with  them  on  the  hills.  And 
on  the  first  day  of  her  coming,  as 
soon  as  the  three  children  found 
time  to  rest  on  a  sand  bank  above 
the  sheep,  the  medicine  man's  son 
hooked  his  fingers  banteringly  be- 
fore the  other  boy's  eyes,  "Ha- 
coon,"  (Come  on)  he  sneered. 

It  was  a  banter  to  wrestle,  but  it 
was  more — it  was  a  bid  for  the  pref- 
erence of  the  shepherdess  —  she 
would  give  it  to  the  champion — 
tribal  tradition  had  declared  the 
most  fit  to  be  the  most  deserving. 
Inherent  pride  of  championship 
came  with  hot  throbbings  into  the 
face  of  Husteele's  orphan  son,  but 
he  knew  he  was  not  recovered  from 
the  deep  sting  of  the  monster  that 
had  killed  his  father's  household. 

Eltceesie  knew  little  of  what  that 
monster  had  done  to  Peejo,  and 
how  nearly  he  was  still  crippled 
from  the  terrible  ordeal,  and  if  he 
refused  the  challenge  she  would 
think  him  a  coward,  nothing  more. 
He  was  no  coward — he  hated  the 
shame  of  it  worse  than  death,  and 
to  carry  that  shame  where  the  dear 
shepherdess  could  see  him — that 
was  too  much  to  bear. 

Without  a  word  he  braced  him- 
self in  answer  to  the  challenge,  and 
they  sprang  at  each  other,  grappling 
for  under  hold  while  Eltceesie 
watched  in  silence.  Peejo  had  the 
prowess,  the  game  nerve,  but  his 
big  fight  for  life  had  left  him  no 
strength  with  which  to  meet  the 
medicine  man's  son.  When  he  had 
been  forced  to  the  ground,  he  asked 
with  wounded  pride  for  a  second 
trial  which  brought  even  more  hu- 
miliation. 

Still  he  scorned  to  plead  his  unfit- 
ness— that  would  be  admitting  the 
very  thing  he  wanted  most  of  all  to 
disprove.  He  sank  panting  on  a 
stone  to  rest,  but  the  glory  of  it  was 
too  sweet  in  Begay's  proud  breast 
to  stop  without  more;  he  extended 
his  index  fingers  horizontally,  push- 
ing one  ahead  of  the  other,  a  chal- 
lenge to  run. 

Eltcessie  still  watched,  her  ver- 
dict pending.  The  game  blood  of 
Husteele  would  still  admit  of  no 
craven  refusal,  and  his  orphan  son 


gathered  himself  without  a  word 
and  exerted  all  his  depleted  power 
to  run  as  he  used  to  run  for  his 
father's  approving  smile.  It  was 
of  no  use,  his  feet  dragged  heavily, 
and  his  weary  limbs  should  have 
been  still  resting  on  the  sheepskin 
by  the  fire. 

With  sweet  exultation 
Begay  caught  the  approving  smile 
of  the  shepherdess  and  gazed  hero- 
ically away  over  the  desert  to  the 
hazy  "Mittens."  "That  big  hand 
is  mine,"  he  told  her,  "I  am  the  win- 
ner. 

Her  glance  turned  from  him  to 
the  little  hand  and  then  to  Peejo — 
had  he  nothing  to  say?  Had  he 
meekly  surrendered  his  claim  to 
that  big  hand — the  command  that 
she  said  she  would  answer? 

While  the  words  still  hung  on 
the  air,  a  needless  insult  to  the  in- 
jury he  had  suffered,  Peejo  arose  in- 
dignantly to  his  feet,  "Chinde  be- 
kigiel"  (Snake  Skin)  he  hissed, 
squaring  himself  for  what  he  knew  it 
would  mean. 

The  medicine  man's  son  leaped 
at  him  in  a  fury,  but  he  dodged,  at 
the  same  time  tripping  Begay  so 
that  he  fell  headlong  on  the  sand. 
Before  he  could  rise  Peejo  kicked 
him  in  the  side  and  jumped  astride 
of  his  back,  pinning  him  to  the 
ground.  And  still  the  chivalrous 
daring  of  Husteele's  blood  could 
not  compensate  for  what  the  mon- 
ster had  taken  from  his  son.  Begay 
in  a  rage  writhed  himself  to  upper 
place,  and  when  the  straying  sheep 
made  it  necessary  for  him  to  run 
after  them,  he  left  Peejo  in  a  mass 
of  bruises  and  blood. 


All  this  red  evidence  and  the  sto- 
ries told  that  night  to  Yoinsnez, 
made  matters  no  better  for  Hus- 
teele's orphan  son.  Begay's  great- 
er fitness  won  the  old  man  even 
more  than  it  won  his  little  daugh- 
ter. The  old  man  was  eager  to  be 
won — it  was  to  head  off  Peejo's  too 
apparent  attachment  for  Eltceesie 
that  he  had  induced  the  handsome 
champion  over  from  Klee  Betow, 
and  for  that  champion  he  express- 
ed his  preference  in  words  and  fa- 
vors intended  to  sting  Peejo. 

Everything  conspired  to  widen 
the  breach  between  the  rival's  son 
and  the  father  in  his  new  home,  till 
at  length  Peejo  asked  to  be  given 
his  father's  sheep  and  horses  and 
left  to  go  his  way  alone.  At  this 
the  old  man  exploded  in  wrath — 
the  very  idea  of  parting  right  now 
with  these  three  fleet  mares  when 
his  way  was  open  to  capture  Black- 
horse!  True  to  the  meaning  of  his 
name,  Yoinsnez  was  large  and  lion- 
like, and  after  watching  the  storm 
of  his  fury,  the  boy  decided  not  to 
mention  it  in  that  way  again. 

But  the  breach  widened.  With 
these  fleet  mares  and  no  opposition, 
the  old  man  prepared  to  make  a 
grand  roundup  of  the  mesa.  Peejo 
wanted  more  than  anything  else  to 
go  with  him — he  was  weary  to 
death  of  the  blatting  sheep;  he  had 
been  rewarded  with  vacations  when 
he  did  good  work  for  his  father; 
and  he  figured  he  deserved  a  vaca- 
tion now.  He  wanted  to  ride  the 
black  mare,  his  mare,  and  have  Be- 
(Continued  on  page  56) 

THE  NAVAJO,  HIS  HORSE  AND  HIS  HOGAN 
BY  THE  BARE  ROCKS  AND  THE  DRY  SAND 
WHERE  THE  FITTEST  HAVE  SURVIVED  THROUGH 
AGES  OF  DROUTH  AND   PRIVATION. 

Courtesy    Harry    Goulding,    Trading 
Post    Operator,     Monument    Valley. 


JhsL  PROTESTORS  OF 
CHRISTENDOM 

x.   WjoUdivL  3bu±hsA, 


By  JAMES  L  BARKER 

Head  of  the  Department  of  Modern  Languages  at 
the  University  of  Utah,  and  a  member  of  the  Gen- 
eral Board  of  the  Deseret  Sunday  School  Union 


T 


here  is  little  doubt  that  if  the 
church  had  corrected  itself 
in  time,  it  would  have  avoid- 
ed the  Reformation."1 

"This  interior  and  voluntary  re- 
form of  the  church,  that  some  of  its 
most  illustrious  doctors  (Saint  Ber- 
nard, Gerson)  had  demanded,  was 
constantly  postponed  or  refused  by 
short-sighted  popes,  concerned  more 
with  temporal  than  with  spiritual 
affairs."1 

Though  attempts  to  reform  the 
church  before  the  sixteenth  century 
failed,  discontent  with  her  was  deep- 
seated  and  persistent. 

The  Albigensian  heresy  was 
quenched  in  blood;  Wyclif 's  follow- 
ers were  suppressed;  John  Huss  was 
burned  and  a  holy  war  declared 
against  his  followers;  even  the  at- 
tempts to  reform  the  church  by  the 
general  councils  had  failed.  The 
councils  of  Pisa,  Constance,  and 
Basle  achieved  no  reforms  of  conse- 
quence, reforms  constantly  demand- 
ed, but  never  accomplished. 

Malet  says  the  doctors  of  Paris 
had  tried  to  force  the  adoption  of 
reforms  in  these  general  councils,  but 
"The  popes  succeeded  in  ridding 
themselves  of  the  councils,  in  re- 
maining masters  of  the  church,  and 
in  bringing  about  no  reforms.'" 

Conditions  did  not  improve. 
Martin  Luther,  the  son  of  a  peasant 
miner,  was  to  make  another  attempt, 
where  others  had  failed,  to  free  the 
church  from  abuses.  Were  he  en- 
trusted with  a  divine  mission,  his 
birth  could  not  have  been  more  op- 
portune. 

Less  than  ten  years  after  Luther's 
birth,  Cardinal  Rodrigo  Borgia  was 
elected  Pope  as  Alexander  VI.  "His 
irregular  life  was  known  to  all." 
"The  flood  of  paganism,  after  having 
invaded  the  Roman  Curia,  mounted 

iReinasch,   Francis,  p.   94. 

aMalet.  Histoire  de  France,  vol.   1,  p.  289. 

20 


even  to  the  throne  of  Saint  Peter. "3 
"An  astonishing  thing!  In  the 
reports  of  ambassadors  and  in  the 
chronicles  of  the  period,  this  election 
is  mentioned  without  the  slightest 
allusion  to  the  [corrupt]  manners  of 
the  newly  elected;  and  this  absence 
of  scandal  is  perhaps  the  greatest 
scandal  of  this  period."* 

Alexander  VI  should  have  pro- 
ceeded to  reform  the  church.  But 
how  could  he? 

According  to  the  historian  Pastor 
(Catholic),  his  election  had  been 
bought.5  He  was  the  father  of  six 
children.  He  made  his  third  son, 
Caesar  Borgia,  gonfalonier  (stand- 
ard bearer)  of  the  church.  Caesar 
Borgia  "was  almost  always  followed 
by  his  confidential  assassin,  don  Mi- 
chelotto,"5  and  among  his  numerous 
crimes,  he  is  credited  with  having 
caused  his  brother-in-law  to  be 
strangled.  "The  18th  of  August, 
1 500,  Caesar  provoked  by  Alphonse 
[husband  of  Lucrecia  Borgia]  pene- 
trated into  the  bedroom  of  his 
brother-in-law,  and  had  him  stran- 
gled before  his  eyes  by  don  Michel- 
otto."*  Pastor  says:  "The  pope 
passed  the  sponge  over  this  horrible 
event." 

The  inaptitude  of  Alexander  VI 
to  reform  the  church  was  manifest. 
Mourret  says  that  his  life  was  "the 
most  complete  contradiction  of  the 
lessons  of  Him,  whom  he  was 
charged  to  represent  on  the  earth."7 

He  not  only  initiated  no  reforms, 
but  frustrated  the  attempts  at  reform 
of  Savonarola.  However,  Savon- 
arola had  placed  himself  in  rebellion 
against  the  pope :  "If  the  one  sitting 
in  the  chair  of  Saint  Peter  is  in  evi- 
dent opposition  to  the  law  of  the 
gospel,    I    shall   say  to   him,"   said 

aMourret  (Catholic),  La  Renaissance  ct  la  Deforme, 
p.   201. 

4Mourret,    La   Renaissance   et  la   Reforme,    p.   201. 
•"Pastor,  Geschichte  dec  Papste. 
"Mourret,   La  Renaissance   et  la  Reforme,   p.  204. 
"Mourret,  La  Renaissance  et  la  Reforme,  p.  219. 
7Mourret,   La  Renaissance  et  la  Reforme,   p.   219. 


MARTIN    LUTHER 

Savonarola,  "you  are  not  the  Roman 
Church,  you  are  only  a  man  and  a 
sinner."8  Moreover,  Savonarola 
maintained  that  the  election  of  Alex- 
ander had  been  obtained  by  bribery, 
was  consequently  invalid,  and  that 
the  orders  of  Rodrigo  Borgia  ( Alex- 
ander VI )  were  not  binding  on  him; 
and  he  appealed  to  a  general  council 
of  the  church. 

No  doubt  Alexander  did  not  agree 
with  these  views,  and  it  is  also  prob- 
able that  his  views  did  not  disagree 
greatly  with  the  opinions  of  later  Ro- 
man church  historians;  "in  purely 
religious  matters,  he  [Alexander 
VI]  was  not  open  to  any  blame:"  he 
busied  himself  seriously  with  bring- 
ing the  utraquists  [those  who  ad- 
ministered the  sacrament  under  both 
forms]  of  Bohemia  to  the  unity  of 
the  faith,  and  he  sought  to  protect 
the  faithful  against  a  remnant  of  the 
Waldensees  in  Moravia."8  "It  seems 
that  Providence  had  wished  to  show 
that,  if  men  are  capable  of  injuring 
the  church,  they  are  incapable  of  de- 
stroying the  work  of  Christ."9 
"Again,  one  must  indeed  recognize 
that,  under  the  pontificate  of  Alex- 
ander VI,  the  faith  of  the  Roman 
Church  remained  immaculate."' 

If  historians  of  the  Roman  church 
are  right  and  the  doctrines  and  au- 
thority of  the  Christian  church  had 
been  preserved,  in  spite  of  simony, 
crime,  and  the  abuse  of  force, 
throughout  the  ages  and,  moreover, 
were  preserved  during  this  period  of 
degradation,  then  Luther  did  too 
much;  if  the  true  doctrines  and  or- 
dinances had  been  abandoned  for  the 

8Mourret,  La  Rennaissance  et  la  Reforme.  p.  219. 
9Mourret,  La  Renaissance  et  la  Reforme,  p.  222. 
9Mourret,  La  Renaissance   et  la  Reforme,  p.   219. 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


doctrines  and  ordinances  of  men  and, 
if  through  disobedience  and  sin,  the 
divine  authority  had  been  lost,  then 
Luther  did  well,  but  there  was  more 
to  be  done.10 

At  the  death  of  Alexander,  the 
College  of  Cardinals  was  com- 
posed of  38  members,  of  whom  27 
had  been  created  by  him.  Picolo- 
mini  was  elected  pope  as  Pius  III. 
Though  Pius  regarded  Caesar  Bor- 
gia "as  one  of  the  supports  of  the 
church,"11  he  outlined  a  program  of 
complete  reform  to  the  Sacred  Col- 
lege, including  pope,  cardinals  and 
the  curia.  However,  he  died  ten 
days  after  his  coronation. 

The  College  of  Cardinals  then 
elected  Julien  de  la  Rovere  as  Pope 
Julius  II.  Pastor  (Catholic)  is  of 
the  opinion  that  his  election  was 
simoniacal.12  Curiously  enough  his 
coronation  was  deferred  from  No- 
vember 19  to  November  26  because 
the  astrologers  had  signaled  an  "es- 
pecially favorable  position  of  the 
planets"  on  that  day.  Julius  died 
February  21,  1513. 

Jean  de  Medicis  was  elected  his 
successor  and  took  the  title  of  Leo  X. 
The  son  of  Lawrence  the  Magnifi- 
cent of  Florence,  his  education  had 
been  entrusted  to  the  humanist,  Auge 
Politien,  "one  of  the  most  funda- 
mentally  pagan   souls   of  his   cen- 

10It  is  interesting  to  compare  the  belief  of  the 
Roman  Church  that  no  matter  what  the  disobedience 
and  sin  of  the  leaders  of  the  church,  the  Lord  still 
preserved  the  church  and  now  recognizes  its  authority, 
with  the  following:  "The  rights  of  the  priesthood 
are  inseparably  connected  with  the  powers  of  heaven, 
and  .  .  .  the  powers  of  heaven  cannot  be  controlled 
nor  handled  only  upon  the  principles  of  righteousness. 
That  they  may  be  conferred  upon  us  it  is  true;  but 
when  we  undertake  to  cover  our  sins,  or  to  gratify 
our  pride,  our  vain  ambition,  or  to  exercise  control  or 
dominion  or  compulsion  upon  the  souls  of  the  children 
of  men,  in  any  degree  of  unrighteousness,  behold  the 
heavens  withdraw  themselves;  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord 
is  grieved;  and  when  it  is  withdrawn,  amen  to  the 
priesthood  or  the  authority  of  that  man. "'-Joseph 
Smith.     (Doc.   and  Cov.  121:36,  37.) 

Many  of  the  early  church  writers  (Justin  Martyr, 
Aristides,  Clement  of  Alexandria,  Origen,  Eusebius) 
taught  that  the  gospel  in  the  time  of  Jesus  was  not 
new,  and  Ireaneus  wrote  that  "Man  having  been 
lost  .  .  .  God  worked  to  save  him  progressively, 
giving  successively  the  four  testaments  [dispensations] 
from  Adam  to  Noah,  from  Noah  to  Moses,  from 
Moses  to  Jesus  Christ,  and  again  by  [Jesus  Christ] 
our  Lord."     In  Tixeront,  Histoire  des  Dogmes. 

Why  was  it  necessary  to  send  the  Gospel  to  the 
earth  more  than  once?  When  the  Lord  said  to  His 
Apostles,  "I  am  with  you  always,  even  to  the  end 
of  the  world"  (Matthew  28:20),  did  He  mean  that 
the  church  would  remain  on  the  earth  in  unbroken 
authority  to  the  end  of  the  world?  Was  He  with 
His  servants  in  the  earlier  dispensations  and  will  He 
be  with  them  until  the  end  of  the  world,  even 
though  the  people  of  their  time  were  disobedient? 
He  also  said,  "Upon  this  rock  I  will  build  my  church, 
and  the  gates  of  hell  shall  not  prevail  against  it" 
(Matthew  16:18.)  In  previous  dispensations,  the 
authority  of  His  church  disappeared  from  the  earth, 
but  did  "the  gates  of  hell"  on  that  account  prevail 
against  the  church? 

It  is  also  interesting  to  note  that  the  New  Testament 
contains  no  such  promise  as  that  made  in  regard  to 
the  church  in  our  day:  "and  the  kingdom  shall  not 
be  left  to  other  people  .  .  .  and  it  shall  stand  for- 
ever."     (Daniel    2:44.) 

If  the  church  were  to  have  been  preserved  regard- 
less of  disobedience,  then  the  first  dispensation  would 
have  lasted  to  the  end  of  the  world,  and  there  would 
have  been  no  need  for  more  than  one. 

nHefele-Leclercq,  Histoire  des  Conciles,  VIII.  I, 
p.    240. 

32Pastor,   Geschichte  der  Papste,  VI,  pp.   192,    193. 


tury."13  At  fourteen,  Jean  de  Mede- 
cis  had  been  made  a  cardinal.  Like 
his  predecessor,  he  was  a  great 
patron  of  art  that,  even  when  reli- 
gious, was  largely  paganized.14  So 
completely  paganized  had  the 
church  become  that  "grave  Cardi- 
nals hardly  dared  to  call  the  Holy 
Spirit,  the  Virgin,  and  heaven  by 
their  traditional  names.  Cardinal 
Bembo  will  speak  of  the  'Zephir'  and 
the  'Goddess',"  etc.15 

It  is  thus  that  in  Italy  the  Renais- 
sance or  Revival  of  Learning,  in  its 
admiration  of  the  literature  and  cul- 


THE  DOOR  OF  THE  CHURCH  AT  WITTENBERG 
ON  WHICH  MARTIN  LUTHER  POSTED  HIS 
95   THESES. 

ture  of  Greek  and  Roman  antiquity, 
tended  to  introduce  pagan  ideals 
and  pagan  moral  standards.  In  the 
north,  the  effects  of  the  Renaissance 
were  somewhat  different.  The  hu- 
manists were  delighted  with  the 
study  of  the  original  texts  of  the  an- 
cients, and  from  the  study  and  criti- 
cism of  the  profane  texts,  it  was  only 
a  step  to  the  study  of  the  original 
text  of  the  scriptures.  The  year  be- 
fore Luther  nailed  his  ninety-five 
theses  to  the  Castle  Church  door  in 
Wittenberg,  Erasmus  published  his 
Greek  New  Testament.  A  new 
spirit  was  getting  abroad  in  the 
world,  opposed  to  the  spirit  of  ab- 
solute authority  which  prescribed 
the  text  of  the  scriptures  to  be  read, 
the  Vulgate,  and  proscribed  the 
books  not  to  be  read,  the  Index,  and 
dictated  the  opinions  to  be  accepted 
on    pain    of    excommunication    and 

13Mourret,  La  Renaissance  et  la  Reforme,  p.  253, 
14The  doors  of  Saint  Peter's  were  sculptured  in  the 

reign  of  Eugene  IV  under  the  direction  of  Donatello. 

They    figure     "the    most     immoral     scenes    of     pagan 

mvthology".     Mourret,  La  Renaissance  et  la  Reforme, 

p.  247. 

15Mourret,  La  Renaissance  et  la  Reforme,  p.  256. 


death.  This  spirit  of  free  examina- 
tion, personal  judgment,  and  re- 
sponsibility was  the  very  essence  of 
the  Reformation. 

A  Jewish  convert  to  Christianity 
persuaded  the  Emperor  Maximilian 
to  order  the  confiscation  of  Jewish 
books.  Entrusted  with  the  inquiry, 
the  Archbishop  of  Mayence  con- 
sulted the  humanist  Reuchlin  and 
the  Dominican  inquisitor  in  Cologne. 
The  inquisitor  favored  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  books;  Reuchlin  urged  a 
better  knowledge  of  Hebrew,  de- 
fended the  Hebrew  literature,  and 
suggested  friendly  discussion  with 
the  Jews  as  a  substitute  for  burning 
their  books.  The  inquisitor  then  ac- 
cused Reuchlin  of  heresy.  The  case 
was  appealed  to  Rome  where  it 
dragged  on  until  1520  when  it  was 
decided  against  Reuchlin.  The  hu- 
manists regarded  the  proceedings  as 
the  outgrowth  of  intolerance  and  ig- 
norance. 

Since  the  seventh  general  council 
(787),  the  bishops  were  forbidden 
to  consecrate  new  churches  which 
possessed  no  relics.  Belief  in  the 
miraculous  power  of  relics  was  uni- 
versal. "Princes  rivaled  each  other 
in  collecting  the  relics  of  saints.  .  . 
Frederick  the  Wise  .  .  .  had  ac- 
cumulated no  less  than  five  thousand 
of  the  sacred  objects.  In  a  cata- 
logue of  them,  we  find  the  rod  of 
Moses,  a  bit  of  the  burning  bush, 
thread  spun  by  the  Virgin,  etc.  The 
elector  of  Mayence  possessed  even 
a  larger  collection,  which  included 
forty-two  whole  bodies  of  saints  and 
some  of  the  earth  from  a  field  near 
Damascus  out  of  which  God  was 
supposed  to  have  created  man."16 

Discontent  with  the  corruption 
and  avarice  of  the  church  was  gen- 
eral. The  peasants  suffered  from 
the  compulsory  collection  of  tithes, 
which  were  no  longer  a  free  will 
offering  as  in  the  early  church. 
There  was  discontent  with  the  nom- 
ination by  the  pope  to  vacant  offices 
in  Germany.  "These  offices  were 
given  either  to  favorites  of  the  pope 
or  to  whosoever  offered  the  highest 
price,  no  matter  what  the  origin  of 
the  buyer."17 

For  two  centuries  the  desire  for 
reform  had  been  growing.  A  bold 
strong  leader  was  needed  to  give  it 
expression  and  favorable  circum- 
stances to  prevent  it  from  being 
crushed.  The  leader  was  found  in 
Luther  and  the  favorable  circum- 
stances in  the  ambitions  and  political 
alliances  of  Europe. 

(Continued  on  page  50) 

lsRobinson,    History    of    Western   Europe,   pp.   377. 
378.      Ranke,   Geschichte  der  Reformation. 
"Malet,  Histoire  de  France,  vol.   1,   p.  288. 

21 


THE  STORY  OF  OUR 
• HYMNS 


It  is  interesting  to  note  how  richly 
the  British  Isles  have  contributed 
to  Latter-day  Saint  hymnology. 
Such  names  as  Charles  }.  Thomas, 
George  Careless,  Ebenezer  Beesley, 
Joseph  J.  Daynes,  John  Jaques,  Evan 
Stephens,  Thomas  C.  Griggs,  Adam 
C.  Smyth,  John  Tullidge,  John 
Lyon,  John  Nicholson,  Charles  W. 
Penrose,  William  Clayton,  and 
others  have  graced  the  pages  of  our 
hymn  books.  And  among  this 
coterie  of  poets  and  musicians,  Hen- 
ry W.  Naisbitt,  the  subject  of  this 
sketch,  is  not  the  least. 

He  was  born  in  November,  1 826, 
in  the  little  hamlet  of  Romanby, 
England,  so  named  because  it  was 
on  the  road  built  by  the  Roman  in- 
vaders. He  grew  up  to  early  man- 
hood at  the  near-by  town  of  North 
Allerton,  Yorkshire.  His  father  was 
a  Wesleyan  exhorter  and  Henry  was 
reared  in  a  serious  religious  at- 
mosphere— a  Bible  student  at  home, 
and  a  faithful  attendant  at  Sunday 
School.  His  love  for  reading 
amounted  almost  to  a  passion,  his 
favorite  authors  in  addition  to  the 
Bible,  being  Gray,  Thompson,  Cow- 
per,  Mrs.  Barbould,  Mrs.  Segourey, 
Elliott,  Massey,  and  Cooper. 

After  joining  the  Athenaeum  and 
Mechanics  institutes,  of  London, 
Henry  W.  Naisbitt  revelled  in  the 
works  of  Shakespeare,  Milton,  By- 
ron, Burns,  and  Moore,  later  being 
especially  attracted  by  the  poems  of 
Eliza  Cook,  Henry  Kirk  White,  and 
Mrs.  Hemans.  Henry's  father  died 
when  the  son  was  only  nine  years 
old  and  the  widow  with  five  children 
was  left  to  meet  life's  difficulties. 
Henry  continued  as  a  Wesleyan  un- 
til 1 850,  when  he  first  heard  the  Gos- 
pel preached  by  Orson  Pratt.  He 
was  doubtful  at  first,  but  gradually 
became  convinced  of  its  truth  and 
joined  the  Church  in  Liverpool,  im- 
migrating to  Utah  in  1854. 

In  his  mountain  home,  Brother 
Naisbitt  contributed  many  inspiring 
poems,  among  which  was  the  hymn, 
"Rest,  Rest  for  the  Weary  Soul."  In 
1902,  he  published  a  book  of  poems 
entitled  Rhymelets  in  Many  Moods, 
in  which  he  transferred  to  verse  the 
thoughts — some  of  which  he  said  had 
come  to  him  on  the  street — jotted 
down  on  the  back  of  an  envelope; 
others  that  had  reached  him  in  the 
midnight  hour  when  nothing  satis- 
fied him  but  to  arise  and  commit  the 
22 


By  GEORGE  D.  PYPER 

General  Superintendent  of  the  Deseret 
Sunday  School  Union  and  First  Assist- 
ant  Chairman    of   the   Church   Music 
Committee 


XXXVA. 

SouL 

WORDS  BY 

HENRY  W.  NAISBITT 

MUSIC  BY 

GEORGE  CARELESS 


REST,  REST  FOR  THE  WEARY 
SOUL 

By  Henry  W.  Naisbitt 

Rest,  rest  for  the  weary  soul, 
Rest,  rest  for  the  aching  head. 
Rest,  rest  on  the  hillside,  rest, 
With  the  great  uncounted  dead. 

Rest,  rest,  for  the  battle's  o'er, 
Rest,  rest,  for  the  race  is  run, 

Rest,  rest,  where  the  gates  are  closed 
With  each  evening's  setting  sun. 

Peace,  peace  where  no  strife  intrudes, 
Peace,    peace  where    no   quarrels 
come, 

Peace,  peace,  for  the  end  is  there 
Of  our  wild  life's  busy  hum. 

Peace,  peace,  the  oppressed  are  free. 

Rest,  rest,  oh,  ye  weary,  rest, 
For  the  angels  guard  those  well 

Who  sleep  on  their  mother's  breast. 

Peace,  peace,  there  is  music's  sound, 
Peace,  peace,  till  the  rising  sun 

Of  the  resurrection  morn 
Proclaims  life's  vict'ry  won. 


lines  to  paper;  others  that  had  come 
to  him  on  the  railway  trains,  and 
others,  when,  fresh  from  missionary 
labors,  the  spirit  of  a  theme  stirred 
his  mind. 

Brother  Naisbitt  filled  two  mis- 
sions to  his  native  land,  one  in  1 876- 
1878  when  he  labored  as  assistant 
editor  of  the  Millennial  Star  and  the 
other  in  1898-1901  when  he  was 
counselor  to  Platte  D.  Lyman,  in 
the  presidency  of  the  European  Mis- 
sion.   He  died  February  26,  1908. 

Five   of  Elder  Naisbitt's  hymns 


HENRY  W.    NAISBITT 

are  included  in  Latter-day  Saint 
Hymns,  viz:  "Rest,  Rest  for  the 
Weary  Soul"  (No.  65),  JThis 
House  We  Dedicate  to  Thee"  (No. 
59),  "We  Here  Approach  Thy 
Table,  Lord"  (No.  54),  "Weep  Not 
for  the  Early  Dead"  (No.  119), 
"What  Voice  Salutes  the  Startled 
Ear"  (No.  226). 

Two  poems  are  found  in  Deseret 
Sunday  Schools  Songs,  viz:  "For 
Our  Devotion,  Father,  We  Invoke 
Thy  Spirit"  (No.  100),  "We  Are 
Watchers,  Earnest  Watchers"  (No. 
160). 

The  Hymn  and  the  Composer 

Blessed  are  the  dead  which  die  in  the 
Lord,  from  henceforth:  yea,  saith  the  spirit, 
that  they  may  rest  from  their  labors;  and 
their  works  do  follow  them.     (Rev.  14:13.) 

HThe  beauty  of  Henry  W.  Naisbitt's 
"Rest,  Rest  on  the  Hillside 
Rest"  is  its  simplicity.  It  is  poetic 
and  rhythmic.  It  is  a  beautiful, 
comforting  song — full  of  solace  and 
peace.  It  declares  that  death  is  a 
happy  release  from  the  battles  of  life 
and  that  one  enters  into  a  peace 
where  no  strife  intrudes,  no  quar- 
rels come;  where  the  oppressed  are 
free  and  the  weary  at  rest. 

But  Henry  W.  Naisbitt  did  not 
believe  that  the  spirit  of  a  deceased 
person  was  buried  in  the  cemetery. 
He  believed  in  the  Latter-day  Saint 
doctrine  that  only  the  mortal  remains 
are  placed  there;  that  the  spirit,  the 
intelligent  part,  is  taken  to  the  par- 
adise of  God  to  await  the  resurrec- 
tion morn.  This  is  beautifully  told 
by  the  Nephite  Prophet  Alma,  as  re- 
corded in  the  Book  of  Mormon: 

(Concluded  on  page  50) 


CONFIDENCE 


ft 


.N  early  morning 
zephyr  sweeping  down  the  canyon 
met  the  circular  camp  of  the  little 
emigrant  train  and  broke  in  eddying 
currents  around  the  covered  wagons. 
Mary  Anne,  fresh  and  cheery  in  a 
bright  gingham  dress,  drew  her  gray 
shawl  closer  about  her  shoulders  and 
moved  with  her  frying  pan  and  pan- 
cake batter  to  the  other  side  of  the 
fire.  The  ribbon  of  smoke  wavered 
for  a  moment,  then  followed  her. 
She  rubbed  her  smoke-filled  eyes. 

"Fiddlesticks!"  she  exclaimed  im- 
patiently. 

"Smoke  alius  f oilers  the  purtiest," 
chuckled  a  masculine  voice.  "You 
see  it  don't  bother  me." 

Mary  Anne  looked  up  in  surprise 
to  find  the  keen,  blue  eyes  of  the 
old  trapper,  Bill  Tarkin,  smiling 
down  at  her.  She  liked  Old  Bill  with 
his  indispensable  rifle  and  his  leath- 
ery brown  face  that  wrinkled  so 
easily  into  a  happy  smile.  His  pres- 
ence in  the  camp  made  the  journey 
much  more  pleasant.  She  smiled 
back  and  then  broke  into  a  hearty 
laugh  as  the  smoke  from  the  fire  turn- 
ed and  enveloped  him. 

"You  look  as  fresh  as  a  buttercup, 
Mary  Anne,"  he  said  as  he  moved 
to  her  side  of  the  fire.  "Them  In- 
jun signals  that  we  saw  on  the  hill 
last  night  must  not  have  kept  you 
from  havin'  a  good  night's  sleep." 

"No,"  she  answered,  "I  don't 
worry  much  about  the  Indians;  they 
won't  bother  us." 

"Well,  they  ain't  never  done,  but 
we're  gettin'  into  the  country  now 
where  they're  most  usually  at  their 
worst.  Your  pa  stood  guard  last 
night,  didn't  he?" 

"Yes,  he  and  Allan  Motte." 

"Allan  Motte.  So  that's  why 
you're  so  certain  the  Injuns  won't 
bother.  Hm-m.  Well,  I  reckon 
you're  right;  a  handsome,  strappin' 
young  feller  like  Allan  wouldn't  let 
no  pesky  redskin  carry  you  off." 

"Now,  Mister  Tarkin,"  she  said, 
"that  wasn't  what  I  meant  at  all," 
She  looked  up  at  him  and  her  face 
grew  serious.  "I  feel  the  same  way 
about  it  no  matter  who  is  on  guard 
duty.  You  see,  we  came  out  here  to 
make  homes  and  to  find  peace,  and  I 
don't  think  our  protection  is  left  en- 
tirely to  human  hands.  We  treat  the 
Indians  fairly  and  we  take  precau- 


By  LORIN  F.  BUTLER 

A  SHORT 
SHORT 
STORY 

COMPLETE  ON  THIS  PAGE 

tions  against  attack,  but  still  I  have 
confidence  that  He  who  led  us  out 
here  is  watching  over  us." 

"You  Mormons  are  a  queer  lot,"  he 
remarked  meditatively.  "You  know 
how  treacherous  and  bloodthirsty 
the  blamed  Injuns  are  and  still  you 
talk  of  holdin'  'em  off  with  faith  and 
confidence.  You  know  what  hap- 
pened to  Marcus  Whitman  and  his 
family  because  they  trusted  the  In- 
juns and  wasn't  prepared  to  defend 
themselves." 

"I  know,  but — well,  you  have 
faith,  too,  Mister  Tarkin,  else  you 
wouldn't  be  here." 

"Yes,  I  have  faith,  but  it's  faith 


in  the  white  man's  alertness  and  in 
the  business  end  of  a  good  rifle." 

Jed  Aranby  and  Allan 
Motte,  the  two  men  who  had  been 
standing  guard  at  a  point  of  rocks 
a  hundred  yards  away,  were  re- 
turning to  camp.  Bill  Tarkin's  eyes 
twinkled  with  satisfaction  as  he 
watched  them, 

"There  is  the  reason  why  I  could 
sleep  well,"  he  explained.  "I  knew 
those  fellows  were  standin'  out  there 
with  their  rifles  ready.  My  faith 
was  a  faith  in  them." 

The  two  guards  leaned  their  rifles 
against  the  wagon  wheel  and  came 
up  to  the  fire.  Old  Bill  tossed  more 
wood  on  the  flames  and  then  picked 
up  the  weapons  and  looked  at  them 
fondly.  He  was  a  lover  of  good  fire- 
arms and  these  guns  pleased  him. 
They  were  high-powered  Win- 
chesters exactly  alike.  He  squinted 
over  the  sights  at  an  imaginary  In- 
dian, clicked  his  tongue,  and  grin- 
ned. 

"Mighty  nice  little  weapons,"  he 
said.  "Yes,  Mary  Anne,  I  got 
plenty  good  solid  confidence,  I  guess 
— confidence  in  tangible  things  like 
these  and  the  boys  that  use  'em." 
Bill  put  the  guns  down  and  moved 
on  in  his  morning  visits  around  the 
circle  of  wagons. 

"They  are  good  guns,"  Jed  re- 
marked. "And  it's  pretty  hard  to 
tell  'em  apart." 

"Yes,"  Allan  agreed,  "they're 
twins.  It  was  a  lucky  thing  for  me 
that  they  are  the  same  calibre."  He 
grinned  sheepishly  at  his  companion 
and  went  on.  "When  Captain  An- 
drews asked  me  to  stand  guard  with 
you  last  night,  I  didn't  have  a  single 
cartridge  in  my  gun.  I  was  right 
out,  but,  our  guns  being  the  same, 
I  knew  I  could  get  some  from  you  if 
I  needed  them." 

"You — "  the  older  man's  face 
whitened  for  an  instant  and  then 
flushed  crimson,  "you  didn't  have 
any  shells  for  your  gun?" 

"I  guess  it  does  sound  ridiculous 
to  an  old  scout  like  you." 

Jed  shook  his  head  and  silently 
watched  the  flames  as  they  twisted 
and  leaped  in  a  miniature  war  dance. 

Jed  looked  up  from  the  fire.  "Ri- 
diculous," he  repeated  slowly,  half 
to  himself,  "yes,  because — I  didn't 
have  any  ammunition  either!" 


23 


An  imperial  luau 


It  was  autumn  in  Hawaii — the 
birds  were  singing  and  flowers 
were  in  bloom  everywhere.  Ha- 
waii seemed  to  be  a  paradise.  Gor- 
geous shades  of  red,  yellow,  and 
pink  hibiscus  lined  the  wooded 
ways,  while  shower  trees  of  pink 


1.  BROTHER  GEORGE  MOSSMAN  WITH  A  GROUP 
OF   HULA   DANCERS. 

2.  HOW  THE   NATIVES   EAT    POI. 

3.  THE  WHITE  MAN  EATS  POI  THE  NATIVE 
WAY. 

4.  STAKE  PRESIDENT  RALPH  E.  WOOLLEY 
(RIGHT)  AND  BISHOP  J.  F.  WOOLLEY, 
GENERAL  LUAU  CHAIRMAN  (LEFT)  ARE 
CAUGHT  IN   THE  MIDST  OF  PROCEEDINGS. 

5.  PART  OF  CROWD  AND  THE  TEMPORARY 
STAGE  ON  WHICH  THE  TWELVE  HOUR  PRO- 
GRAM   WAS   RENDERED. 


Sister  Emma  Kelulalanikulani 
Mossman,  the  author  of  this  ar- 
ticle, and  her  husband,  Elder  George 
Mossman,  are  attempting  to  preserve 
for  the  present  generation  the  fine 
culture  of  the  ancient  Hawaiians. 
Their  Lalani  Hawaiian  Village  at 
2558  Kalakauia  Street  on  Waikiki 
Beach,  is  one  place  that  all  visitors  to 
Hawaii  should  see.  Sister  Mossman 
is  a  good  example  also  of  the  pedi- 
grees of  the  island  people.  Her  great 
grandfather  was  a  brother  of  King 
Kamehameha  I,  who  united  the  is- 
lands under  one  ruler;  on  her  moth- 
er's side  she  is  descended  from  the  an- 
cient kings  of  Maui,  her  maternal 
grandfather  fought  on  the  side  of  the 
Colonies  in  the  war  of  the  Revolu- 
tion. 


24 


J  Jul  ffjahiL  StaluL  puiiu  ov&Jv  thsL 
By  EMMA  KELULALANIKULANI  MOSSMAN 

Descendant  of  Hawaii  Maul  Molokea  Oahu,  Kaua 

and  gold  flung  their  beauty  over- 
head. The  white  ginger  and  jas- 
mine wafted  their  sweet  perfume. 
The  royal  poincian,  most  brilliant 
of  all  flowering  trees,  flamed  with 
living-fire  every  road  and  garden. 
Bougainvillaes  and  Mexican  creep- 
ers trailed  along  on  lattice-work 
and  walls,  while  down  hillsides,  yel- 
low allamandas  brightened  the  way. 

Somehow,  here  in  Hawaii,  au- 
tumn is  grander — the  moon  nearer, 
warmer,  and  brighter.  The  sea  is 
bluer  and  the  clouds  are  whiter. 
Music  is  sweeter,  laughs  are  gayer, 
welcome  is  truer,  love  is  stronger, 
and  people  are  happier.  Life  here 
seems  more  like  living. 

So,  as  nature  filled  the  hearts  of 
the  people  with  loveliness  and 
grandeur,  the  Saints  and  officials  of 
the  Oahu  Stake  of  the  Church  of 
Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints, 
were  inspired  to  stage  a  gigantic 
luau  or  native  feast,  used  formerly 
in  connection  with  the  religious  cer- 
emonies of  the  Hawaiians  in  the 
spirit  of  thanksgiving.  The  pur- 
pose of  the  feast  was  three-fold: 
First,  to  create  a  keener  interest 
and  greater  spirit  of  cooperation 
among  the  members  of  the  stake 
through  mass  participation;  second, 
to  raise  a  fund  towards  the  erection 
of  the  projected  tabernacle  in  Ha- 
waii; third,  to  establish  a  more 
friendly  relationship  between  the 
Church  and  the  community. 

For  weeks  the  Saints  and  their 
friends,  more  than  one  thousand, 
coming  from  their  daily  occupa- 
tions, gave  of  their  time  to  help 
build  on  the  beautiful,  treegrown, 
flower-covered  site  of  the  coming 
tabernacle,  a  temporary  lanai  or  ar- 
bor about  two-hundred-fifty  feet  by 
fifty  feet,  where  nine  hundred  peo- 
ple could  be  seated  at  tables  at  one 
time.  Storehouses,  tables,  benches, 
and  service  tables  were  also  erect- 
ed. A  platform  was  built  near  by, 
under  the  spreading  branches  of  a 
huge  mango  tree,  on  which  an  en- 
tertainment of  song,  dance  and  pag- 
eant was  to  take  place.  Trees  and 
hedges  were  trimmed  and  the  nec- 
essary area  for  the  coming  crowds 
cleared. 

Meetings  of  the  several  commit- 
tees were  held  weekly.  And  there 
were  of  necessity  committees  aplen- 


ty, under  the  guidance  of  the  stake 
presidency,  and  headed  by  the  Gen- 
eral Chairman,  Bishop  J.  Frank 
Woolley,  and  the  assistant  chair- 
man, Elder  George  Mossman.  It 
was  planned  to  put  over  the  biggest 
undertaking  the  stake  or  the  islands 
had  ever  attempted.  Ticket  sellers 
combed  the  city.  Some  of  the  wards 
sold  their  quota  of  tickets,  and 
others  sold  more  than  their  share. 
Fully  one-third  of  the  food  was  do- 
nated. Private  individuals  and  bus- 
iness firms  contributed  food  and 
materials  for  the  occasion. 

Two  days  before  the  luau,  the 
women  peeled  taro,  which  came 
from  Laie,  where  the  temple  now 
stands.  These  women  worked  all 
day  long,  and  by  evening  the  taro 
was  ready  to  be  put  into  large  ma- 
chines, operated  by  the  men,  to  be 
turned  into  two  and  a  half  tons  of 
poi,  the  famous  native  Hawaiian 
dish,  and  the  chief  article  of  food  of 
the  Hawaiian.  Anciently,  poi  was 
pounded  on  a  board,  often  two  men 
worked  on  one  board  as  they  sang 
and  joked.  Today,  machines  do 
the  work  more  efficiently. 

The  next  day  some  of  the  boys 
and  men  went  to  the  mountains  for 
tons  of  rMeaves  and  ferns — the 
leaves  for  wrapping  fish  and  vege- 
tables to  be  cooked  in  the  imu  or 
earth  oven;  the  ferns  for  decorative 
purposes.  Some  of  the  women  went 
to  the  beach  for  sea  weeds,  one  of 
the  unique  ingredients  of  the  luau 
meal.  Others  went  to  the  taber- 
nacle grounds  in  four-hour  shifts  to 
prepare     the     food     for     cooking. 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


AN  IMPRESSION   OF  THE 

IMPERIAL  LUAU 

By  Virginia  Woolley 

Brown  hands,  toughened  through  long 

use, 
Lift  steaming  rocks  from  the  imus. 
Native    hands,    in    swirling    rhythm, 

mix  poi. 
To  feed  a  multitude. 
Eager,  haole  hands  gesturing  direc- 
tions, 
Pale,  oriental  hands  diligent  in  their 

service; 
Hands   moving    softly   across   guitar 

strings, 
Accompanying     hands     in     graceful 

motion  that 
Tell  the  story  of  an  age-old  hula  .  . 
Helpful,  industrious,  patient  hands! 
Hands  in  the  attitude  of  prayer: 
"Bless  our  labors,   oh  Lord,   for  to 

thee 
Is  dedicated  this  work," 

imu  is  the  pit  where  the  pig  is  cooked. 
haole  is  the  word   for  white-man. 
hula    is    the    traditional,    interpretive    dance 
of    the  Hawaiian   people. 


Chickens  and  fish  were  cleaned, 
hacked,  and  cut,  then  put  into  ti~ 
leaf  wrappers  to  be  cooked  in  the 
imu. 

The  imu  or  oven  was  a  hole  dug 
in  the  ground  several  feet  in  diam- 
eter and  about  a  foot  deep.  This 
was  lined  with  rocks.  On  top  came 
a  layer  of  dry  twigs  for  kindling, 
then  layers  of  wood,  and  last  of  all 
came  other  stones,  which  being 
porous  would  not  crack  when  heat- 
ed. When  the  burning,  hard  wood 
made  the  stones  red  hot,  the  oven 
was  ready  for  use.  Green  banana 
stumps  were  pounded  flat  and 
placed  upon  the  hot  stones;  upon 
them  in  turn  were  placed  large 
banana  leaves.  On  this  bedding  were 
placed  the  pig,  potatoes,  fish,  and 
other  delicacies,  covered  by  more 
layers  of  leaves  and  finally  by  a  thick 
layer  of  soil,  and  allowed  to  cook 
from  one  to  three  hours. 

Thirty  pigs,  4,000  pounds;  300 
chickens,  1,500  pounds;  salt  sal- 
mon, 500  pounds;  dried  fish,  150 
pounds;  raw  fish,  200  pounds;  sweet 
potatoes,  5,000  pounds;  poi,  5,000 
pounds;  taro  tops,  45  bags;  sea- 
weeds, 150  pounds;  fresh  pineap- 
ples 800  pounds;  coconuts,  1,800; 
onions  and  tomatoes,  200  pounds; 
kukui  nuts  and  red  salt,  300  pounds 
— a  total  of  nine  tons  of  food  was 
prepared  for  the  luau. 

Everywhere  on  the  grounds  men 
and  women  were  busy  at  work. 
Many  worked  until  midnight.  As 
they  worked  under  the  palms  and 
amidst  tropical  trees  and  bushes, 
some  of  the  women  and  men  with 
ukeleles  and  guitars  sang  old-time 
Hawaiian    songs.     The    air    rang 


with  music  and  happy  laughter  as 
they  worked  like  one  large  happy 
family.  Never  was  there  such  a 
demonstration  of  cooperation 
among  the  Saints  as  was  shown  that 
night  and  during  the  luau.  It  was 
a  thrilling  sight. 

At  last,  the  day  of  luau  came! 
Workers  arrived  early  to  deco- 
rate and  set  their  tables.  At  noon 
everything  was  ready.  Preceded 
by  the  Royal  Hawaiian  band,  and 
led  by  President  Ralph  E.  Woolley 
of  the  Oahu  Stake  and  the  Mayor 
of  Honolulu,  the  first  section  en- 
tered the  Arbor,  now  gayly  and 
beautifully  decorated,  to  partake  of 
the  feast,  which  was  to  be  given 
in  five  sections,  at  12  noon,  2,  4,  6, 
and  8  in  the  afternoon  and  evening. 
And  a  feast  it  was!  The  imu-cooked 
food  melted  in  the  mouth;  the  poi 
gave  double  relish  to  the  taste;  the 
people  lingered  at  the  tables. 

Nearly  six  thousand  guests,  with 
bright  colored  leis,  flocked  during 
the  day  to  the  spacious  tabernacle 
grounds.  All  day  long  they  came. 
By  six  in  the  evening,  the  crowds 
grew  so  large  that  some  of  them 
crashed  the  gates.  People  of  all  na- 
tionalities were  there.  Many  of 
Honolulu's  notables  were  there  too, 
business  and  professional  men, 
members  of  the  legislature,  etc., 
and  Errol  Flynn,  the  movie  actor, 
was  there  also,  to  be  nearly  mobbed 
by  youngsters  asking  for  his 
autograph.  The  Saints  of  Hawaii 
were  honored  with  the  presence  of 
Elder  John  A.  Widtsoe  of  the  Coun- 
cil of  the  Twelve  and  his  good  wife, 
who  were  special  guests  at  the  luau. 

At  the  four  o'clock  sitting,  the 
opening  of  the  imu,  the  sizzling  of 
the  roast  pig,  and  the  singing  were 
broadcast  by  KGMB  over  a  na- 
tional hook-up,  perhaps  the  first 
time  that  roast  pig  has  been  so  hon- 
ored. 

The  feast  did  not  end  with  eat- 
ing. From  noon  until  nearly  mid- 
night, on  the  stage  erected  under 
the  shade  of  the  mango  tree,  there 
was  rendered  an  unequalled,  con- 
tinuous program  of  singing,  danc- 
ing, and  representations  of  native 
customs,  ending  with  a  stirring 
pageant  of  ancient  Hawaii. 

Beautiful  girls  from  all  parts  of 
the  islands  danced  the  rhythmic 
dance  of  Hawaii.  The  hula,  a  sa- 
cred, ceremonial  temple  dance,  a 
part  of  religious  service,  interpret- 
ing the  meaning  of  life,  of  earth, 
and  sky,  of  bird  and  beast,  of  sun- 
shine and  angry  waves,  was  given 
in  its  perfection.  Powerful  men  of 
Hawaii    displayed  their  skill    and 


prowess.  Colorful  pageantry  by 
Samoans  and  Hawaiians  added  to 
the  spectacular  performance.  Imag- 
ine! Twelve  hours  of  continuous 
music,  singing,  dancing  and  feast- 
ing, in  a  tropical  garden  of  ferns 
and  island  flowers  of  every  hue.  A 
picture  never  to  be  forgotten! 

{Concluded  on  page  50) 


1.  CHIEF    OF    THE    IMU— A    FINE    TYPE    OF 
HAWAIIAN    MANHOOD. 

.   PREPARING  COCONUTS  FOR  THE  LUAU. 

.  OPENING  THE  IMU  OR  NATIVE  OVEN— 
BENEATH  THE  HOT  STONES  ARE  PIG  AND 
FISH,  POTATOES,  VEGETABLES,  ETC., 
BAKED    OR    ROASTED    TO    A    TURN. 

.    ILLUSTRATING  THE  NATIVE  ARTS. 

.  WELL-FED  AND  AT  PEACE  IS  THE  NATIVE 
CHILD. 

25 


Lehi's  route 
to  america 


I 


N  WHICH  IS  SET  FORTH  ONE  MAN  S 
VIEW    ON    A    MOOTED    QUESTION. 


By  C  DOUGLAS  BARNES,  Ph.D. 


M' 


I  any  Book  of  Mormon 
scholars  will  disagree  with 
the  point  of  view  herein  set 
forth,  and  it  is  presented  here, 
not  as  the  view  of  the  Church, 
but  as  the  speculation,  opinion, 
and  possible  conclusion  of  one 
thoughtful  student  of  the  sub~ 
ject,  and  is  submitted  for  what 
value  it  has  as  a  creator  of  in- 
terest and  stimulator  of  thought 
in  these  channels. 


Concerning  the  migration  of 
Lehi  and  his  colony  from 
Jerusalem,  as  disclosed  in  the 
Book  of  Mormon,  Dr.  James  E. 
Talmage  in  The  Articles  of  Faith, 
states: 

The  company  journeyed  somewhat  east 
of  south,  keeping  near  the  borders  of  the 
Red  Sea;  then  changing  their  course  to  the 
eastward,  crossed  the  peninsula  of  Arabia; 
and  there,  on  the  shores  of  the  Arabian 
Sea,  built  and  provisioned  a  vessel  in  which 
they  committed  themselves  to  Divine  care 
upon  the  waters.  Their  voyage  carried 
them  eastward  across  the  Indian  Ocean, 
then  over  the  South  Pacific  Ocean  to  the 
western  coast  of  South  America.  (Page 
271,  9th  Edition.) 

By  referring  to  the  conventional 
terrestrial  globe  and  tracing  the  path 
as  outlined  by  Dr.  Talmage,  it  is 
clear  that  the  point  of  embarkation 
was  somewhere  on  the  southeastern 
extremity  of  the  Arabian  peninsula. 
In  order  to  reach  the  Americas  from 
this  point,  it  required  traversing  in 
excess  of  13,000  miles,  or  more  than 
halfway  around  the  world.  While 
it  is  unlikely  that  we  shall  ever  have 
sufficient  information  to  define  pre- 
cisely the   path    followed   by  that 


group  in  reaching  America,  perti- 
nent data  have  been  accumulated 
which  are  quite  illuminating  and 
which  lead  to  at  least  a  rough  defi- 
nition of  the  probable  path  followed 
in  the  migration  under  discussion. 

The  ocean  journey  of  Lehi,  de- 
pending as  it  did  upon  natural  agen- 
cies, such  as  wind  and  currents,  for 
propelling  the  craft,  undoubtedly  oc- 
cupied many  months.  Although  not 
claimed  in  the  Book  of  Mormon  ac- 
count of  the  journey,1  which  is  quite 
condensed,  it  is  logical  to  assume 
that  the  colony  stopped  as  occasion 
demanded  or  opportunity  presented 
to  provision  the  craft  and  to  re- 
plenish the  water  supply.  The  mem- 
ory of  these  stops,  or  contact  with 
lands  and  possibly  peoples  en  route, 
may  have  been  perpetuated  through 
the  centuries  in  the  traditions  of 
descendants  of  the  Lehi  colony,  and 
we  turn  for  such  evidence  to  the 
Hawaiians,  who  putatively  are 
among  the  posterity  of  the  Lehi 
group. 

As  regards  the  mechanics  of  this 
protracted  journey,  it  has  been  found 

!I   Nephi    18. 
DIAGRAM  SHOWING  A  SPECULATIVE  POSSIBILITY 


that  ocean  currents  exist  which  in 
proper  season  move  eastward  from 
the  Arabian  peninsula  toward  India 
and  even  to  Sumatra.  By  taking  ad- 
vantage of  mergings  into  other  ex- 
isting ocean  current  systems,  it  is 
possible  to  outline  an  ocean  route  to 
the  Americas.  These  points  will 
now  be  amplified. 

Study  of  Ocean  Currents 

Quoting  from  An  Introduction  to 
^-  Oceanography,  by  James  John- 
stone, D.  Sc,  Professor  of  Ocean- 
ography in  the  University  of  Liver- 
pool:8 

North  of  the  equator  the  streaming  of 
the  Indian  Ocean  is  dominated  by  the  mon- 
soon wind  systems.  Figure  60  (the  upper 
one)  represents  the  winter  conditions  when 
the  North-East  Monsoon  has  been  estab- 
lished, while  the  lower  figure  shows  the 
streaming  set  up  in  the  conditions  of  the 
South-West  Monsoon  which  blows  during 
the  summer  months.  .  .  . 

...  As  a  rule  the  heating  and  cooling 
effect  of  the  continental  land  masses  is  in- 
sufficient to  do  more  than  set  up  local  modi- 
fications of  the  prevailing  wind  currents, 
but  the  Indian  Ocean,  in  its  relation  to  the 
great  and  high  Asiatic  continent,  is  a  strik- 
ing exception.     In  the  summer  months  the 

2Pages  282-284.  Publisher:  The  University  Press 
of  Liverpool,  Ltd.,  Hodder  and  Stoughton,  Ltd.,  Lon- 
don,   1928. 


26 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,   JANUARY,    1939 


r  ~  ZSouTfern  _»*f*I  " -      _  „  -    „ 


FIG.  60.  THE  CURRENT  SYSTEMS  OF  THE 
INDIAN  OCEAN. 
The  upper  figure  represents  the  generalized  con- 
ditions during  the  winter  months  and  the  lower  figure 
shows  the  summer  conditions  in  that  part  of  the  Ocean 
where  the  circulation  reverses  with  the  season.  (Con- 
tinuous lines  represent  warm  currents  and  broken  lines 
cold  ones.) 

elevated  lands  become  so  strongly  heated 
that  a  wind  system,  lasting  for  some  months 
is  established,  this  is  the  South-west  Mon- 
soon. In  the  winter  months  the  continental 
land  is  strongly  cooled  and  then  a  reversed 
condition  is  set  up:  the  North-east  Monsoon 
is  established  and  blows  also  for  some 
months. 

The  Figure  60  referred  to  is  re- 
produced for  reference.  It  is  quite 
evident  from  an  inspection  of  the 
lower  chart  of  the  figure  that  in  sum- 
mer months  ocean  currents  (south- 
west monsoon  drift )  move  eastward 
from  the  Arabian  shore,  touch  In- 
dia, and  move  into  the  Bay  of  Bengal. 
In  winter  months  the  northeast  mon- 
soon drift  (cf.  upper  chart  Figure 
60)  would  be  less  favorable  for  an 
easterly  migration  since  the  currents 
move  toward  the  African  rather  than 
the  Indian  Coast.  Continuing  again 
it  is  clear  from  the  lower  chart  that 
there  is  a  movement  of  water  south- 
east from  the  Bay  of  Bengal,  be- 
tween Sumatra  and  the  Malay 
peninsula,  and  on  into  the  South 
China  Sea.  Also  other  currents  in 
the  South  China  Sea  move  north- 
ward past  Borneo.  In  addition  there 
is  an  eastward  movement  through 
the  archipelago  north  of  Borneo  and 
iust  south  of  the  Philippines  and  into 
the  Pacific   Ocean.     At  this  point, 


referring  to  Figure  59  ( page  28 )  re- 
produced from  the  same  text,  an 
ocean  stream  running  counter-current 
to  the  north  and  south  equatorial 
streams  moves  eastward  in  about 
the  5°  north  latitude,  finally  dividing 
and  reversing  itself  just  off  the 
shores  of  Central  and  South  Amer- 
ica. Thus  by  a  series  of  currents  a 
path  from  Arabia  to  America  has 
been  outlined.8 

Point  of  Arrival  in  the  Americas 

Tt  is  proposed  by  the  author  that 
the    Lehi    colony    reached    the 
Americas  by  means  of  the  current 
combinations  outlined  above. 

Provided  the  craft  followed  the 
natural  ocean  stream  eastward 
across  the  Pacific  Ocean,  as  de- 
scribed, it  appears  logical  that  the 
colony  arrived  at  a  point  on  the 
western  shore  of  Central  or  South 
America,  somewhere  between  the 
equator  and  15°  north  latitude. 

Expansion  and  Division  of  the 
Lehi  Colony 

"Deviewing  briefly  the  Book  of 
Mormon  history,  the  colony 
lived  in  the  new  land  for  a  time  in 
relative  harmony.  Eventually,  how- 
ever, a  division  occurred,  based  on 
religious  principles  in  which  the  less 
righteous  group  followed  Laman, 
one  of  the  older  sons  of  Lehi,  while 
the  righteous  remained  under  the 
leadership  of  Nephi,  a  younger  son 
of  Lehi.  In  contrast  to  their  broth- 
ers, the  Nephites,  and  as  a  distin- 
guishing mark  set  on  them  by  the 
Lord,  the  Lamanites  became  more 
highly  pigmented,  and  today  we 
point  to  the  American  Indian,  still 
carrying  this  pigmentation,  as  their 
descendants. 

The  colony  as  a  whole  grew  and 
spread  northward,  ultimately  and 
after  several  centuries,  reaching  a 
high  state  of  civilization,  as  judged 
both  by  the  written  history  in  the 
Book  and  by  the  physical  evidences 
found  in  the  ruins  in  Central  Amer- 
ica. During  this  development  the 
activities  of  a  portion  of  the  group 
extended  again  to  the  sea,  and  within 

sAn  interesting  account  of  a  recent  passage  of  a 
craft  from  Singapore,  through  the  China  Sea  and 
finally  eastward  just  south  of  the  Philippines  into  the 
Pacific  Ocean  was  published  by  Alan  J.  Villiers  in  the 
National  Geographic  Magazine  (Feb.,  1937,  p.  221) 
under  the  title  "North  About."  The  feasibility  of 
the  journey  is  outlined  in  the  following  excerpt  from 
the  account:  "From  Singapore  there  are  two  routes 
by  which  a  square-rigged  ship  may  hope  to  reach 
Sydney,  New  South  Wales.  Either  she  may  make 
the  best  of  her  way  to  the  southward,  through  Soenda 
(Sunda)  Strait,  or  around  the  north  of  Sumatra  with 
the  southeast  monsoon,  standing  down  the  west  coast 
of  Australia  and  then  running  her  longitude  down  in 
the  wild  west  winds  to  the  south  of  that  continent; 
or  she  may  go  northward  around  Borneo  and  eastward 
into  the  Pacific,  hoping  that  when  that  difficult  stage 
of  the  voyage  is  past  she  may  make  her  southing  with 
the   southeast   trade." 


approximately  the  century  of 
Christ's  advent,  colonizers  were  be- 
ing carried  by  boats  under  Hagoth 
to  the  land  northward,  and  the  claim 
is  made  in  the  record  that  at  least 
two  boat  loads  of  people  and  pro- 
visions were  lost  at  sea/ 

It  is  naturally  assumed  that  these 
marine  activities  extended  into  both 
the  Pacific  Ocean  and  Carribean 
Sea,  and  some  students  of  the  Book 
of  Mormon  claim  it  resulted  in  the 
transplanting  of  a  portion  of  Lehi's 
descendants  into  the  Hawaiian  and 
other  of  the  Polynesian  islands, 
possibly  representing  the  boat  loads 
which  were  lost  as  just  mentioned.8 
The  acceptance  of  a  direct  relation- 
ship between  the  Hawaiians  and  the 
descendants  of  the  Lehi  colony  in 
America  is  important  from  the  stand- 
point of  what  follows,  for  if  it  is 
established,  it  means  that  the  pro- 
genitors of  the  Hawaiians  originated 
in  Jerusalem  and  came  first  to  Amer- 
ica as  the  Lehi  colony,  before  mi- 
grating to  the  Islands.  On  this  basis 
any  information  as  to  the  travels  of 
the  Hawaiian  progenitors  may  log- 
ically be  applied  to  the  travels  of 
the  original  Lehi  colony.  With  this 
in  mind  we  shall  review  evidences 
of  Polynesian  origin  and  of  their 
travels. 

Fornander's  Research  on 
Polynesian  Origin 

Judge  Abraham  Fornander  some 
years  ago,  and  with  the  help  of 
well-educated  native  research  assist- 
ants, investigated  the  traditions  and 
folklore  of  the  Polynesian  races  and 
his  discoveries,  which  are  quite  illu- 
minating, were  presented  in  three 
volumes  as :  An  Account  of  the  Poly- 
nesian Race:  Its  Origin  and  Migra- 
tions.9 Certain  pertinent  data  are 
summarized  in  the  following  ex- 
cerpts: 

That  the  reader  may  know  at  a  glance 
the  result  to  which  my  investigations  in  the 
Polynesian  folk-lore,  as  well  as  its  compar- 
ison with  that  of  other  peoples,  have  led 
me,  it  may  be  proper  here  at  the  outset  to 
say  that  I  believe  that  I  can  show  that  the 
Polynesian  family  can  be  traced  directly 
as  having  occupied  the  Asiatic  Archipelago, 
from  Sumatra  to  Timor,  Gilolo,  and  Phil- 
ippines, previous  to  the  occupation  of  that 
archipelago  by  the  present  Malay  family; 
that  traces,  though  faint  and  few,  lead  up 
through  Deccan  to  the  north-west  part  of  In- 
dia and  the  shores  of  the  Persian  Gulf;  that, 
when  other  traces  here  fail,  yet  the  language 
points  farther  north,  to  the  Aryan  stock  in 
its  earlier  days,  long  before  the  Vedic  ir- 

*Alma  63:5-10;  Helaman  3:14. 

^Improvement  Era,  March,  1934.  p.  164;  Nov., 
1935.  p.  672;  Utah  Genealogical  Magazine,  January, 
1933. 

aThese  books  were  published  in  London:  Volume  1, 
Second  Edition  and  Volume  3,  Kegan  Paul,  Trench, 
Trubner  &  Co.,  Ltd.,  1890;  Volume  2,  Trubner  &  Co., 
Ludgate  Hill,   1880. 

27 


THE  IMPROVEMENT  ERA,  JANUARY,  1939 


ruption  in  India;  and  that  for  long  ages  the 
Polynesian  family  was  the  recipient  of  a 
Cushite  civilization,  and  to  such  an  extent 
as  almost  entirely  to  obscure  its  own  con- 
sciousness of  parentage  and  kindred  to  the 
Aryan  stock.7 

How  long  the  Polynesian  family  had 
dwelt  in  the  Asiatic  Archipelago  ere  it  de- 
bouched in  the  Pacific  there  are  now  small 
means  of  knowing,  hardly  of  forming  even 
a  conjecture.  Its  reminiscences  of  that 
period  are  not  many,  and  are  confused  with 
memories  of  older  date  and  of  other  habi- 
tats.8 

The  author  may  have  startled  some  and 
shocked  others  by  seeking  a  Polynesian 
ancestry  beyond  the  Malay  Archipelago; 
but  their  undoubted  folklore,  their  legends, 
and  chants,  gave  no  warrant  for  stopping 
there.  They  spoke  of  continents  and  not  of 
islands,  as  their  birthplace.  They  referred 
to  events  in  the  far  past  which  have  hither- 
to been  considered  as  the  prehistoric  heir- 
looms of  Cushites  and  Semites  alone." 

Referring  to  his  earlier  volume,  he 
says: 

To  recapitulate  in  an  inverse  order  the 
findings  to  which  that  folklore  has  led,  I 
would  briefly  say  that  I  have  found  a 
vague,  almost  obliterated,  consciousness  in 
some  of  their  legends  that  the  head,  and 
front,  and  beginning  of  the  Polynesians 
lay  in  a  white   (the  Arian)    race. 

He  found  they  must  have  come 
into  intimate  contact  with  early 
Cushite,  Chaldeo-Arabian  civiliza- 
tion, also  evidence  of  "amalgama- 
tion" with  the  Davidian  peoples 
south  of  Chaldea  in  India.  Next 
they  occupied  the  Asiatic  Archi- 
pelago from  Sumatra  to  Luzon  and 
Timor.10 

Probably  there  is  no  race  upon  earth 
which,  in  proportion  to  its  numbers,  has 
been  the  subject  of  so  much  interest  and  of 
such  minute  investigation  as  the  Poly- 
nesian. This  is  owing  not  only  to  the  in- 
teresting character  of  the  race,  but  also  to 
the  mystery,  as  yet  unsolved,  which  shrouds 
their  origin,  and  to  their  extreme  isolation. 
The  evidence  both  of  language  and  tra- 
dition points  unmistakably  to  the  East  In- 
dian Archipelago  as  at  least  a  stage  in  their 
eastward  migration."11 

Messrs.  Logan  and  Hodgson  discovered 
remarkable,  and,  as  they  believed,  conclusive 
analogies  between  the  languages  and  cus- 
toms of  the  Bhotiya  races  and  those  of 
South-Eastern  Malaysia  and  Polynesia.  The 
researches  of  our  author,  however,  as  he 
believes,  have  tracked  the  footsteps  of  the 
first  Polynesian  emigrants  still  farther  to 
the  highlands  of  South-Western  Asia,  and 
revealed  the  impress  of  the  ancient  Cushite 
civilization  in  their  religion  and  customs.12 

Summarizing,  Judge  Fornander 
found  evidence  leading  to  the  fol- 
lowing conclusions  concerning  the 
Hawaiian  progenitors: 

1.  They  were  originally  a  white 
race.  2.  They  came  from  the  high- 
lands of  Southwestern  Asia.  3. 
They  had  contact  with  peoples  south 

7Volume  I,  page  2. 
8Volume  I,  page  36. 
"Page  VI  of  the   Preface  to  Volume  II. 
10Volume  II,    page    1. 

nPreface  to  Volume  3.  page  V,  by  Professor  W.  D. 
Alexander  of  Punahow  College,   Honolulu. 
12Preface,    Volume    3,    page    XI. 

28 


of  Chaldea  in  India  ( Northwestern 
India).  4.  They  touched  Deccan 
(India,  south  of  the  Norbada  River 
including  the  southern  tip).  5.  They 
contacted  points  in  the  Asiatic 
Archipelago  bounded  by  Sumatra 
and  Timor  on  the  south  to  Luzon  in 
the  Philippines  on  the  north. 

Judge  Fornander  was  unable  to 
establish  the  time  of  arrival  of  the 
group  at  the  archipelago,  but  gene- 
alogies and  legends  indicate  that  in 
roughly  the  first  or  second  century 
A.  D.  properly  organized  migrations 
of  Polynesians  into  the  Pacific  Ocean 
took  place  from  the  archipelago.  He 
believed  they  went  first  to  the  Fiji 
Islands,  although  he  states  there  ap- 
pears to  be  nothing  to  indicate  that 
some  of  the  migratory  expositions 
may  not  have  pushed  on  to  some  of 
the  eastern,  northern,  or  southern 
groups  of  the  Pacific  now  held  by 
the  Polynesians.  Also  he  claims 
"that  branch  of  the  Polynesian  fam- 
ily from  which  the  oldest  ruling  line 
of  Hawaiian  chiefs  claim  descent  ar- 
rived at  the  Hawaiian  group  during 
the  sixth  century  of  the  Christian 
Era."13 

Judge  Fornander,  in  his  discus- 
sion, raises  a  logical  question  which, 
if  unanswered,  might  interfere  with 
the  acceptance  of  his  theory  of  mi- 
gration involving  the  archipelago  as 
a  stopping  point.  Briefly  it  is  in  sub- 
stance: Why  should  they  have 
pushed  some  thousands  of  miles  into 
the  Pacific  Ocean  before  establish- 
ing themselves  in  new  homes  instead 
of  stopping  at  islands  closer  to  the 
point  of  embarkation?1*  In  answer 
he  suggests  that  they  were  forced  on 

13Volume    2,    page   2. 
14Volume   1,   page  32. 


eastward  by  the  superior  forces  of 
hostile  peoples  they  found  on  the 
islands  in  their  path. 

Correlating  Fornander  Data 

With  Book  of  Mormon 

History 

A  dmitting  that  the  Polynesian  race 
came  from  the  Lehi  colony, 
then,  as  already  pointed  out,  the 
same  basic  travel  history  should  ap- 
ply to  both  peoples.  The  Book  of 
Mormon  history  and  Judge  For- 
nander's  data  coincide,  in  that  orig- 
inally a  white  race  was  involved, 
and  this  race  came  from  or  occupied 
in  their  travel  southwestern  Asia. 
The  points  of  occupancy  in  north- 
western India,  southern  India 
(  Deccan )  and  the  archipelago  men- 
tioned by  Fornander,  coincide  with 
points  mentioned  earlier  in  defining 
the  path  of  existing  ocean  currents. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the 
date  of  departure  from  the  archi- 
pelago, and  therefore  the  approxi- 
mate date  of  arrival  in  the  islands 
constituting  their  new  homes,  about 
the  first  or  second  century,  A.  D., 
is  startlingly  close  to  the  time  in 
which  Hagoth  and  other  ship  build- 
ers already  referred  to  were  reported 
in  the  Nephite  record  as  being  ac- 
tive, and  at  which  the  two  shiploads 
of  people  were  missing  at  sea 
(roughly  55  B.C.).15 

Perhaps  the  Book  of  Mormon 
even  holds  the  answer  to  the  ques- 
tion of  Judge  Fornander  as  to  why 
the  immigrants  pushed  so  far  east- 
ward into  the  Pacific  Ocean  before 
settling     and     establishing     homes. 


35Alma  63:5-10. 


(Concluded  on  page  49) 


FIG.      59.        GENERAL 
SCHEME   OF  THE  CIR- 
CULATION      IN       THE 
PACIFIC  OCEAN. 

(Continuous  lines  rep- 
resent warm  currents  and 
broken  lines  cold  cur- 
rents.) 


'iv^% 


>/n 


'J^tJeFnyteS?  Zi7jjoT<£rlTE "  **<y&j£SS  j 


*  — + 


~qPT~*> 


«r— ,-yr    Q-sJ    3B      33 — -5j.~ ~V      atr— a-„i      iy     «k>  .    yg      gg 


t 


A  CALENDAR 
By  Grace  C.  Jacobsen 

January 

Month  of  snow  and  biting  frost, 
When  ice-bound  streams  lie  still, 
When  over  mountain  hill  and  vale 
Majestic  beauty  to  the  world  is  lost. 

February 

Young  thou  art  and  passing  fair, 
Beneath  thy  lovely  ermine  cloak 
The  earth  is  soft  and  warm 
And  tiny  roots  lie  sleeping  there. 

March 

How  chill  the  winds  that  blow  all  day, 
How  shrill  the  blackbird's  singing 
As   through  the  pussy  willow  fields 
That  saucy  gent  goes  winging, 

April 

Showers  drench  thy  lovely  form, 
Pale  green  thy  costume  rare, 
Eager  buds  burst  forth  anew 
To  greet  the  mild  spring  air. 

May 

Queen  of  all  the  glad  New  Year, 
Blossom  time  and  perfume  sweet, 
Meadow  lark  and  humming  bee 
Return  thy  smiling  face  to  greet. 

June 

Month  of  happy  brides  and  roses, 
Nature  sheds  her  wealth  on  thee, 
Perfect  are  thy  ways  and  gentle 
Like  a  calm  upon  the  sea. 

July 

Pinnacle  of  Summer  time  art  thou, 
Strength  of  all  the  earth  is  thine, 
The  waning  sun  rides  high 
Along  its  course  of  slow  decline. 

August 

Hazy  skies  and  golden  grain  fields 
Proclaim  the  harvest  near, 
All  the  joys  of  summer  time 
Are  gathered  now  in  thee. 

September 

Quiet,  serene,  listening  with  contented  ear 
To  the  music  of  the  cricket's  chirp, 
The  farewell  song  of  departing  birds 
Seeking  new  homes  from  far  and  near. 

October 

Flaming  colors  meet  us  everywhere 
And  falling  leaves  are  crisp; 
Beneath  our  feet  again  to  mingle 
With  the  dust  and  autumn  mist. 

November 

Dull  and  somber  in  her  dress, 
Taking  her  ease  as  seemeth  best 
For  she  is  old  and  longs  for  rest. 

December 

Hearts  turn  to  home  and  loved  ones, 
Holy  peace  is  in  the  air, 
For  the  Christ  Child  lives  among  us 
And  we  feel  His  presence  there. 


SENTINEL 
By  Coursin  Black 


u 


Alone,"  you  say  "on  a  barren  hill,  for- 
saken and   drear  and  gnarled." 

Alone? 

Companied  by  the  mauve  mystery  of  ma- 
jestic mountains, 

The    purple    ranges    stretching    to    unseen 
horizons, 

Silver  in  the  eternal  snows, 

Spectral  in  the  frosty  mist-wraiths  of  dawn, 

Solemn  in  the  unknown  depths  of  night  .  .  . 

Alone? 

Among  the  dream  clouds,  riding  high, 

Or  the  weird,  black-edged  whips  of  storm 

That  mock  the  lazy,  happy  puffs  of  fleece 
.  And  urge  them,  thunder-driven,  out  of  sight: 

Or  the  summer  rain,  pelting  like  fairy  feet, 

Dancing  on  the  somber  slopes  .  .  . 

Alone? 

Who  knows  what  birds  alight  to  whisper 
songs, 

What  creatures  of  the  wild  that  come  to  rest, 

What  elves  and  pixies  join  in  magic  ring? 

Alone? 

With  God? 


CHRIST  SPEAKS 

By   Claire   Stewart  Boyer 

MY  heart  is  rich  with  Christmastide, 
May  I  abide 
A  moment  at  your  hearth,  unseen  and  still? 
May  I  but  fill 

A  moment  with  the  love  that  I  alone 
Give  to  my  own: 
To    spirits   who   have   sought   the    rugged 

heights, 
The  farther  lights, 
That  their  salvation  might  be  wholly  theirs? 

0  grant  me  this  remembrance  in  return — 
Tell  me  you  yearn 

As  I,  in  brotherhood  to  all  mankind, 

That  you  may  find 

The  Way,  the  Light,   the  Word,  to  bring 

them  peace, 
To  bring  release 

To  this,  my  world  of  torn  and  weary  men, 
And  then  .  .  .  O  then 

1  shall  be  king  again! 


■  <» 


FRIENDSHIP 
By  Miranda  Snow  Walton 
"pRiENDSHiP  is  like  a  pine  tree: — in  the 
*■  heat  of  the  summer  of  life  it  affords  a 
sheltering  shade;  in  the  autumn  it  is  a  pro- 
tection against  the  winds  of  adversity,  and 
it  is  the  one  bright  spot  in  life's  winter  of 
desolation. 


TO  A  MUSTANG 
By  A.  Lincoln  Thomson 

Poor  mustang,    grubbing    in    the    beaten 
snow, 
To  find  scant  browse  to  hold  your  bones 

and  hide 
From  falling  limp  when  desert  winds  that 

blow 
Freeze  sunbeams  to  an  icy  glow; 
And  Death  with  spurs  and  whip  waits  by 

your  side 
To  goad  you  on  a  never-ending  ride. 

You  sniff  the  air  for  gentle  winds  that  blow 
The  waterfowl,  which  on  warm  zephyrs  ride 
To  northern   climes,  where  swollen  rivers 

glow 
Like  blood  as  sun  rays  stab  the  snow; 
And  soon  fresh  grass  upon  the  mountain  side 
Shall  weave  new  flesh  beneath  your  scab- 
rous hide. 

And  with  the  spring  your  enemies  shall  ride 
Upon  your  kind,  whose   eyes  with   anger- 
glow, 
As  gory  spurs  are  sunk  into  the  hide, 
And  saddles  gall  each  tender  side; 
For  whips  lash  harder  than  the  winds  that- 

blow, 
And  spurs    cut   deeper    than    the   swirling, 
snow. 

Go  to  the  mountains  while  you  may  and  hide 
From  enemies  that  come  with  melting  snow; 
For  you  shall  be  a  slave  for  men  to  ride — 
A  chattel  with  a  branded  side. 
Mid-summer  winds  that  sear  the  flesh  will 

blow, 
But  they  are  cool  beside  the  iron's  glow. 

A  new-born  colt  shall  nuzzle  at  your  side 
When  birds  fly  north  and  dancing  zephyrs 

blow, 
And  it  will  be  stampeded  in  the  'ride';. 
Go  now  into  the  hills  and  hide! 
Wild  violets  on  the  southern  slopes  now 

glow — 
Their  warming  hue  is  driving  back  the  snow. 

Oh  mustang,  brave  these  bitter  winds  that 

blow. 
Let  Death  with  whip  and  spurs  beside  you. 

ride  .  .  . 
Keep    grubbing    for    a    spear    beneath    the 

snow, 
'Tis  better  than  the  iron's  glow; 
For  when  the  mark  is  seared  into  your  hide 
Your  freedom  ends — you  have  a  branded 

side! 

The  birds  will  ride  soft  winds   that  soon 

shall  blow; 
Fat  days  will  glow  with  ripples  on  your 

hide, 
And   at  your  side   your  colt  will   grub  in 

snow. 

■  m  ■ 

MEDALLIONS  OF  SNOW 

By  Edna  S.   Dustin 

TDoreas  with  chilling  breath 

*-'  Trails  somber  clouds  across  the  sky.. 

Their  heavy  folds  he  gently  clips; 

Then  knits  each  raindrop  passing  by 

Into  a  white  medallion  flake, 

And  joins  them  with  a  silver  chain. 

Then  leaves  the  earth  to  sleep  beneath 

A  white  angora  counterpane. 

29 


"SEEK   NOT   FOR  RICHES7' 


Maestoso  et  espressivo. 


Doctrine  and  Covenants,  Sec,  6;  verse  7- 
mt  a  tempo  cres. 


sempre 


Georfce  H.  Durham. 

Deciso  mt 


ppppj 


4- 


± 


&—&-j-&t^: 


P 


=J_ 


i~ — *>- 

-« H 


r— r 


5^=3= 


H 


r=-r 


-*sc 


Seek  not  for  rich    - 


T 

es, 


2: 


•*-- 


-jg-rt 


g= 


Seek     not  for.     rich   -   es, 


?£-' 


Seek 


at  r«-> 


not    for      rich- 

t5 


«> — »-&*>- 


^ 


-M 


i     I 


/<J 


L.H.JTL    L     |      -p- 
£sp.  m/  few 


■«■    -■&-     — 


S/^    -^TC-iS'- 


BB=B 


-s. _, 


SI 


/. 


i 


3=  2? 


Z± 


£ 


a* 


^ 


JjgJEE=: 


ts>-    -«- 

k        I  I  4— — i 

Fed. 


sosten.  poco  rail,  f  attaca  a  tem.  mf 


ores. 


riten. 


M 


m/ 


cres. 


&sfc 


■4 T^r 


-w- 


1= 


£ 


— i— ^ — Bpf-t— F*- 


,^_^ 


*Ei 


Sfe- 


i^g 


m 


motto  rail. 


^wmmmmm 


es,  But  for  wis    - 

j  — O 1 1 rP- 


!»*e Wis- 
dom. 


-4-1-  I -til 


Poco  lento  espressivo.     ben  sosten.        ten    attaco.  maestoso,  piu  moso 
p  cres.        mp  mf  f  „ v     ff  \     \     f 


Ben  marc.  alto.    And    the  mys  -  ter  -  ies    of        God      shall. 


-Tj— ey — i 1 — r^ 1 — " r*^"* jr*5, 1 1 ' 1 


— t-tlt^fm^ 


121 


&-£ 


-^m 


:|=t 


be    un  -  fold- 

_J -<si-     -st 


s-ta 


-R.H..^. 


Legato. 


J-_ 


poco  cres. 


Poco  lento  espressivo.  molto  espressivo. 


maestoso,  piu  moso. 


<z±>2=&pi=a3=t 


i  ^  i  -■*-  r  l.h.  r  -p- 


rJ- 


xj^Kus^L  ~g — ^~  "«•: 
-C2 — — L — — ^-ts* 


4-4 


!3to 


Molto  rail,  f 


p      rit. 


PP 


I      ,      i- 
dolce 


*- 


\-aSXjt$. K 

— U-Tgi — l-fi)— 1~ 


jS: 


3K 


wm>. 


fly- 


p 


mp        ri<.  e  dim. 


saster  p 


_LSS£ 


s 


^ 


cres. 


m/ 


ff 


cres. 


__r_r 


Hiifc 


jz: 


r=t 


-g-  -«■-  -g- 


±Z 


3^3^: 


*=t 


PS 


"ST 


^^S 


PPP 


*   >   ^ 


"r 


rffm.  e  rail. 


a  tempo    marcato 


<p      r — : — EsEEEEsE — -  P~~^  ~F^~ — B9 — 


~"gj~ 


(2. 


rao/io  ra//. 


a  tempo 


^f 


t=t=s:: 


^J: 


S*= 


g|^ 


mp  mf  cres. 

Then    shall    ye . . . 

!       i  ' " 


poco  allergando  ff 

be        made      rich. 

!?: 


-12-     -SS- 

i9— 


f 

Ye  shall 


be 


-i2-  -12^2-    -fii     * 

i-t— t 


,|g  V 


T 

rich, 


mp    esp. 
Then  shall 

J2.       -OL 

-<S>- — 


rfi'm.  e  ra//. 


Bass    ben  marc. 
a  tem.  marcato    cres. 


a  tem. 


molto 


molto  rail. 


J 


s>-        — 


$=& 


z&. 


..444 

:=gzzii:7g-riri~n+-, 


:i?'^iT-'^'i r-drr. r-r-p-rfit--,*^ 


f 

l+-,e- 


"^^i1    5 


■a-  \ 


dbh 


=t=t 


i 


-fif  :3- 


■w 


■22—2?" 


044 


s 


=*-•-*- 


^-  -fz.  ,  Aj^ -4-4  ^ 

■i r  I hr  — ! — 5^:H — -hr-*" 


g  g' 


r= 


T£j>L$ZL-.J!t 


mFT- 


tsi 


p_ 


T^-«5T 


poco  rif. 


Maestoso. 


sempre 


Dolce    meno  mosso     riten 


molto 


poco  riten 


maestoso       cres.  sempre 


dolce.  poco  meno  mosso.Riten.Attaccosubito.  molto. 


BASED  ON  ONE  OF  THE  MOST  GLORIOUS  PASSAGES  OF  MODERN  SCRIPTURE.  THIS   DISTINCTIVELY  MORMON  ANTHEM   WAS  ORIGINALLY  WRITTEN  BY 

THE  COMPOSER   FOR  THE  L.   D.  S.   MALE  CHORUS  WHICH    HE  CONDUCTS. 


FROM  PLOWBO  Y  TO  PROPHET  AND 
MOTHER  STORIES  FROM  THE 
BOOK  OF  MORMON. 

(William  A.  Morton,  Reprinted, 
Deseret  Book  Company,  1938.     128 
and  134  pages.     $1.25.) 

TWO  former  Church  favorites  for  the 
young  have  been  reprinted  under  one 
cover,  and  are  now  available  in  an  at- 
tractive binding  at  a  reasonable  price.  Both 
lend  themselves  for  reading  by  young  peo- 
ple or  reading  to  young  people.  They 
are  faith-promoting  stories  appealingly  pre- 
sented.— R.  L.  E. 

SAGEBRUSH  LITERATURE 
(John  W.  Saunders,  Deseret  News 
Press,  1938.    342  pages.    $2.50.) 

This  book  informally  treats  miscellaneous 
topics  in  the  homespun  commonsense 
manner  of  the  author.  Typical  chapter 
headings  are:  "Charity  to  Fit  Every  Hu- 
man Fault,"  "Funeral  Extravagance," 
"Mental  Life  and  Health,"  etc.  There  are 
37  such  topics  in  all.  Few  quotations  are 
used;  the  author's  own  words  fill  most  of 
the  book  and  he  allows  himself  many  lati- 
tudes within  the  limits  of  his  title.  This 
book  represents  the  wholesome  thinking  of 
a  man  who  has  seen  much  of  the  growth 
of  the  inland  West. — R.  L.  B. 

BABIES  ARE  HUMAN  BEINGS 
(D.  Anderson  Aldrich,  M.  D.,  and  Mary 
M.  Aldrich,  illustrated,  Macmillan  Com- 
pany, New  York,  1938.    124  pages.  $1.75.) 

Dr.  Anderson  states  that  babies  are  hu- 
man beings  in  a  three-fold  sense:  as 
products  of  their  heritage,  as  dynamic  living 
creatures,  and  as  potential  adults.  This 
book  points  out  the  changes  which  will  occur 
as  babies  grow  older  and  lays  the  founda- 
tion for  happiness  in  helping  make  parental 
adjustments.  Written  delightfully,  this 
book  tells  first  of  all  how  "The  World 
Comes  to  the  Baby,"  how  "The  Baby  Re- 
sponds to  the  World,"  then  it  gets  into  the 
reasons  why  "Babies  Are  Different"  and 
"Among  the  Do's  and  Don'ts." — M.  C.  J. 

ROOTS  IN  THE  SKY 

(Sidney  Meller,  Macmillan  Company, 
New  York,  1938.    759  pages.    $3.00.) 

This  story  of  the  transplanting  of  a  Jewish 
family  from  old  Russia  to  America  and 
their  adjustment  to  the  changed  conditions 
is  significant  reading.  The  book  is  a  well- 
written  nostaligic  on  the  power  of  well- 
seasoned  faith  to  carry  one  successfully  and 
happily  through  life. — M.  C.  J. 

DOCTOR  AT  TIMBERLINE 
(Charles  F.  Gardiner,  M.  D.,  illustrated, 
Caxton  Printers,  Caldwell,  Idaho,  1938.) 

More  than  fifty  years  ago,  Dr.  Gardiner 
left  New  York  to  practise  as  a  young 
physician  among  the  silver  mines  and  the 
cattle  ranges  of  western  Colorado.  The 
experiences  that  he  went  through  began 
with  dentistry,  continued  through  veter- 
inary medicine,  and  ended  in  full-fledged 
doctoring. 

Of  course  the  conditions  of  the  country 
into  which  Dr.  Gardiner  moved  were  par- 
ticularly trying  in  this  early  time,  since 
there  was  little  law  and  much  disorder. 

The  book  in  addition  to  the  information 
which  it  so  fully  imparts  is  fascinatingly 
written. — M.  C.  J. 


YOUTH  TELL  THEIR  STORY 
(Howard  M.  Bell,  Conducted  for  The 
American  Youth  Commission,  American 
Council  of  Education,  Washington,  D.  C, 
1938.    270  pages.    $1.50.) 

FOR  leaders  of  young  people  this  book 
will  prove  invaluable,  analyzing  as  it 
does  what  young  people  are  doing  and 
thinking  and  feeling,  based  on  personal  in- 
terviews with  more  than  13,500  young 
people  between  the  ages  of  16  and  24  in  the 
state  of  Maryland  and  the  result  of  collab- 
oration on  the  part  of  over  60  investigators, 
who  were  given  a  special  course  of  instruc- 
tion. 

The  young  people  interviewed  were 
chosen  from  every  field  where  young  people 
are  found:  on  farms,  in  coal  mines,  in  cities, 
in  dances,  in  churches.  The  application  of 
this  study  is  made  to  the  youth  of  the  United 
States  by  a  careful  checking  of  character- 
istics of  the  Maryland  sample  with  charac- 
teristics of  the  national  youth  population 
as  gained  from  the  Fifteenth  Census  of  the 
United  States   (1930). 

Graphs  and  statistics  dramatically  por- 
tray conditions  in  city  and  far  communities, 
in  professional  laboring  groups,  and  among 
boys  and  girls.  By  defining  the  work  along 
the  lines  of  home,  school,  work,  play,  church, 
and  attitudes,  the  Commission  has  done  a 
commendable  work,  which  should  prove 
illuminating  and  helpful  to  leaders  of  youth. 

— M.  C.  ]. 

WILLIAM  AND  DOROTHY 
(Helen  Ashton,   Macmillan  Company, 
New  York,  1938.    414  pages.    $2.50.) 

Although  a  novel  dealing  with  the  lives 
of  Dorothy  and  William  Wordsworth, 
the  author  tells  us  that  she  could  not  pos- 
sibly have  written  the  book  without  constant 
reference  to  a  biography  written  about 
Dorothy  Wordsworth  or  without  permis- 
sion of  Macmillan  Company  to  quote  and 
paraphrase  freely  from  their  publication  of 
Dorothy  Wordsworth's  journals.  The  con- 
versations are  based  wherever  possible  on 
the  actual  Wordsworth  family  letters.  Into 
the  pages  of  the  novel  walk  other  literary 
figures  of  this  age:  Charles  Lamb  and  his 
sister  Mary,  Samuel  Taylor  Coleridge, 
Robert  Southey,  and  Walter  Scott.  The 
delightful  English  countryside  takes  a  fresh 
vigor  from  Miss  Ashton's  touch. — M.  C.  J. 


Jacket  design  for 

"William  and  Dorothy" 

by  Helen  Ashton 

(Macmillan) 


RIDERS  AT  THE  GATE 

(Joseph  Auslander,  Macmillan  Company, 

New  York,  1938.    83  pages.    $1.75.) 

IN  the  first  half  of  the  book,  this  familiar 
author  pours  vitriol  into  the  aching 
wounds  of  the  world,  trying  thereby  to 
make  thinking  people  rebel  before  the  horse- 
men whom  John  the  Revelator  saw  on  the 
Isle  of  Patmos  ride  us  to  destruction. 

In  the  last  half  of  the  book  the  author 
is  recaptured  by  fancy,  fantasy,  and  his 
sheer  love  of  beauty.  At  times,  however, 
there  is  in  even  his  most  fanciful  tale,  a 
feeling  of  his  knowledge  of  beauty's  futility 
in  dealing  with  conditions  which  prevail. 

— M.  C.  J. 

OLD  HAVEN 

(David  Cornel  DeJong,  Houghton 
Mifflin  Company,  Boston,  1938. 
559  pages.    $2.50.) 

A  Houghton  Mifflin  fellowship  award 
made  possible  the  writing  of  this  book 
by  one  who,  although  born  in  Holland,  is 
now  a  naturalized  American.  That  he 
knows  the  locale  and  the  life  of  the  people 
about  whom  he  writes  is  self-evident  as 
one  reads  into  his  story. 

The  poignancy  of  the  life  lived  in  this 
little  land  of  dikes  and  fisherfolk  and  class 
warfare  is  much  the  same  as  that  of  the  class 
distinction  in  other  lands — M.  C.  /. 

THOSE  FIRST  AFFECTIONS 
(Dorothy  Van  Doren,  Houghton 
Mifflin  Company,  Boston,  1938. 
291  pages.    $2.50.) 

"Cor  parents  who  are  eager  to  learn 
about  the  working  of  youngsters' 
minds,  this  book  dealing  with  the  life 
of  Sarah  Tower  from  the  age  of  6  to 
15  will  prove  to  be  a  veritable  mine  of 
information  as  well  as  being  an  in- 
triguing novel,  for  mothers  and  prob- 
ably fathers  to  read. 

The  author  is  the  wife  of  the  poet, 
Mark  Van  Doren,  who  is  a  name  to  be 
remembered  in  American  letters.  And 
his  wife  is  proving  her  worth  in  her 
own  contributions  to  literature. 

— M.  C.  /. 

YOUR  EVERYDAY  SPEECH 
(William  N.  Brigance,  McGraw- 
Hill  Book  Company,  Inc.,  1937, 
New  York.    230  pages.    $2.50.) 

TThe  common  faults  of  American 
speech  are,  according  to  Dr. 
Brigance:  the  thinness,  the  nasal,  and 
the  muffled  quality,  and  the  sloppiness 
of  our  voices.  The  author  verifies  the 
statement  that  "Those  who  possessed 
good  speech  have  risen  as  a  class  far 
above  those  who  did  not,  until  .  .  . 
I  am  forced  to  admit  that  under  an 
outward  disregard  America  pays 
dividends  for  good  diction." 

Speech  is  so  good  a  tool  that  every 
one  of  us  should  study  the  book,  Your 
Everyday  Speech,  and  apply  it,  both 
in  our  homes  and  in  any  associations,  I 
social  or  religious,  which  we  may  have. 
The  book  is  practical  and  clear  enough 
for  the  untrained  to  use  readily  and 
fruitfully.— M.  C.  /. 

31 


fcdii&aaL 


"01  OnsL  Shod!' 


A  RE  all  men  equal  before  God?     Should  they  be 
equal  before  men?    These  questions  loom  large 
before  mankind  today.     For  answer  we  may  turn 
to  sacred  history. 

Soon  after  the  ascension  of  the  Lord,  the  same 
questions  appeared  in  slightly  different  form  among 
the  former-day  Saints:  Are  all  people  worthy  to 
hear  and  receive  the  Gospel?  Though  the  Lord 
had  commanded  His  disciples  to  preach  the  Gospel 
to  every  kindred,  tongue,  and  people,  the  brethren 
wondered  if  they  had  understood  him  correctly. 
Had  they  not  been  taught  that  the  calling  of  Abra- 
ham and  the  promises  made  to  him  implied  that 
the  greater  blessings  of  the  Lord  were  reserved  for 
the  descendants  of  this  great  patriarch? 

Yet,  they  recalled  also  that  the  Master  had  said 
to  those  who  claimed  privileges  because  of  their 
descent,  that  the  Father  was  able  to  raise  up  chil- 
dren to  Abraham  from  the  stones  under  their  feet. 
This  figure  of  speech  implied  that  Gospel  kinship 
transcends  ties  of  blood.  Finally,  after  earnest 
prayer,  Peter  had  the  great  vision  in  which  he  was 
commanded  to  kill  and  eat  of  "all  manner  of  four- 
footed  beasts  of  the  earth,  and  the  wild  beasts,  and 
creeping  things,  and  fowls  of  the  air,"  whether  or 
not  they  were  common  or  unclean  under  the  Mosaic 
law.  Then  the  matter  became  crystal  clear:  All 
men  were  entitled  to  hear  and  receive  the  Gospel. 
Thenceforth  the  doctrine  of  the  Master  was 
preached  to  all  the  world  as  far  as  the  weary  feet 
of  the  disciples  could  carry  them.  They  knew  that 
before  God  all  were  equal,  therefore  equal  before 
men. 

The  explanation  of  this  doctrine  was  summarized 
in  brief  but  eloquent  words  by  the  Apostle  Paul: 
"God  hath  made  of  one  blood  all  nations  of  men." 
All  are  children  of  God,  hence  all  are  entitled  to 
the  promised  heritage  of  the  sons  and  daughters  of 
the  Father — the  possession  of  the  privileges  and 
blessings  of  the  Gospel.  Wealth,  lea'rning,  rank, 
or  even  race,  are  but  minor  marks  of  a  human  being. 
To  rate  one  child  of  God  as  of  high  and  another 
of  low  degree,  or  to  persecute  our  fellow  men,  is 
contrary  to  the  divine  pedigree  and  right  of  man, 
and  is  sinful  in  the  eyes  of  God. 

The  differentiations  among  men,  acknowledged 
by  God,  rest  wholly  upon  man's  willingness  to  re- 
ceive truth.  He  whose  will  is  bent  towards  truth 
and    righteousness — God's    truth   and   command- 


ments— may  claim  the  higher  blessings  whatever 
his  race  or  place  may  be.  He  whose  will  despises 
truth  and  accepts  evil,  forfeits  the  promised  bless- 
ings. This  is  made  exceedingly  clear  in  Joseph 
Smith's  translation  of  the  Book  of  Abraham,  where 
it  is  declared  that  the  children  of  Abraham,  those 
entitled  to  the  blessings  of  the  Gospel  committed 
to  the  great  Friend  of  God,  are  those  who  do  works 
of  righteousness.  Every  person,  of  any  descent, 
who  accepts  the  Gospel  becomes  an  adopted  mem- 
ber of  the  chosen  people;  while  those  of  the  physical 
blood  of  Abraham,  unless  they  are  faithful,  are 
counted  out  of  the  Gospel  family. 

These  are  thoughts  which  in  these  days  should 
occupy* the  minds  of  men,  if  the  Lord  shall  be 
pleased  with  His  children.  The  common  man,  and 
the  rulers  of  nations  should  keep  in  constant  mem- 
ory that  "God  hath  made  of  one  blood  all  nations 
of  men."—/.  A.  W. 


YOUNG  PEOPLE  GOING  TO  LARGE 

CITIES  FOR  STUDY  OR 

EMPLOYMENT 

Attention  is  again  called  to  the  serious  prob- 
*"*  lems  confronting  young  people  who  leave 
their  homes  for  study  or  employment.  Special 
attention  is  directed  to  the  welfare  of  such  young 
people  who  go  to  large  cities  where  temptations 
and  distractions  are  frequently  disastrous. 

The  counsel  given  by  the  First  Presidency  in  a 
special  message  on  this  subject  last  January  is 
again  urged  for  serious  consideration  of  stake 
and  ward  officers  and  parents. 

When  young  people  go  to  other  communities, 
parents  should  urge  them  to  seek  and  maintain 
contact  with  the  local  Church  organizations  which 
now  are  established  in  all  large  cities  of  the  nation. 
Bishoprics  who  know  of  their  ward  members 
being  in  large  cities  are  urged  to  write  to  the 
bishoprics  or  branch  presidencies  in  those  cities, 
giving  them  the  names  and,  if  possible,  the  ad- 
dresses of  young  people,  asking  them  to  do  what 
they  can  to  encourage  these  young  people  in 
Church  activity  and  regard  for  the  teachings  of 
the  Gospel.  Such  service  may  help  to  avert 
serious  results. 

Special  appeals  have  been  made  by  ward  and 
branch  officers  in  some  of  our  large  cities,  prin- 
cipally New  York,  for  such  information  in  order 
that  they  may  assist  the  young  people  who  come 
to  their  communities,  aiding  them  to  establish  and 
maintain  regular  associations  with  Church  organi- 
zations and  giving  counsel  and  advice  where  de- 
sirable. 

It  is  suggested  that  bishoprics  again  call  this 
matter  to  the  attention  of  parents  and  cooperate  in 
an  effort  to  have  our  young  people  who  are  away 
from  home,  given  every  assistance,  encourage- 
ment, and  safeguard. 

The  Presiding  Bishopric. 


32 


SAN  BERNARDINO  HEARS 
PRESIDENT  GRANT 

At  the  invitation  of  the  City  of  San 
^*  Bernardino  President  Heber  J. 
Grant  was  guest  speaker  Sunday  morn- 
ing, November  20th,  at  city-wide 
church  services  held  in  the  municipal 
auditorium.  Services  culminated  a 
four-day  covered  wagon  celebration 
attended  by  Elder  Richard  R.  Lyman. 

CALIFORNIA  MISSION 
HEADQUARTERS  MOVED 

President  W.  Aird  McDonald  sends 
word  that  the  headquarters  of  the 
California  Mission  have  been  moved 
from  153  West  Adams  to  2067  South 
Hobart  Boulevard,  site  of  the  old 
Spanish-American  Mission  Home  un- 
der President  Pratt.  The  West  Adams 
address  was  first  established  thirty 
years  ago  by  Joseph  E.  Robinson,  and 
had  been  continuously  occupied  until 
the  present  change. 

DR.  F.  J.  PACK,  GEOLOGIST, 
CHURCHMAN,  DIES 

/^\ne  of  Utah's  foremost  educators, 
^^  Dr.  Frederick  James  Pack,  Des- 
eret  Professor  of  Geology  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  Utah  and  member  of  the 
General  Board  of  the  Deseret  Sunday 
School  Union,  died  Friday,  December 
9,  at  the  age  of  63.  He  was  nationally 
known  as  an  authority  on  underground 
water  supply  and  for  his  analysis  of 
earthquakes  in  western  America.  A 
member  of  the  world's  foremost  geo- 
logical societies,  he  was  moreover 
known  for  his  devotion  to  the  Church 
and  especially  for  his  crusading  in  be- 
half of  the  Word  of  Wisdom. 

DEATH  ENDS  CAREER  OF 
Y'  PROFESSOR 

llTpss  Alice  Louise  Reynolds,  pro- 
fessor  of  English  literature  at  Brig- 
ham  Young  University  and  former 
member  of  the  general  board  of  the 
National  Women's  Relief  Society, 
whose  magazine  she  edited  from  1923 
to  1930,  succumbed  December  5  after 
a  brief  illness.  She  was  65  years  old. 
Throughout  her  life  she  had  been  active 
in  state  and  national  women's  organi- 
zations. The  Alice  Louise  Reynolds 
library  at  B.  Y.  U.  was  endowed  and 
named  in  her  honor,  and  21  literary  or- 
ganizations in  the  United  States  are 
known  as  Alice  Louise  Reynolds  clubs. 

Sunday,  November  6,  1938. 

Elder  Albert  E.  Bowen  dedicated  the 
Panguitch  South  Ward  Chapel,  Pan- 
guitch  Stake. 

Elder  Charles  A.  Callis  dedicated  a 
chapel  and  recreation  hall  at  Magrath, 
Taylor  Stake. 


Sunday,  November  13,  1938. 

The  Ogden  Fifth  Ward  Chapel,  Mt. 
Ogden  Stake,  was  dedicated  by  Presi- 
dent Heber  J.  Grant. 

D.  B.  Stewart  was  sustained  as  Bish- 
op of  the  University  Ward,  Ensign 
Stake,  succeeding  Bishop  LeGrande 
Richards. 

Sunday  November  16,  1938. 

President  Heber  J.  Grant  was  the 
guest  at  a  program  in  Nephi  South 
Ward  today.  He  was  praised  for  giv- 
ing to  the  Elders'  quorums  of  Nephi 
3,500  acres  of  land.    He  in  turn  lauded 


the  Elders  for  planting  650  acres  to 
wheat  this  fall,  and  for  raising  16,864 
bushels  of  wheat  on  960  acres  this  year. 

Sunday,  November  20,   1938. 

Wehrli  Pack  was  appointed  as  Bish- 
op of  the  Mount  Olympus  Ward,  Cot- 
tonwood Stake,  succeeding  George  E. 
Coxe. 
Sunday,  November  27,  1938. 

President  Heber  J.  Grant  dedicated 
the  32nd  Ward  Chapel,  Pioneer  Stake. 

The  Saints  of  the  Ogden  22nd  Ward, 
Ogden  Stake,  held  their  first  Sacrament 
meeting  in  their  new  meetinghouse. 

(Continued  on  page  41) 


(UPPER  PHOTO)  MISSIONARIES  LEAVING  FOR  THE  FIELD  FROM  THE  SALT  LAKE  MISSIONARY  HOME 
ARRIVED  NOVEMBER  14,  1938— DEPARTED   NOVEMBER  24,  1938 

Identified  alphabetically:  George  J.  Angerbauer,  Courtney  Brewer,  Joseph  T.  Blake,  Harold  E.  Bushman, 
Robert  H.  Burton,  Glen  R.  Barlow,  Jay  S.  Broadbent,  Sidney  V.  Badger,  Leslie  W.  Beer,  Ferrelt  W.  Bybee. 

Jesse  Z.  Chandler,  Jack  A.  Cherrington,  Samuel  W.  Clark,  Ross  W.  Covington,  Albert  Colclough,  Ray  J. 
Crane,  Virginia  Lee  Divers,  Clayton  S.  DaBell,   Harold  A.  Dalebout,  Roy  M.  Elkins,  Earl  W.  England. 

Lamar  E.  J.  Fairbanks,  Fost  W.  Flake,  Virginia  Freebairn,  Grant  D.  Fridal,  Benjamin  C.  Gertsch,  Norman 
R.  Gulbrandsen,  Riley  U.  Goodfellow,  Burton  R.  Howard,  Richard  V.  Hansen,  Velma  Hill,  Orland  K.  Hamblin, 
Arthur  T.   Hansen,  Glen  L.   Hoffman,  Mirl   B.    Hymas,  Victor   D.    Hatch,   Kathleen    Hamblin. 

Edward  W.  Johnson,  Phil  D.  Jensen,  Sterling  M.  Jensen,  Erick  G.  Johnson,  Dick  L.  Jackson,  Mona  M. 
Keppner,  Mai-ton  L.  Kearl,  Lloyd  E.  Kjar,  Paul  C.  Lyon,  Jr.,  Vern  S.  Lake,  Clarence  M.  Larsen,  Elno  J.  Lunt, 
Clarence   L.    Littlewood. 

Wayne  H.  Mecham,  Maria  Muro,  Winfield  H.  Mackay,  Wilford  B.  Mitchell,  Paul  R.  Men-ell,  Evan  J. 
Overson,  Zella  Putman,  Elmer  L.  Perry,  Carl  0.  Peterson,  Douglas  H.  Pack. 

George  J.  Reeder,  Wayne  A.  Robison,  Beulah  Ricks,  Jessie  A.  Rasmussen,  Miles  W.  Rotnney,  Glen  S. 
Raulings,  Orson  B.  Spencer,  Earl  R.  Sponseller,  Ora  Steed,  Blanche  Swasey,  Lilian  L.  Sessions,  Daniel  L  Smith. 

Dan  N.  Taylor,  Howard  R.  Taylor,  J.  Willmore  Turner,  Ralph  M.  Wilkins,  Myrtle  Wadsworth,  Joseph  A.  West. 

(LOWER  PHOTO)  MISSIONARIES  LEAVING  FOR  THE  FIELD  FROM  THE  SALT  LAKE  MISSIONARY  HOME 
ARRIVED    NOVEMBER   28,    1938— DEPARTED    DECEMBER   S,   1938 

Left  to  right,  first  row:  Barry  Wride,  Arthur  Wheeler,  Russel  W.  Myers,  Donna  Lewis,  Beth  Burt,  Orlene 
Peterson,  Adrienne  Willis,  Carl  Johnson,   Kenneth  Harrison,  Devont  Stowell. 

Second  row:  President  Don  B.  Colton,  Leslie  Reese,  Scott  Thorn,  Erma  Adams,  Eunice  Wood,  Sister  Don 
B.  Colton,  Ervin  L.  Child,  Evan  W.  Chaffin,  William  Luke,   Miles   Harston. 

Third  row:  Colvitt  R.  Tanner,  Max  L.  Camrth,  Lawrence  Murphy,  Pearl  Dudley,  Martha  Geddes,  Don  C. 
Archibald,  George  Jenkins,   Gordon   Wood,   Willis  Cheney,  James   A.  Cope,  Jr. 

Fourth  row:  Eldon  Pace,  Chadwin  Burbidge,  Dale  Young,  Merlin  Miskin,  Barnard  Seegmiller,  Ray  Bennett, 
DeWilton  C.   Parkinson,  Dell  Smith,  Thad  0.  Yost. 

Fifth  row:  Paul  R,  Stoddard,  Norman  L.  Perry,  William  M.  Halls,  Burwell  D.  Hatch,  Douglas  Francis, 
Cyril  B.  Cluff,  Jr.,  Reo  Heaton,  Wayne  R.  McTague,  Carl  T.  Rhoades,  Dee  Sanford. 

Sixth  row:  LaMar  S.  Elison,  Grant  D.  Johnson,  Victor  D.  Hatch,  Berkley  Hall,  Harold  Smith,  Mario 
Robertson,  Leroy  A.  Hill,  Howard  Starr,  Frank  Lyman,  Robert  Graham. 

Seventh  row:  Ralph  Robinson,  Harry  E.  Snow,  Alva  Duvall,  Eugene  B.  Stucki,  Keith  J.  Bult,  Lloyd  Maughan, 
Louis  J.   Heine,  Frank  T.   Eastmond,  Nephi  Pratt,  Alfred  H.  Crofts. 

Eighth  row:  Henry  Jones,  Rulen  E.  Morris,  Edwin  Haroldsen,  Phil  Peterson,  Murry  G.  Robertson,  Charles 
N.  Ackroyd,  Burton  H.  Price,  Collins  E.  Hassell,   Horace  Lloyd,  Class   H.  Henry. 

Ninth  row:  Stephen  A.  Adams,  Ted  Bryner,  Alan  Richman,  Neil  R.  Partridge,  Glen  Sagers,  Donald  S. 
Lyon,  William  E.  Morrell,  Cecil  A.  Cherry. 

Tenth  row:  Martin  Koplin,  Albert  Kingsford,  Arvil  N.  Peterson,  Laurence  Mecham,  Ira  Stevens,  Merrill 
Colton,  Raymond  Young. 

33 


THE  SPICE  OF  THE  MEAL 
By  Mathilda  Baron 

Although  American  housewives  of 
today  have  little  in  common  with 
the  European  women  of  1492, 
one  bond  remains  in  our  dependence 
on  spices  and  we  may  still  appreciate 
the  voyage  which  Columbus  under- 
took in  1492  in  order  to  find  a  short 
route  to  the  spice-growing  countries, 
so  that  the  ladies  of  Europe  could  en- 
joy rare  spices  in  their  culinary  activ- 
ities. 

Choice  Cinnamon  From  Ceylon 

/"^innamon  has  long  been  a  favored 
^  spice.  If  you  are  inclined  to  doubt 
that  statement,  just  look  through  any 
standard  cook  book  and  notice  the 
number  of  recipes  that  call  for  its  use. 
Bread,  buns,  puddings,  cakes,  meats, 
preserves,  and  pickles  are  all  improved 
with  a  dash  of  cinnamon. 


Mustard 


CONDUCTED  BY  MARBA  C.  JOSEPHSON 


SORTING  CINNAMON,  DUTCH  EAST  INDIES 
Courtesy    American    Spice    Trade    Association 

This  subtle  spice  grows  in  many  of 
the  Asiatic  countries,  but  the  choicest 
comes  from  Ceylon.  Most  of  us  are 
familiar  with  it  in  three  forms:  long 
stick  cinnamon,  cracked  cinnamon,  and 
the  ground  or  powdered  form.  Ac- 
tually it  is  the  bark  of  a  tree.  Some  of 
the  bark  is  paper-thin,  and  this  is  the 
choicest,  but  on  other  trees  the  bark 
may  be  a  quarter  of  an  inch  in  thickness 
and  this  latter  is  used  when  full-bodied 
fragrance  and  flavor  are  desired. 

When  the  bundles  of  whole  cinnamon 
arrive  in  this  country  they  are  ground 
in  huge  grinders,  and  the  resulting 
pieces  are  pulverized  until  they  can  be 
sifted  through  a  silk  screen.  Every 
precaution  known  to  the  industry  is 
taken  to  assure  that  the  full  richness, 
aroma,  and  flavor  of  the  spice  is  pre- 
served for  our  delectation.  But,  as 
with  other  spices,  the  spice  aroma  and 
flavor  will  evaporate  if  exposed  to  the 
air,  so  it's  up  to  us  to  see  that  the 
containers  are  kept  tightly  shut  when 
not  in  use. 

34 


HPhree  kinds  of  mustard  preparations 
■*■  are  in  general  use:  Dry  mustard 
is  widely  used  to  rub  into  meats,  and 
it  peps  up  sauces  that  are  served  with 
fish.  Of  course,  everyone  is  familiar 
with  the  prepared  or  wet  mustard  of 
which  there  are  various  brands  on  the 
market.  This  is  used  to  add  zip  to  hot 
dogs,  ham  sandwiches,  and  is  some- 
times used  in  sauces.  The  other  form 
of  mustard  is  mustard  seed,  so  use- 
ful in  pickling. 

The  earliest  use  of  mustard  was 
medicinal.  The  Chinese  and  Arabian 
pharmacists  undoubtedly  used  it,  and  it 
was,  of  course,  known  to  the  Hebrews 
in  Biblical  times.  Today,  mustard  is 
found  growing  in  China,  India,  north- 
ern Africa,  Europe,  and  the  United 
States.  England  and  Holland  are  both 
famous  for  their  mustards — among 
other  things — and  these  two  nations 
produce  greater  amounts  than  the  other 
countries  in  which  it  grows. 

Cloves 

Asa  good  cook  of  course  you've  been 
**"  using  cloves  for  years,  but  you'll 
enjoy  hearing  the  story  of  this  spice. 
In  the  early  days,  cloves  were  really 
scarce  and  hard  to  get.  Cloves  orig- 
inally came  from  Cathay  and  many 
dangers  beset  the  caravans  that  trans- 
ported this  luxury  from  the  Orient.  To- 
day, the  Dutch  East  Indies,  the  British 
possessions  and  Madagascar  are  the 
chief  source  of  supply  of  this  very 
useful  spice. 

A  few  whole  cloves  in  with  stewed 
tomatoes,  with  boiled  beets,  or  even 
with  applesauce  add  a  zest  to  these 
rather  ordinary,  but  necessary,  acces- 
sory dishes.  A  little  powdered  clove 
added  to  your  favorite  chocolate  recipes 
will  give  a  tantalizing  difference  to  the 


flavor,  that  is  at  once  pleasing  and 
"more-ish"  in  its  appeal.  There  are 
so  many  delectable  delicacies  that  may 
be  improved  with  cloves  that  a  list  of 
them  would  be  portentous. 

Nutmegs  and  Mace 

HThe  story  is  told  about  an  English 
importer  who,  in  looking  over  his 
books  one  day,  noticed  that  he  could 
purchase  all  the  nutmeg  that  he  want- 
ed, but  that  mace,  on  the  other  hand, 
was  extremely  difficult  to  obtain  and 
very  expensive.  He  wrote  the  plan- 
tation owners  in  the  Far  East  whence 
he  imported  his  nutmeg  and  suggested 
to  them  that  they  cut  down  some  of 
their  nutmeg  trees  and  plant  mace  in- 
stead. Imagine  his  surprise  on  receipt 
of  their  reply  that  nutmeg  and  mace 
both  come  from  the  same  tree! 

It's  quite  likely  that  you  are  as  sur- 
prised as  the  English  merchant  to  learn 
that  these  two  spices  are  the  product 
of  the  same  tree,  particularly  as  they 
look  so  different  when  in  their  whole 
form,  and  when  powdered  there  is  also 
a  considerable  difference  in  both  aroma 
and  appearance.  The  nutmeg  tree  has 
the  distinction  of  being  the  only  one 
which  gives  us  two  separate  and  dis- 
tinct spices.  The  dictionary  will  give 
us  the  definitions  of  these  two  spices, 
so  we  will  just  confine  our  remarks  to 
their  culinary  application. 

Mace  may  be  used  either  whole  or 
in  powdered  form,  but  American  wom- 
en don't  use  mace  very  much.  Just 
drop  one  or  two  mace  blades  into  some 
soup  or  stew,  or,  better  yet,  try  the 
same  experiment  just  dropping  them 
into  the  water  in  which  you  boil  your 

CRACKING   NUTMEGS  AT  GRENADA 
Courtesy    American    Spice    Trade    Association. 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


next  fish  dinner.  For  that  last  sugges- 
tion you  might  also  add  a  small  onion, 
a  little  celery  salt,  and  a  bayleaf .  Even 
the  most  tasteless  of  fish  would  not  then 
need  a  savory  sauce.  Powdered  mace, 
too,  is  tasty  just  sprinkled  on  broiled 
fish.  It's  a  wonderful  seasoning  in  that 
form  when  used  in  bread  stuffings  for 
poultry,  veal,  or  beef  roulades.  It 
should  be  added  to  stuffings  at  the  rate 
of  one-half  to  one  teaspoonful  to  every 
half-pound  of  stuffing,  according  to 
your  preference. 

Nutmeg  is  one  of  the  most  fragrant 
of  the  spices.  Sprinkle  a  little  over  a 
cauliflower.  Add  a  pinch  of  it  to  a  cream 
sauce  intended  for  the  cauliflower.  Sift 
a  little  into  spinach,  and  even  Popeye, 
that  spinach  lover,  would  find  a  new 
zest  in  eating  it.  Stir  a  pinch  in  with 
some  melted  butter  and  serve  it  over 
lima  beans.  Some  of  the  creamed 
soups  as,  mushroom  or  asparagus,  are 
improved  with  a  dash  of  ground  nut- 
meg. 

When  one  stops  to  consider  all  the 
spices,  the  herb  spices,  the  blended 
spices,  and  the  herb  salts  that  are  avail- 
able, one  wonders  why  more  delectable 
dishes  are  not  served  in  our  homes.  Is 
it  that  we  are  lacking  in  culinary  ar- 
tistry, inventive  genius,  or  imagination? 
Let  us  do  some  personal  experimenta- 
tion and  see  if  we  can't  pep  up  some 
of  the  dishes  which  have  become  so  fa- 
miliar as  to  be  almost  distasteful,  and 
which  we  neither  enjoy  cooking,  serv- 
ing, or  eating.  A  can  of  paprika  will 
help  to  brighten  many  a  sad  looking 
•dish  and  give  us  an  appetite  to  tackle 
it,  and  a  savory  meal  is  one  which 
pleases  our  olfactory  senses,  delights 
our  eyes,  and  satisfies  our  gastronomic 
appreciation. 


When  the  children  are  home  from 
school  with  so  much  candy  and 
nuts  around,  the  problem  of  what 
to  eat  becomes  doubly  difficult. 
Here's  one  recipe  that  will  bring 
them  to  the  luncheon  table  with 
mouths  watering — and  it  will  be  a 
hard  thing  to  get  them  to  leave  the 
table,  too: 

WAFFLES   AND  DRIED  BEEF 


V2  c.  butter. 
V4  lb.  dried  beef. 
1  quart  milk. 
6  tb.  Globe  "Al" 

Waffles. 


flour. 


Melt  butter  in  saucepan,  add 
dried  beef  cut  into  small  pieces  and 
frizzle  in  the  butter  a  few  minutes; 
add  flour  and  mix  thoroughly.  Slow- 
ly add  milk  and  cook  until  thick, 
stirring  constantly.  For  the  waffles, 
use  Globe  "Al"  Pancake  and  Waf- 
fle Flour,  following  the  recipe  on 
the  package.  Serve  the  creamed 
dried  beef  on  the  hot  waffles. 

This  will  be  a  welcome  relief  from 
the  sweets  of  the  Yule  season. 


NO  MORE  SKIMPY 
BREAKFASTS 

at  OUR  house! 


...when  THREE 
PANCAKES  cost 
ONLY  A  PENNY! 


What  a  difference  a  good,  sub- 
stantial PANCAKE  breakfast 
makes  in  the  day's  work!  Folks 
have  more  energy  and  pep  these 
cold  mornings  when  they  eat 
nourishing  breakfasts  of  Globe 
"Al"  pancakes,  served  with 
ham,  bacon  or  sausage  for  va- 
riety. Serve  a  pancake  break- 
fast tomorrow — buy  a  package 
of  Globe  "Al"  Pancake  and 
Waffle  Flour.  It  contains  lots 
of  good,  old-fashioned  butter- 
milk for  extra  flavor. 


PAtfAKE 

WAFFLE 


*4DE 


BUTTER 


ECONOMICAL! 

■ — makes  three  pancakes  for 
a  penny. 

QUICK! 

— just  add  liquid. 

DEPENDABLE! 

— the  ingredients  are  always 
the  same,  always  perfectly 
mixed. 


GLOBE  "AT" 

PANCAKE  AND  WAFFLE  FLOUR 


35 


CONDUCTED  BY  THE  MELCHIZEDEK  PRIESTHOOD  COMMITTEE  OF  THE  COUNCIL  OF  THE  TWELVE — 
JOSEPH  FIELDING  SMITH,  CHAIRMAN;  MELVIN  J.  BALLARD,  JOHN  A.  WIDTSOE,  AND  JOSEPH  F.  MERRILL 


THE  PRIESTHOOD  STUDY  COURSE  IS  READY 


Priesthood  and  Church  Welfare, 
the  Priesthood  Course  o£  Study  for 
1939,  more  fully  described  in  the  No- 
vember, 1938,  issue  of  The  Improve- 
ment Eva,  is  now  ready  for  delivery. 
This  attractive  and  useful  cloth- 
bound  book  of  300  pages  is  priced 
the  same  as  last  year's  study  course, 
$1.25  for  single  volumes,  or  $1.00  a 
volume  when  ordered  in  groups  of  six 
or  more.   Send  money  and  orders  to  the 


Deseret  Book  Company,  Salt  Lake  City. 

Every  member  of  the  Priesthood  will 
want  one  of  these  books — not  only  for 
the  year's  Priesthood  study,  but  for  per- 
manent library  reference  and  reading. 

Outline  helps  and  supplementary  his- 
torical readings  to  assist  quorum  mem- 
bers and  class  leaders  in  the  con- 
sideration of  this  material  are  printed 
here  for  the  first  month's  lesson.  ( See 
pages  37  and  38. ) 


WHAT  ARE  YOUR  NEW  YEAR  RESOLUTIONS? 


r**  ood  resolves  are  commonly  made 
^  on  the  coming  of  a  New  Year. 
While  reforms  are  in  order  any  time, 
there  is  no  better  time  for  them  to  com- 
mence than  at  the  beginning  of  a  New 
Year.  This  certainly  is  true  of  all  re- 
forms associated  with  Priesthood  ac- 
tivities. Further,  there  are  no  kind 
of  activities  in  the  Church  having 
greater  opportunities  for  reform.  While 
improvements  in  these  activities  during 
1938  were,  on  the  whole,  very  com- 
mendable, perfection  is  yet  only  an  ideal 
— a  long  way  off.  It  can  be  brought 
much  nearer. 

Among  other  things  this  is  prac- 
ticable by  doing  the  following: 

1.  The  keeping  of  complete  records 
by  every  quorum — a  record  of  all  those 
items  needed  to  fill  the  Quarterly  Re- 
port forms. 

2.  The  prompt  sending  by  the  offi- 
cers of  every  quorum  of  two  copies  of 
its  Quarterly  Report  to  the  stake  Mel- 
chizedek  Priesthood  committee. 

3.  The  holding  of  monthly  quorum 
meeting  by  every  quorum  that  covers 
two  or  more  wards.  This  applies  to 
all  High  Priests'  quorums,  most  quo- 
rums of  Seventy  and  many  quorums  of 
Elders.  The  regular  weekly  meetings 
of  quorums  that  are  wholly  within  a 
ward  are  quorum  meetings;  for  others, 
they  are  only  group  meetings  of  quo- 
rums. A  suggested  "Program  for 
Monthly  Quorum  Meetings"  of  all 
quorums  that  meet  weekly  as  groups 
may  be  found  in  The  Improvement  Eva 
for  the  month  of  December,  1937,  page 
769.  It  will  be  noted  that  this  program 
is  of  a  form  that  permits  it  to  be  used 
month  after  month  without  becoming 
stale. 

4.  Keeping  the  quorums  fully  organ- 
ized. This  includes  the  four  standing 
committees  as  well  as  the  officers. 

5.  Carrying  forward  several  projects 
by  every  quorum.  Among  the  required 
projects  are :  securing  increased  activity 
on  the  part  of  members,  the  Anti-Li- 
36 


quor-Tobacco  project,  and  one  or  more 
Welfare  projects. 

6.  Regular  attendance  by  all  officers, 
class  leaders,  and  others  as  needed, 
at  the  monthly  union  meeting  with  the 
stake  Melchizedek  Priesthood  com- 
mittee. 

The  numbered  items  here  given  indi- 
cate things  in  which  every  quorum  may 
improve  upon  its  1938  record.  Life  is 
characterized  by  progression  or  retro- 
gression; there  is  no  standing  still  of 
an  object  that  is  alive.  Retrogression 
is  hardly  tolerable  in  Priesthood  work, 
so  the  officers  of  every  quorum  are 
faced  with  a  challenge. 


ANTI-LIQUOR-TOBACCO 
COLUMN 


WHAT  IS  THE  ANSWER? 

'T'he    Anti  -  Liquor  -  Tobacco    Cam- 
paign  has  at  last  gotten  well  under 
way  in  most  of  the  stakes. 

1.  How  is  it  faring  in  your  stake? 
In  your  ward?  Are  the  suggested  com- 
mittees organized  and  actively  work- 
ing? 

2.  Has  the  first  shipment  of  the  book- 
let Alcohol  Talks  to  Youth  been  com- 
pletely distributed?  Have  you  kept  a 
record  of  who  received  these  booklets? 

3.  Have  the  booklets  sent  to  your 
stake,  Nicotine  on  the  Aiv  and  The 
Wovd  of  Wisdom  in  Pvactical  Terms, 
all  been  distributed? 

4.  In  your  stake  and  ward  do  you 
plan  to  get  at  least  one  copy  of  each 
of  these  booklets  into  every  Mormon 
home? 

5.  Do  you  plan  to  induce  every  mem- 
ber in  the  family  who  can  read  to  learn 
the  contents  of  these  booklets? 

6.  To  make  an  affirmative  answer 
to  4  and  5  how  many  additional  copies 
of  each  booklet  will  you  need  in  your 
stake?  How  soon  do  you  propose  to 
order  them? 


7.  Do  you  know  that  orders  for  ad- 
ditional copies  should  be  addressed  to 

The  General  Campaign  Committee, 
47  East  South  Temple  St., 
Salt  Lake  City,  Utah. 

8.  Do  your  committees  plan  to  learn 
the  reaction  to  each  booklet  of  those 
who  read  it?  This  will  generally  re- 
quire that  each  person  shall  be  con- 
tacted at  least  twice — once  to  deliver 
the  booklet  and  then  to  learn  the  result. 

9.  In  the  approved  plan  of  campaign 
do  you  know  that  each  Priesthood 
quorum — Melchizedek  and  Aaronic — 
should  carry  on  this  work  among  its 
own  members? 

10.  Do  you  know  that  it  is  planned 
to  make  this  campaign  thorough  and 
complete  as  above  indicated?  Are  you 
willing  to  do  your  part  by  reading  the 
booklets,  inducing  others  to  do  so  and 
helping  in  every  way  that  you  may  be 
asked? 

Yes,  you  would  prefer  to  be  free 
from  the  use  of  liquor  and  tobacco,  and 
to  have  every  member  of  your  family 
free.  Hence  join  in  this  great  Church- 
wide  campaign  and  your  wishes  can 
become  a  reality.  (See  also  President 
Grant's  message  on  page  7.) 


QUORUM  PROJECTS 


WHAT  IS  YOUR  QUORUM 
DOING? 

Alberta  Stake, 

1st  Quorum  o/  Elders 

'T'he  interior  of  the  ward  chapel  and 
classrooms  was  painted  and  kal- 
somined.  Over  1,000  man-hours  were 
devoted  to  this  project  by  the  quorum 
members  under  the  direction  of  the 
personal  welfare  and  miscellaneous 
committees. 

Bannock,  Bear  Lake  Stakes 

The  quorums  of  High  Priests,  Sev- 
enties, and  Elders  in  both  these  stakes 
made  their  major  contributions  for  the 
year  just  ended  in  the  form  of  wheat. 
Pledges  amounting  to  scores  of  acres 
and  hundreds  of  bushels  on  the  part  of 
individual  quorums  were  faithfully 
kept.  Reports  from  the  second  quar- 
ter indicated  that  prospects  were  good 
and  in  many  cases  inactive  members 
were  being  drawn  into  participation. 

Bonneville  Stake 
33rd  Ward  Elders 

We  are  keeping  one  missionary  in 
the  field.  We  have  renovated  two 
widows'  homes.  We  have  faithfully 
completed  one-third  of  the  block- 
teaching  in  the  ward. 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


WHAT  ONE  QUORUM  DID 

\kjE  publish  the  following  letter 
"*  knowing  that  other  Priesthood 
quorum  officers  will  be  pleased  to  learn 
the  methods  used  by  the  High  Priests' 
quorum  of  Ogden  Stake  to  make  its 
efforts  highly  successful.  "What  man 
has  done  man  may  do."  The  achieve- 
ments of  others  always  stimulate  and 
guide  us  in  our  own  efforts. 

Dear    Brother:  November  14,  1938. 

The  Quarterly  Conference  of  the  stake 
will  be  held  next  Sunday  with  a  special 
meeting  of  the  Priesthood  Saturday  eve- 
ning. The  conference  system  of  the  Church 
is  marvelous  and  most  unique.  Its  value 
cannot  be  estimated.  We  are  all  stirred  up 
to  our  highest  point  of  efficiency  in  an 
effort  to  reach  an  ideal,  and  thereby  we 
set  a  standard  for  the  future. 

As  your  leaders,  we  desire  every  mem- 
ber of  this  quorum  on  hand  at  the  4th  Ward 
Chapel  at  20  minutes  after  7  o'clock  Satur- 
day evening.  You  will  be  given  a  slip 
with  your  name  and  ward  on  it.  Drop 
this  slip  into  the  basket  at  the  door  to 
register  your  attendance.  We  are  sure  that 
every  effort  put  forth  to  attend  will  be 
rewarded    ten    fold.     Come    Sunday   also. 

We  are  all  justly  proud  that  every 
member  of  this  quorum  was  a  tithepayer 
in  1935,  1936,  and  1937,  and  we  feel  sure 
this  will  be  done  again  as  only  a  com- 
paratively few  have  yet  to  respond  for  this 
year. 

At  the  quorum  meeting  in  December  last, 
it  was  agreed  by  unanimous  vote  that  every 
one  of  us  would  do  his  best  to  abstain  from 
the  use  of  liquor  and  tobacco.  For  some 
this  has  required  an  effort,  and  for  a  few 
it  means  a  struggle — a  supreme  struggle, 
but  we  do  not  hesitate  to  assure  you  that 
the  greater  the  struggle  the  sweeter  the  joy 
of  overcoming. 

Besides,  permit  us  to  remind  you  in  all 
humility,  that  you  are  a  member  of  a  quo- 
rum in  the  Holy  Priesthood — a  wonderful 
quorum  of  461  wonderful  men,  men  of 
achievement,  men  of  responsibility  and  des- 
tiny, every  one  of  them.  That's  saying  a 
lot,  and  maybe  you  will  be  asking  your- 
self, "Do  I  measure  up?"  Possibly  you 
are  the  only  one  who  can  answer.  Are  you 
rising  to  your  highest  possibilities  in  the 
wonderful  ooportunities  the  Church  has  put 
in  your  way?  Are  you  applying  yourself 
to  the  best  of  your  ability  to  your  task, 
humble  though  it  may  appear  to  you,  and 
possibly  insignificant  at  times?  And  surely, 
we  are  all  living  up  to  the  best  we  know 
every  day,  every  hour,  in  thought  and  in 
our  daily  conversations,  for  little  do  we 
realize  at  what  moment  the  entire  group 
is  being  judged  by  our  lives,  or  even  by 
a   single  act. 

If  you  are — if  you  are  giving  the  best 
you  have,  you  measure  up  100%  with  the 
strongest  among  us.  We  honor  you.  We 
appreciate  you.  Do  the  best  you  can,  Dear 
Brother,  under  the  circumstances  in  which 
you  find  yourself,  and  as  your  humble 
servants  in  the  presidency,  we  feel  in  our 
hearts  to  say,  God  bless  you  and  make  you 
equal  to  your  great  responsibility,  and  may 
He  bless  and  sustain  you  in  your  struggles 
no  matter  what  they  may  be  or  how  little 
others  may  understand,  and  may  the  spirit 
of  love  and  peace  abide  with  you  in  your 
home  and  attend  you  in  all  your  labors,  is 
our  desire  and  our  prayer  for  you. 
Your   brethren, 

Frederick  Barker, 
Albert  W.   Bell, 
W.   R.    McEntire, 
Presidency,  High  Priests'  Quorum 
The  Ogden  Stake  of  Zion. 


PRIESTHOOD  AND  CHURCH  WELFARE 

(See  also  Historical  Readings  and  Supplementary  References  on  next  page) 


LESSON  I 

The  Beginnings  of  the  Plan  (Chap.  1 ) 

I.  Provision  for  care  of  needy  has  been  in 
the  Church  in  principle  and  practice 
from  the  very  first. 

a.  The  word  of  the  Lord. 

b.  During  the  Missouri  and  Illinois 
periods. 

c.  Pioneer  institutions. 

d.  The  increasing   complexity  of  life. 

e.  New  methods,  old  principles. 

II.  The  1935  relief  survey  revealed  a 
startling  condition  in  the  Church. 

III.  A     challenging     situation — something 
must  be  done  to  meet  it. 

a.  Experimental  plans  in  wards  and 
stakes. 

b.  The  Church  Welfare  Plan  an- 
nounced April,    1936. 

c.  A  call  to  every  member  to  set  an 
example  in  self-reliance,  initiative 
and  independence.  (See  Historical 
Readings,  references  Nos.  1,  2  at 
end  of  outline.) 

IV.  The  purpose  of  the  Church  to  develop 
work  and  welfare  for  every  member. 

a.  Immediate  objective  to  care  for  ma- 
terial wants  of  the  needy. 

b.  Ultimate  objective  to  help  the  peo- 
ple help  themselves.  (See  Historical 
Readings,  references  Nos.  3.  4.  5.) 

c.  Through  economic  security  to  spir- 
itual rehabilitation.  (See  Historical 
Readings,  references  Nos.  6,  7.) 

V.  Guiding  principles. 

a.  Fast  offerings  to  be  increased  to  one 
dollar  per  member  per  year. 

b.  Tithing  to  be  paid  in  full,  in  cash 
or  in  kind. 

c.  The  Ward  Teachers  and  the  Re- 
lief Society  to  seek  out  the  needy. 

d.  Interchange  of  surplus  cash  or 
goods  between  wards  and  stakes. 

VI.  The  inspiration  for  the  plan. 

a.  A  system  founded  upon  the  wisdom 
of  God. 

b.  The  expression  of  a  philosophy  as 
old  as  the  Church  itself.  (See  His- 
torical Readings,  reference  No.  8.) 

VII.  The  plan  uses  the  present  Church  or- 
ganization. 

a.  The  responsibility  with  the  Priest- 
hood officers  and  quorums. 

b.  The  plan  an  enlargement  of  the 
Personal  Welfare  Committee's 
work. 

c.  The  facilities  and  experience  of  the 
Relief  Society  can  cope  with  the 
relief  phase  of  the  problem. 

VIII.  Reactions   and  attitudes. 

a.  Of  the  Church  membership — whole- 
hearted cooperation  and  shouldering 
of  individual  responsibility. 

b.  Of  the  world  at  large — -admiration 
of  the  "new  pioneering  spirit."  (See 
reference  No.  9.  See  also  questions 
at  end  of  chapter.) 

LESSON  II 

Objectives  of  the  Welfare  Plan 
(Chap.  2) 

I.  Spiritual  safeguards. 

a.  Relief  not  to  be  given  as  charity. 

b.  Relief  given  for  work  or  services 
will  preserve  feeling  of  equality  and 
independence.  (See  Historical 
Readings,  reference  No.  10.) 


II.  Work  and  industry  the  basis  of  eco- 
nomic safety. 

a.  All  we  have  is  the  product  of  hu- 
man labor. 

b.  Productive  labor  should  be  the  de- 
sire of  all.  (See  Historical  Readings, 
reference  No.  11.) 

c.  Thrift  a  companion  principle  to 
work. 

d.  Individual  faith  essential  to  a  com- 
munity of  effort. 

III.  Where  does  the  responsibility  lie? 

a.  First  responsibility  with  the  indi- 
vidual. (See  Historical  Readings, 
reference  No.  12.) 

b.  The  charge  of  the  family. 

c.  The  immediate  community. 

d.  The  state,  as  the  last  resort. 

IV.  Immediate  objectives. 

a.  Relief  for  the  unemployed. 

b.  Work  for  the  jobless  through 
Church  agencies. 

c.  Progressive  improvement  of  exist- 
ing   conditions. 

d.  Encouragement  of  private  and  co- 
operative enterprise. 

LESSON  III 

Organization  of  the  Welfare  Plan 
(Chap.  3.) 

I.  The  Welfare  Plan  a  program  of  ac- 
tivity for  the  Priesthood. 

II.  Consideration     of     the     organization 
chart. 

III.  The  Priesthood  needs  the  cooperation 
of  all  auxiliaries. 

a.  The  Relief  Society  already  trained 
for  special  service. 

b.  Facilities  and  power  of  Primary  and 
M.  I.  A.  in  leisure-time  guidance. 

c.  Unity  of  faith  and  worship  to  be 
accomplished  through  religious  edu- 
cation in  Sunday  School. 

d.  Spiritual  objectives  to  be  realized 
by  Department  of  Education. 

e.  Welfare  can  increase  only  as  spir- 
itual meaning  of  the  plan  compre- 
hended by  the  Church  membership. 

IV.  Ward  committee  the  hub  about  which 
the  whole  program  revolves. 

a.  Committee  membership. 

b.  Meetings. 

c.  Duties. 

V.  The  Stake  Committee  an  aid  to  the 
stake  Priesthood. 

a.  Surveys,  reports,  policies. 

b.  Quorum  responsibility  in  adminis- 
tering relief. 

VI.  The  grouping  of  stakes  into  regions. 

a.  Educational  advantages. 

b.  Administrative  advantages. 

c.  Distributional  advantages. 

VII.  The  General  Committee. 

a.  The  aid  of  the  First  Presidency. 

b.  Church-wide  coordinator  of  Priest- 
hood activities. 

VIII.  Centralized  direction  without  sacrifice 
of  stake,  ward,  or  quorum  initiative. 

IX.  The  wider  program. 

a.  The  immediate  objectives  a  means 
to  an  end. 

b.  Full  development  and  protection  of 
the  individual. 

c.  A  vision  of  social  reform. 

d.  For  all  men — ultimate  benefits  to 
the  community  at  large. 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


HISTORICAL  READINGS 


SUPPLEMENTARY  REFER- 
ENCES FOR  PRIESTHOOD 
AND  CHURCH  WELFARE 
LESSONS 

(See  Lesson  outlines  for 
suggested  use ) 

1.  I  know  it  is  the  will  of  God  that 
we  should  sustain  ourselves,  for  if  we 
do  not,  we  must  perish,  so  far  as  re- 
ceiving aid  from  any  quarter,  except 
God  and  ourselves.  (Brigham  Young, 
Journal  of  Discourses,  11:139.) 

2.  The  service  motive  in  a  Christian 
community  must  include  industry.  The 
Church  should  have  for  its  goal  a  time 
when  pride  in  workmanship  and  loyalty 
in  service  will  be  the  motives  animating 
industry  and  when  all  work  will  be  so 
organized  that  these  motives  may  be 
possible  for  all  workers.  (Dr.  John 
M.  Versteeg.) 

3.  This  is  true  charity  and  should  en- 
gage the  efforts  of  every  philanthropist, 
not  only  to  feed  the  hungry  and  clothe 
the  naked,  but  to  place  them  in  a  situ- 
ation where  they  can  produce,  by  their 
own  labor,  their  subsistence.  (Mill. 
Star  18:51,  from  the  Thirteenth  Gen- 
eral Epistle  of  the  First  Presidency, 
Oct.  29,  1855.) 

4.  Bishops,  we  have  a  word  of  coun- 
sel to  you.  You  are  the  fathers  of  the 
poor,  and  stewards  in  Israel.  Lend 
your  efficient  aid  in  collecting  together 
the  tithing  and  consecrations  of  the 
Saints;  and  see  that  all  is  preserved  and 
taken  care  of,  and  faithfully  deposited 
in  the  storehouse  of  the  Lord,  and  not 
diverted  from  its  legitimate  use.  True 
charity  to  a  poor  family  or  person  con- 
sists in  placing  them  in  a  situation  in 
which  they  can  support  themselves. 
In  this  country  there  is  no  person  pos- 
sessing an  ordinary  degree  of  health 
and  strength,  but  can  earn  a  support 
for  himself  and  family.  (Mill.  Star 
16:421,  from  the  Eleventh  General 
Epistle  of  the  First  Presidency.) 

5.  I  am  satisfied  that  the  mechanical 
ability  of  the  people  of  this  Territory 
will  rank  with  that  of  any  other  people, 
but  there  is  not  one  in  five  hundred 
that  knows  how  to  husband  his  ability 
and  economize  his  labor  when  he  first 
comes  to  this  new  country.  They  are 
for  a  time  like  a  feather  in  the  wind, 
until  some  circumstance  occurs  to  set- 
tle them  in  some  position  where  they 
can  begin  to  do  something  to  provide 
for  themselves.  (Brigham  Young, 
Journal  of  Discourses,  10:20.) 

6.  We  pick  up  the  beggar  in  the 
street  in  England— and  we  have  bap- 
tized hundreds  of  them — we  bring  him 
here  and  put  him  in  a  situation  to  earn 
his  living.  They  never  owned  any- 
thing before,  but  after  they  come  here 
they  soon  begin  to  own  a  pig,  a  cow, 
a  few  chickens,  and  bye-and-bye  a 
team;  then  open  farms  and  soon  become 

38 


men  of  wealth.  It  is  our  business  to 
elevate  the  beggar  and  not  keep  him 
in  ignorance.  (Brigham  Young,  Jour- 
nal of  Discourses,  10:190.) 

7.  We  have  gathered  thousands  from 
many  nations.  By  the  aid  of  the  Al- 
mighty we  have  raised  them  out  of 
penury  and  miserable  dependence  and 
have  taught  them  how  to  become 
wealthy  in  possession,  useful  to  them- 
selves and  their  neighbors,  good  citi- 
zens, and,  I  trust,  faithful  Saints. 
( Brigham  Young,  Journal  of  Discourses, 
12:195.) 

8.  The  present  system  of  Church 
security  and  welfare  is  not  a  new  and 
revolutionary  plan.  It  is  simply  a 
modern  attempt  to  practice  the  cooper- 
ative principles  which  the  pioneers  de- 
veloped. The  present  plan  is  but  a 
re-dedication  to  the  social  customs 
upon  which  the  commonwealth  of  Des- 
eret  was  founded.  The  success  of  the 
present  movement  is  due  to  the  char- 
acteristic organization  of  the  Church 
and  the  rich  background  in  social  and 
economic  training  which  has  been  be- 
queathed to  us.     (E.  Cecil  McGavin. ) 

9.  The  leader  of  a  company  of  gold 
seekers  wrote:  "The  Mormons  are 
not  dead,  nor  is  their  spirit  broken. 
And  if  I  mistake  not,  there  is  a  noble, 
daring,  stern  democratic  spirit  dwell- 
ing in  their  bosoms,  which  will  people 
these  mountains  with  a  race  of  inde- 
pendent men  and  influence  the  destiny 
of  our  country  and  the  world  for  a 
hundred  years."  (Journal  History, 
July  8,  1849.) 

10.  The  dignity  of  labor  is  held  sa- 
cred by  the  Mormons.  ...  A  lazy  per- 
son is  either  accursed  or  likely  to  be; 
usefulness  is  their  motto,  and  those  who 
will  not  keep  themselves  or  try  their 
best  are  left  to  starve  into  industry.  .  . 
This   is  included  in  their   creed.  .  .  . 


The  president  sets  the  example  in  the 
valley  by  working  at  his  trade  of  car- 
penter. .  .  .  The  labor  for  support  of 
oneself  and  family  is  taught  to  be  as 
divine  a  character  as  public  worship 
and  prayer.  (Gunnison,  The  History 
of  the  Mormons,  141-2.) 

1 1 .  I  am  going  to  preach  you  a  short 
sermon  concerning  our  temporal  duties. 
My  sermon  is  to  the  poor,  and  to  those 
who  are  not  poor.  As  a  people,  we 
are  not  poor;  and  we  wish  to  say  to 
the  bishops,  not  only  in  this  city,  but 
through  the  country,  "Bishops,  take  care 
of  your  poor."  The  poor  in  this  city 
do  not  number  a  great  many.  I  think 
there  are  a  few  over  seventy  who  draw 
sustenance  from  the  General  Tithing 
Office.  They  come  to  the  Tithing  Of- 
fice, or  somebody  comes  for  them,  to 
draw  their  sustenance.  If  some  of  our 
clever  arithmeticians  will  sit  down  and 
make  a  calculation  of  the  hours  lost  in 
coming  from  the  various  parts  of  the 
city  to  the  Tithing  Office,  and  in  wait- 
ing there,  and  then  value  those  hours, 
if  occupied  in  some  useful  employment, 
at  twelve  and  a  half  cents  each,  every 
eight  of  them  making  a  dollar,  it  will 
be  found  that  the  number  of  dollars 
thus  lost  by  these  seventy  odd  persons 
in  a  week  would  go  far  towards 
sustaining  them.  We  have  among  us 
some  brethren  and  sisters  who  are  not 
strong,  nor  healthy,  and  they  must  be 
supported.  We  wish  to  adopt  the  most 
economical  plan  of  taking  care  of  them 
and  we  say  to  you  bishops,  take  care 
of  them.  You  may  ask  the  question, 
"Shall  we  take  the  tithing  that  should 
go  to  the  Tithing  Office  to  support 
them,  or  shall  we  ask  the  brethren  to 
donate  for  that  purpose?"  If  you  will 
take  the  time  consumed  in  obtaining 
the  rations  drawn  by  them  out  of  the 

(Concluded  on  page  50) 


MONTHLY  REPORT  OF  THE  L.  D.  S.  STAKE  MISSIONS 

Made  by  The  First  Council  of   the  Seventy   to  The  Council   of  the   Twelve   Apostles 
For  the  Month  of  October.  1938 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 
7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 


16. 


MISSIONARY  ACTIVITIES  Oct. 

1938 

Evenings  or  part  days  spent  in  missionary  work.- _ 6,891 

Hours  spent  in   missionary   work   - - 16,390 

Number    of    calls    made    12,668 

Number  of   first    invitations   in 4,143 

Number   of    revisits    _ - 4,416 

Number  of  Gospel  conversations  _ 1 2,239 

Number  of   standard   Church  works   distributed   { Does  not  include   Books   of   Mormon 

reported   under   Item   No.    10)    _ _ 326 

Number   of   other  books   distributed   ._ _ 398 

Number  of  tracts  and  pamphlets  distributed  ™ - _ ..14,246 

Copies  of  Book  of  Mormon  actually  sold „ _ 197 

Number  of  hall  meetings  held  by   missionaries 294 

Number   of   cottage   meetings   held    by    missionaries 571 

Number  of  missionaries  who   attended   cottage  and  hall   meetings „ 2,282 

Number  of  investigators  present  at  cottage  and  hall  meetings _ - - 2523 

Number  of   baptisms  as  a  result  of  missionary  work _ 155 

(1)  Of  people  over   15  years   of  age _ „ 57 

(2)  Of   people  under    15   years  of   age: 

a.  Both    of   whose   parents    are    members _ 48 

b.  Others   under    15   years    of   age.- _ 50 

Number  of  inactive  members  of  Church  brought  into  activity  through   stake  missionary 

service   during    the    month    246 


ADDITIONAL   INFORMATION 

Number  of   stakes   in    the    Church  „ 124 

Number  of  stake  missions  organized  119 


MISSIONARIES  ACTIVELY  ENGAGED 


Number   of  stakes   reporting 
Number    of    districts    


98 

383 


Elders    274 

Seventies     1,221 

High    Priests    _ _ 257 

Women „ 353 

Total „ „ 2,105 


Oct. 

1937 

5,742 

12,509 

12,570 

3,096 

4,197 

11,016 

365 

357 

16,476 

173 

206 

500 

2,472 

2,092 

112 


249 


118 
113 


99 

336 
255 
1,104 
236 
244 

1,869 


CONDUCTED  UNDER  THE  SUPERVISION  OF  THE  PRESIDING   BISHOPRIC — EDITED   BY  JOHN  D.    GILES 


WARD  TEACHING  BY  AARONIC 
PRIESTHOOD  REACHES 
HIGH  MARK 

/^\NE  of  the  most  gratifying  reports  of 
^  Aaronic  Priesthood  activity  in 
Ward  Teaching  has  come  from  the 
compilation  made  from  stake  reports 
by  the  Presiding  Bishop's  Office  re- 
cently. This  report  shows  that  34 
stakes  have  more  than  100  members 
of  the  Aaronic  Priesthood  serving  as 
Ward  Teachers. 

The  percentage  of  Aaronic  Priest- 
hood members  to  the  total  number  of 
Ward  Teachens  ranges  as  high  as 
approximately  50%  in  some  wards.  An 
increase  in  this  service  in  the  past 
few  years  has  been  most  commend- 
able and  reports  indicate  that  results 
from  the  teaching  in  the  homes  by  these 
young  Priests  and  Teachers  is  of  a 
very  high  order.  In  some  stakes  the 
bulk  of  Ward  Teaching  is  now  done 
by  the  Aaronic  Priesthood  with  ex- 
cellent results  being  reported. 

A  tabulation  of  the  stakes  with  more 
than  100  Aaronic  Priesthood  members 
in  Ward  Teaching  service  is  as  follows : 


Wasatch 120 

Cache  119 

Weber  118 

Maricopa  114 

Utah  Ill 

Moapa 110 

Bear  Lake 109 

St.  George  108 

St.   Joseph  108 

Deseret  106 

Big  Horn  106 

Palmyra  105 

Riqby  102 

Nebo 101 

Shelley  101 

East  Jordan  100 

Mt.  Ogden   100 


Ogden 250 

Cottonwood 185 

Rexburg  175 

Hyrum  167 

Logan  164 

Pioneer 157 

No.  Davis  155 

Salt  Lake  153 

Liberty 146 

Pocatello   144 

Bear  River 138 

Box  Elder 135 

Grant   130 

Ensign   127 

No.  Weber  125 

Smithfield  124 

Los  Angeles 123 

Wells  122 

Ogden  Stake  is  the  only  one  report- 
ing more  than  200  Aaronic  Priesthood 
members  acting  as  Ward  Teachers. 

ADULT  PROGRAM  SHOWS 
ADVANCE 

Probably  the  greatest  advance  yet 
■*■  indicated  in  the  Adult  Aaronic 
Priesthood  program  is  reflected  in  the 
report  for  the  first  nine  months  of 
1938.  A  brief  summary  of  the  report 
indicates  the  following: 

Total  rating  26,  a  gain  from  19  in  1937. 

Wards  with  classes  gained  from  130  to 
182. 

Average  attendance  advanced  from  3% 
to  13%. 

Assignments  filled  increased  from  14,347 
to   16,423. 

Members  filling  assignments  increased 
8%  to  9%. 

Members  acting  as  Ward  Teachers  in- 
creased from  1,313  to  1,348. 

Wards  with  adult  supervisors  gained 
from  176  to  259. 


Number  of  stake  supervisors  increased 
from  146  to  176. 

Number  of  visits  to  wards  gained  from 
1,022   to    1,520. 

Number  of  adult  class  meetings  increased 
from  2,263   to  3,451. 

The  number  of  adults  reported  increased 
from  35,837  to  37,550. 

Salt  Lake  Stake,  pioneer  in  Adult 
Aaronic  Priesthood  work,  leads  in  total 
rating  (71);  in  total  class  meetings 
(310);  in  wards  with  classes  (11);  in 
assignments  filled  ( 858 ) ;  in  wards  with 
supervisors  (11);  in  number  of  stake 
supervisors  (13);  in  number  of  visits 
to  wards  ( 250 ) ;  and  in  average  attend- 
ance of  supervisors  (89%). 

AARONIC  PRIESTHOOD 
EXTENSION  PLAN  MAKES 
MARKED  PROGRESS 

"Deports  from  stakes  and  wards 
^  throughout  the  Church  indicate  that 
the  Aaronic  Priesthood  Extension  Plan, 
which  replaces  the  former  Correlation 
Plan,  is  being  adopted  generally  with 
excellent  results. 

Stake  and  Ward  Cavalcade  For 
Youth  meetings  are  reported  to  be  un- 
usually successful  and  to  have  accom- 
plished beneficial  results. 

It  is  urged  that  in  stakes  and  wards 
where  the  Extension  Plan  has  not  yet 
been  adopted  that  it  be  set  up  imme- 
diately and  that  every  possible  effort 
be  made  during  the  present  year  to  win 
and  hold  in  Church  activity  every  pos- 
sible young  man  and  boy  between  the 
ages  of  12  and  20,  whether  they  have 
been  ordained  to  the  Aaronic  Priest- 
hood or  not. 

In  connection  with  the  Extension 
Plan,  stake  and  ward  supervisors  of 
Aaronic  Priesthood  are  urged  to  confer 
with  leaders  of  similar  groups  in  Sun- 
day School  and  M.  I.  A.  for  the  proper 
development  of  a  balanced  and  definite 


program  of  activities  for  the  coming 
year.  If  such  programs  are  prepared 
in  cooperation  with  other  groups  in- 
volved, conflicts  in  dates  and  interests 
will  be  avoided  and  unquestionably  bet- 
ter results  will  accrue  to  the  program. 

BONNEVILLE  STAKE  AARONIC 
PRIESTHOOD  CONDUCTS 
SUCCESSFUL  PROJECTS 

'"Phe  Aaronic  Priesthood  of  Bonneville 
Stake  has  carried  out  two  projects 
during  the  last  few  months  to  increase 
attendance  at  various  meetings. 

The  first  of  these  projects  was  an 
attendance  contest  in  connection  with 
stake  conference,  in  which  all  the 
Aaronic  Priesthood  quorums  in  the  six 
wards  of  the  stake  participated.  The 
Aaronic  Priesthood  members  formed 
a  chorus  directed  by  Edwin  Kirkham 
which  sang  at  two  sessions  of  the  con- 
ference. 

A  beautiful  trophy  was  offered  for 
the  ward  which  had  the  largest  per- 
centage of  its  Aaronic  Priesthood 
members  at  both  sessions  of  the  con- 
ference to  sing,  and  also  at  one  pre- 
liminary practice. 

The  tropny  was  won  by  the  Aaronic 
Priesthood  of  the  33rd  Ward,  with  an 
average  attendance  of  over  50%.  Other 
wards  were  near  that  figure.  The 
trophy  was  presented  at  a  Sacrament 
meeting  given  over  to  the  Aaronic 
Priesthood,  who  furnished  all  the  music 
as  well  as  some  of  the  speakers.  Pres- 
ident Marion  G.  Romney  made  the 
presentation. 

At  the  Aaronic  Priesthood  conven- 
tion October  9th  in  the  Assembly  Hall, 
the  Aaronic  Priesthood  chorus  of  Bon- 
neville stake  furnished  the  music  with 
a  chorus  of  1 67  boys  and  many  leaders 

BONNEVILLE  STAKE  AARONIC  PRIESTHOOD 
CHORUS.  THIS  CHORUS  SANG  AT  AARONIC 
PRIESTHOOD   CONVENTION,    OCTOBER    9,    1938. 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


directed  by  Dr.  D.  E.  Smith.  Lloyd 
Keddington,  Deacon  of  Emigration 
Ward,  sang  "I  Am  a  Mormon  Boy" — 
accompanied  by  the  chorus 

All  the  boys  who  attended  this  meet- 
ing and  helped  make  the  project  a  suc- 
cess were  entertained  in  Yalecrest 
Ward  recreation  hall  by  the  Stake 
Aaronic  Priesthood  Committee,  Broth- 
ers Don  Cameron,  J.  E.  Gleave,  and 
Clyde  Cummings,  with  the  cooperation 
of  the  stake  presidency. 

A  venison  barbecue  with  all  "trim- 
mings" was  followed  by  an  evening  of 
games  and  athletic  events 

Approximately  two  hundred  boys, 
leaders,  and  members  of  bishoprics  of 
the  various  wards  attended. 

NEW  SUPERVISORS'  GUIDE 
FOR  ADULTS 

A  new  guide  for  supervisors  of  Adult 
**  Aaronic  Priesthood  groups  will  be 
ready  for  delivery  by  January  1st.  The 
new  book  contains  suggestions  for  or- 
ganizing, conducting,  and  supervising 
the  adult  program  and  in  addition  a 
lesson  guide  for  adult  classes. 

The  lesson  portion  of  the  guide  was 
prepared  originally  by  Elder  George 
W.  Skidmore  of  Logan,  Utah,  who  used 
it  with  outstanding  success.  The  guide 
has  been  amplified  and  will  doubtless 
be  of  material  assistance  to  supervisors. 
The  price  is  10c.  All  orders,  with 
remittance  accompanying,  should  be 
sent  to  the  Presiding  Bishopric,  40 
North  Main  Street,  Salt  Lake  City, 
Utah. 

NEW  MANUALS  READY 

1V7[anuals  for  Priests,  Teachers,  and 
Deacons  quorums  and  for  adult 
Aaronic  Priesthood  supervisors  are 
now  ready  for  distribution  and  are  be- 
ing sent  to  the  field  as  rapidly  as  orders 
are  received.  A  handbook  for  super- 
visors is  also  ready.  This  is  a  guide 
for  the  organization,  operation,  and 
supervision  of  Aaronic  Priesthood 
quorums. 

The  price  of  each  of  the  books  is 
10c.  Orders  with  remittances  should 
be  sent  to  the  office  of  the  Presiding 
Bishopric,  40  North  Main  Street,  Salt 
Lake  City,  Utah. 

STANDARD  QUORUM  AWARDS 
PLANS  URGED  UPON 
SUPERVISORS 

Cupervisors  of  Aaronic  Priesthood 
**■*  Quorums  are  urged  to  set  up  im- 
mediately standards  for  the  coming 
year,  as  outlined  in  each  of  the  Aaronic 
Priesthood  manuals  and  also  in  the 
supervisor's  handbook.  This  plan  sets 
up  standards  for  each  quorum  to  follow 
which  are  intended  to  increase  the  in- 
terest of  members  in  their  duties  and 
activities,  and  also  to  set  objectives 
for  the  quorums  to  reach  during  the 
year. 

Stake  chairmen  of  Aaronic  Priest- 
hood are  charged  with  the  responsi- 
bility of  checking   the  records  of  all 

40 


quorums  for  1938,  and  reporting  to  the 
Presiding  Bishopric  those  which  have 
earned  the  Standard  Quorum  Award 
for  the  past  year.  These  awards  will 
be  sent  to  the  stake  chairman  for  pres- 
entation at  some  stake  gatherings, 
where  proper  recognition  can  be  given 


to  the  officers  of  quorums  winning  the 
award. 

It    is   urged   that    these   reports    be 
sent  in  as  early  as  possible  in  order  that 
they  might  serve  as  an  incentive  to  in- 
crease activity  during  the  year  ahead. 
{Concluded  on  page  41) 


THE  WORD  OF  WISDOM  REVIEW 

A  Monthly  Presentation  of  Pertinent  Information  Regarding  the 

Lord's  Law  of  Health 


WIN  OR  LOSE 

A  Glimpse  at  the  Life  of  a  Mormon 
Boy  Who  as  Scholar-athlete 
Set  an  Example  on  and  off 
the  Field 

By  Clark  Stohl 

Dichard  Young  Bennion,  twenty  - 
year-old  son  of  Dr.  Adam  S.  Ben- 
nion and  Minerva  Young  Bennion,  who 
"Just  wanted  to  be  a  carbon  copy  of 
his  dad,"  has  distinguished  himself,  his 
university,  his  state,  and  his  Church  by 
his  accomplishments.  He  is  known  as 
one  of  the  finest  tennis  players  produced 
in  the  Rockies,  and  competent  critics 
from  east  to  west  today  rate  his  blister- 
ing overhead,  which  he  smashes  with 
both  feet  well  off  the  ground,  as  sec- 
ond to  none  in  the  country.  Already 
in  1936  "Dick,"  as  he  is  better  known, 
ranked  fourth  in  the  national  junior 
singles  and  doubles,  and  in  1937  he  won 
the  intermountain  net  crown.  Then, 
with  Gordon  Giles,  another  Mormon 
lad  of  splendid  habits  and  attainments, 
he  became  co-holder  of  the  Eastern 
Intercollegiate  doubles  title,  won  in 
July,  1938,  at  Montclair,  New  Jersey, 
undoubtedly  the  most  eminent  con- 
quest any  Utahns  have  ever  made  in  the 
tennis  world. 

Dick  was  stand-out  in  the  broad- 
jump,  too,  and  while  at  the  University 


of  Utah,  where  he  was  student-body 
president,  led  the  Mountain  States  con- 
ference, making  his  best  mark  in  1937 
when  he  bounded  23  feet  8]^  inches. 

In  athletics,  Dick  has  naturally 
found  the  Mormon  design  for  living 
his  unfailing  support.  "You  can't  'play 
around'  with  strong  drinks  and  nicotine 
and  become  a  champion,"  he  says.  Dur- 
ing the  Eastern  Intercollegiate,  he  and 
Gordon  Giles  were  invited  to  play  an 
exhibition  before  the  Army  officers 
stationed  at  Governor's  Island,  New 
York.  The  Utahns  were  magnificent 
in  trimming  Julius  Heldman  and 
Bradley  Kendis,  top  ranking  team  from 
the  University  of  California  at  Los- 
Angeles.  A  reception  followed,  at 
which  the  Mormon  boys  were  guests. 
Cocktails  and  tea  were  offered,  but  by 
special  request,  Dick  Bennion  and 
Gordon  Giles  had  milk. 

Another  time,  on  a  hot  Saturday 
morning  in  May,  1937,  Dick  captured 
the  western  division  Rocky  Mountain 
singles  by  whipping  Dan  Freed,  then 
paired  with  Jack  Hardy  to  turn  back 
Malcolm  Booth  and  Bill  Pardoe  of 
B.  Y.  U.  in  the  doubles  finals.  With 
two  hard-earned  victories  behind  him, 
Dick  went  over  to  the  stadium  that 
afternoon  and  leaped  23  feet  2y2  inches 
to  take  the  state  college  event.  Such 
endurance  is  born  of  life-long  observ- 
ance of  the  Word  of  Wisdom. 


Dick  Bennion  (left)  and  Gor- 
don Giles  (right),  who  teamed 
together  to  annex  the  Eastern 
Intercollegiate  Doubles  at  Mont- 
clair, New  Jersey,  in  July.  This 
is  the  only  major  tournament  any 
Utahns  have  ever  won  outside  the 
intermountain  country.  Giles  is 
seen  completing  a  forehand  drive. 
in  1936,  Bennion  and  Giles  were 
the  fourth  ranking  junior  doubles 
duo  in  the  country.  Dick  Ben- 
nion is  the  son  of  Dr.  Adam  S. 
Bennion,  and  Gordon  Giles  is  the 
son  of  Professor  Thomas  E.  Giles. 
Both  are  clean-living  Mormon  lads 
with  brilliant  promise  and  achieve- 
ments   in    the   field    of    athletics. 


CONDUCTED  UNDER  THE  SUPERVISION  OF  THE  PRESIDING   BISHOPRIC EDITED   BY   JOHN  D.    GILES 


IjJcUuL  J&achsUi&u  71/hAhaqsi,  ^stbhuwu},  1939 

SOMETHING  FOR  NOTHING 

'T'he  desire  to  secure  something  for  nothing  has  caused  untold  grief  and 
■*■  misery  in  the  world  in  all  ages.  The  "get-rich-quick"  idea  in  one  form 
or  another  has  been  used  by  promoters  of  schemes  and  "rackets"  of  various 
kinds,  to  induce  people  to  make  expenditures  in  the  hope  that  they  might 
be  the  "lucky"  ones  and  gain  comparatively  large  sums  of  money  thereby. 

Probably  never  in  the  history  of  the  world  has  this  spirit  been  so 
rampant  as  at  the  present  time.  The  schemes  being  perpetrated  upon  the 
public  have  invaded  practically  every  field  of  business  activity.  House- 
wives are  urged  to  spend  comparatively  small  amounts  for  products  they 
may  or  may  not  be  able  to  use  in  the  hope  that,  out  of  the  millions  of 
women  who  enter  such  "contests,"  they  might  find  the  end  of  the  rainbow 
and  secure  the  pot  of  gold. 

Young  people  are  confronted  on  all  sides  by  devices,  games,  and 
gambling  schemes  to  induce  them  to  send  money.  The  amusement  field  in 
many  communities  has  also  been  invaded  with  "something-for-nothing" 
schemes,  and  those  who  can  least  afford  it  are  frequently  the  ones  who  are 
attracted  in  largest  numbers. 

Any  scheme,  plan,  device,  game,  or  other  arrangement  that  has  as  its 
motive  and  incentive  the  hope  of  securing  something  for  nothing  should 
be  avoided  by  Latter-day  Saints,  as  being  immoral  and  unwholesome  and 
not  in  harmony  with  the  spirit  of  our  religion.  Gains  thus  secured  have, 
in  large  numbers  of  cases,  been  unfortunate  and  disastrous.  Winners  of 
lotteries  and  other  schemes,  whose  stories  have  reached  the  public,  have 
testified  that  their  winning  has  been  a  curse  rather  than  a  blessing. 

Homes  have  been  broken,  mothers  and  children  have  been  made  to 
suffer;  young  men  have  been  sent  to  prison;  men  have  lost  their  self-respect, 
families  have  been  impoverished;  and  many  young  people  started  on  the 
wrong  road  in  life  through  such  schemes. 

Latter-day  Saints  should  observe  the  teachings  of  our  Church  leaders 
in  this  respect.  Gambling  in  any  form  should  be  avoided.  Such  schemes 
and  plans  do  not  come  from  our  Father  in  Heaven. 


COUNT  YOUR  MANY 
BLESSINGS 

There  is  perhaps  no  home  in  which 
there  is  no  trouble. 

There  are  few  people,  rich  or  poor, 
but  that  have  some  sorrow  in  their  lives. 

It  would  seem  to  be  a  part  of  God's 
plan  for  the  training  of  His  children, 
and  when  we  consider  it,  how  tasteless 
life  would  be  without  the  variation  of 
the  sweet  and  the  bitter. 

It    is  by    these    contrasts    that    we 
achieve  happiness.    All  the  joy  we  have 
or  may  hope  to   have  will  find  their 
roots  in  these  comparisons  in  life. 

Then  why  bewail  and  mourn  because 
we  have  them? 

Is  it  not  better  cheerfully  to  face  and 
endure  them? 

One  fine  old  philosopher  said  that 
when  he  felt  to  be  discouraged  be- 
cause of  some  difficulty,  real  or  fancied, 
he  would  go  out  on  the  street  and 
could  always,  in  the  course  of  a  short 
walk,  find  someone  worse  off  than 
himself. 

Have  you  heard  of  the  man  who  had 
no  arms,  and  who  rigged  a  system  of 
straps  and  pulleys,  so  that  with  the 
wiggling  of  his  toes  he  could  scratch 


his  nose  when  it  itched?  He  made  the 
most  out  of  what  he  had  and  got  some 
happiness  out  of  it. 

But  with  all  our  troubles,  how  many 
are  the  blessings  that  we  enjoy. 

We  should  follow  the  advice  of  that 
fine  Sunday  School  song,  and  count 
them  occasionally.  Let  us  now  count. 
Some  one  or  more  of  these  every  one 
has: 

The  blessing  of  our  family:  Our 
fathers,  our  mothers,  our  children — - 
who  could  buy  them? 

The  privilege  to  labor,  for  what 
would  life  be  without  work? 

The  blessing  of  Faith  which  enables 
us  to  hold  onto  things  unseen. 

The  blessing  of  Hope  which  holds 
out  to  us  a  constant  light! 

The  blessing  of  Charity — the  love  of 
man  for  his  fellow  man. 

And  above  all,  to  the  Latter-day 
Saint,  the  blessing  of  the  knowledge 
that  has  come  to  him,  that  God  lives, 
that  Jesus  Christ  is  His  Son,  our  Elder 
Brother,  and  that  through  Him  we  may 
be  saved.  That  while  learned  men 
of  the  world  are  doubting  the  reality  of 
God,  and  the  mission  of  His  Son,  we 
know  that  His  word  is  true,  and  that 


He  lives  in  person,  and  by  His  Holy 
Spirit  is  everywhere. 

We  have  troubles  enough  now,  per- 
haps, and  there  is  no  doubt  that  we 
shall  have  more,  for  we  are  at  the 
beginning  of  the  last  days,  but  if  we 
keep  the  commandments  of  God,  we 
shall  have  faith  to  hold  on  until  the  end. 

Then  will  the  value  of  our  trials 
appear. 

Then  will  the  justice,  mercy,  and  love 
of  God  be  fully  manifest. 

Note:  The  above  was  used  as  a 
Ward  Teachers  Message  by  the  Poca- 
tello  Stake. 


Aaronic  Priesthood 

{Concluded  from  page  40) 

SEPTEMBER  30TH  REPORT 
SHOWS  AARONIC  PRIEST- 
HOOD GAINS 

Cubstantial  gains  in  Aaronic  Priest- 
**■*  hood  activity  for  the  first  nine 
months  of  1938  are  indicated  in  the 
report  tabulated  by  the  Presiding  Bish- 
op's Office.  Average  attendance  in- 
creased from  32%  to  37%  over  the 
same  period  of  1937. 

Assignments  filled  were  597,802, 
compared  with  540,148  in  1937.  The 
number  of  members  of  Aaronic  Priest- 
hood acting  as  Ward  Teachers  in- 
creased from  9,327  to  9,654.  Quorums 
organized  increased  from  2,928  to 
3,010.  The  number  of  wards  havina 
quorum  supervisors  increased  from  955 
to  971.  The  total  Aaronic  Priesthood 
under  20  at  the  time  of  the  report  was 
46,008. 

Leading  stakes  in  total  rating,  cover- 
ing all  activities,  are  as  follows: 

Ogden 86    Pasadena  80 

Highland   82    Shelley  80 


Timpanogos 80 

Maricopa  79 

Phoenix   79 

Pioneer 79! 


Grant   _ 81 

Los  Angeles 81 

Salt  Lake  81 

Bear  Lake  80 

Logan  80 

Cache,  Granite,  Gridley,  Hollywood, 
and  Pocatello  Stakes  have  reached  a 
rating  of  78  for  the  period. 


Church  Moves  On 

( Continued  from  page  33 ) 

JULIA  BUDGE  NIBLEY 
PASSES  ON 

At  the  age  of  77,  Julia  Budge  Nibley, 
widow  of  Charles  W.  Nibley, 
former  member  of  the  First  Presidency 
of  the  Church,  died  December  5  at  her 
home  in  Salt  Lake.  Long  active  in 
Church  work,  Mrs.  Nibley  had  also 
been  the  first  telegraph  operator  and 
also  the  first  postmistress  of  Paris, 
Idaho,  where  her  father  had  been  sent 
by  Brigham  Young  to  preside  over  the 
L.  D.  S.  settlements  there. 

(Concluded  on  page  42) 

41! 


OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS  OF  THE  GENEALOGICAL  SOCIETY  OF  UTAH 


JOSEPH  FIELDING  SMITH. 

President  and   Treasurer. 

JOSEPH  CHRISTENSON. 
Vice  President. 

ARCHIBALD  F.  BENNETT, 

Secretary   and   Librarian. 


JOHN  A.  WIDTSOE, 

A.  WILLIAM  LUND. 

JAMES  M.  KIRKHAM, 

MARK  E.  PETERSEN. 
Directors. 


HAROLD  J.  KIRBY, 

Assistant  Secretary. 
L.  GARRETT  MYERS. 

Assistant  Treasurer  and 
Superintendent  of   Research  Bureau 
ELLEN  HILL, 

Assistant  Librarian. 


ACTIVITIES  OF  CANNON 
FAMILY 

rVnE  George  Cannon  Family  Asso- 
■*■  ciation  are  to  be  commended  for 
the  interest  they  are  taking  in  family 
history  and  temple  work.  Right  now 
they  are  gathering  funds  so  as  to  micro- 
film the  parish  registers  of  the  Isle  of 
Man  from  which  place  the  Cannon 
progenitors  came. 

We  reproduce  below  a  few  para- 
graphs taken  from  their  letter  recently 
sent  to  members  of  the  family,  show- 
ing the  need  of  securing  the  records 
and  how  they  can  be  copied  in  the 
modern  way: 

Last  year  many  of  the  most  valued  rec- 
ords of  China,  some  of  which  go  back  to  the 
time  of  Confucius,  were  bombarded.  Prac- 
tically all  the  cultural  treasures  of  Spain 
have  also  been  destroyed  during  the  pres- 
ent war.  Tomorrow  this  same  thing  may 
happen  all  over  Europe,  destroying  forever 
the  record  of  our  ancestors  which  we  have 
been  charged,  at  the  peril  of  our  own  sal- 
vation, to  collect,  thus  fulfilling  the  proph- 
ecy that  "the  night  cometh  when  no  man 
can  work." 

As  a  family,  we  have  delayed. 

A  great  opportunity  is  now  offered  us. 
A  new,  efficient  and  remarkably  econom- 
ical method  of  copying  these  records  has 
been  developed.  It  is  called  the  microfilm. 
It  consists  of  photographing  books,  page 
by  page,  on  a  strip  similar  to  a  movie  film, 
which  can  be  projected  by  the  reader 
through  a  small  hand-turned  machine. 

Brother  Archibald  F.  Bennett,  secretary 
of  the  Church  Genealogical  Association,  en- 
courages the  Cannon  family  to  lead  out  in 
procuring  copies  of  the  parish  registers  in 
the  Isle  of  Man  by  this  method. 

Last  year  one  L.  D.  S.  Manx  family 
spent  to  secure  only  part  of  its  Manx  lines 
by  the  old  method  what  is  probably  more 
than  would  be  required  to  make  copies  of 
and  bring  here  by  this  new  process,  all  the 
parish  registers  of  the  Isle  of  Man. 

To  get  this  project  started  we  must  have 
funds.  Will  you  do  your  part  by  buying  a 
membership  in  the  Cannon  Family  Associa- 
tion at  once? 

A  Bit  of  Cannon  History 

To  show  the  value  and  importance  of 
old  letters  in  gathering  genealogy  and 
the  help  they  are  in  compiling  a  family 
history  we  quote  from  a  recent  circular 
sent  out  by  the  Cannon  family  asso- 
ciation. 

Through  the  kindness  of  Inez  Phillips 
Baker,  granddaughter  of  Catherine  Quayle 
Quirk,  Ann  M.  Cannon  recently  came  into 
possession  of  a  priceless  letter  which  has 
been  almost  miraculously  preserved  from 
Pioneer  days.  The  letter  was  written  from 
St.  Joseph,  Missouri,  by  Mary  Alice  Cannon 
Lambert  when  she  was  yet  under  twenty 
and   uncomplainingly  mothering    five  little 

42 


children.  It  was  sent  to  her  mother's  sister, 
Catherine  Quayle  Quirk,  who  resided  in 
Brooklyn,  Long  Island. 

Ann  Quayle  Cannon,  having  a  premoni- 
tion that  she  would  pass  away  before  she 
reached  the  main  body  of  the  Saints  and 
being  determined  that  her  children  should 
"gather"  with  them,  charted  her  course  via 
New  Orleans,  for  she  knew  that  if  they 
went  via  New  York,  her  sister  would  keep 
the  motherless  children  and  they  would  not 
be  privileged  to  reach  Zion,  since  Catherine 
Quayle  Quirk  did  not  join  the  Church. 

St.  Joseph,  Missouri, 
November  26,  1848. 
Dear  Uncle,  Aunt,  and  Cousins: 

I  take  up  my  pen  to  drop  a  few  lines  to 
you,  thinking  it  will  be  interesting  to  you 
to  hear  from  us.  You  will,  I  expect,  think 
it  very  unkind  of  me  not  answering  your 
letters  before  this,  but  we  have  been  so  un- 
settled that  I  have  not  written  to  any- 
body. I  suppose  you  have  heard  of  my 
being  married.  I  will  be  married  four  years 
the  twenty-eighth  of  this  month.  I  have 
got  a  very  good  husband.  His  name  is 
Charles  Lambert.  He  is  a  stone  mason  and 
cutter  by  trade.  He  comes  from  York- 
shire. I  have  Angus,  David,  and  Leonora 
[her  younger  brothers  and  sister]  living  with 
me  and  also  I  have  two  fine  boys  of  my 
own.  The  oldest  was  three  years  old  the 
fifth  of  this  month.  His  name  is  Charles 
John.  The  other  will  be  eight  months  old 
the  eleventh  of  next  month.  His  name  is 
George  Cannon.  George  and  Ann  [her 
brother  and  sister]  went  to  Salt  Lake  with 
Aunt  Taylor.  I  have  had  several  letters 
from  them.  They  like  the  country  very 
well.  We  should  have  gone  when  they 
went  but  the  Indians  killed  our  three  yoke 
of  oxen. 

I  will  now  give  you  a  small  history  of 
what  we  passed  through  since  we  left  Eng- 
land. We  sailed  on  the  18  of  September 
and  our  dear  mother  departed  this  life  on 
the  28  of  October.  We  did  not  get  to 
Nauvoo  until  April  the  12  and  on  February 
the  28  Father  got  married  to  a  widow. 
Her  name  was  Mary  White.  He  went  to 
St.  Louis  in  about  six  months  after  he  was 
married.  When  he  had  been  there  a  week, 
he  strained  his  back  with  lifting  and  the  first 
day  he  went  to  work  he  took  sick  and  he 
had  to  leave  at  2  o'clock  and  he  died  at  10 
that  same  night.  They  said  it  was  a  fit  of 
apoplexy  that  he  died  in.  Stepmother  had 
a  little  girl  six  months  after  he  died.  Her 
name  is  Elizabeth  and  since  she  [step- 
mother] has  gone  to  St.  Louis  and  got  mar- 
ried to  a  man  by  the  name  of  Charles 
Taylor.  .  .  .  George  had  gone  to  learn 
the  printing  business  before  Father's  death. 
Aunt  [Leonora  Cannon  Taylor]  took  Ann 
to  live  with  her,  and  Charles  took  the  rest 
of  them.    He  behaves  like  a  father  to  them. 

I  expect  you  have  heard  of  the  battle  in 
Nauvoo.  We  were  there  at  that  time  wait- 
ing for  our  wagon  to  be  finished.  They 
were  painting  it  when  the  battle  commenced. 
The  cannonballs  fell  guite  thick  around 
our   house.     We  were   driven   across   the 


river  without  receiving  one  cent  for  our 
property.  We  had  forty  acres  of  land  on 
the  prairie  and  a  city  lot  with  a  brick  house 
on  with  four  rooms  and  a  good  well.  We 
had  to  leave  it  all  to  a  wicked  and  ruthless 
mob.  We  started  for  Council  Bluffs.  When 
we  got  to  Soap  Creek,  I  got  run  over.  Both 
wheels  went  over  my  back.  There  was 
thirty  hundred  weight  on  the  wagon  at  the 
time.  They  took  me  up  for  dead,  but  with 
the  blessing  of  the  Lord,  I  was  enabled 
to  be  about  in  a  few  days.  It  injured  my 
health  very  much.  As  soon  as  we  had  got 
out  to  the  Bluffs  and  got  a  house  built 
Charles  went  to  St.  Joseph  to  work  and  he 
stayed  until  spring  when  he  came  home 
and  we  moved  there  to  live.  We  now  live 
twenty  miles  from  there  at  the  Nodaway 
quarry.  Charles  is  now  working  about  fif- 
teen miles  from  here  putting  a  foundation 
for  a  house.  I  expect  him  home  in  two 
weeks  and  then  he  is  going  to  cut  stone  at 
home  all  winter.  I  would  like  to  write  more 
but  I  don't  get  time  to  write  often  as  I  am 
kept  busy  preparing  for  starting  in  the 
spring.  I  should  like  to  see  you  all  very 
much  but  it  is  useless  to  think  about  it 
without  you  should  come  out  to  Salt  Lake 
valley. 

George  had  a  letter  from  Uncle  Charles 
[Quayle]  and  Grandmother  [Quayle]  when 
Uncle  Taylor  [President  John  Taylor]  came 
home.  Grandmother  was  in  very  poor 
health  when  he  was  there.  I  was  very  sorry 
to  hear  of  Aunt  Emma's  [Quayle]  death. 
I  would  like  you  when  you  write  to  Grand- 
mother to  send  her  all  the  news  I  send  you, 
and  when  we  get  to  Salt  Lake  I  will  write 
and  give  them  all  the  news.  Angus,  David, 
and  Leonora  send  their  love  with  me  to  you 
all  and  if  Charles  were  here,  he  would  join 
with  us.  Give  my  love  to  Uncle  Joseph 
[Quayle,  brother  of  Catherine  and  Ann] 
and  Elen.  I  must  now  draw  to  a  close. 
From  your  affectionate  niece, 

Mary  Alice  Lambert. 

Dear  Mary  Ann:  [a  cousin]  I  thank  you 
for  writing  to  me  and  hope  you  will  write 
as  soon  as  you  receive  this  letter  and  I  can 
answer  it  before  we  start.  Direct  for  Charles 
Lambert,  Stone  Mason,  St.  Joseph,  [Mis- 
souri]. Send  me  the  names  of  all  my 
cousins. 

From  your   affectionate  cousin, 

M.  A.  Lambert. 


Church  Moves  On 

(Concluded  from  page  41 ) 

MORMON  HANDICRAFT 
FOSTERS  HOME  INDUSTRY 
"JV^ormon  Handicraft  is  the  name  given 
a  new  branch  of  the  Church  Wel- 
fare program,  a  project  being  sponsored 
by  the  Relief  Society  which  enables 
women  to  sell  articles  made  in  the  home 
at  a  gift  shop  which  has  been  opened 
at  21  West  South  Temple  Street  in 
Salt  Lake  City. 


General   Superintendency 
Y.  M.  M.  I.  A. 

GEORGE   Q.   MORRIS 

JOSEPH  J.  CANNON 

BURTON  K.   FARNSWORTH 

OSCAR  A.   KIRKHAM. 

Executive  Secretary 


General  Offices  Y.  M.  M.  I.  A. 

50  NORTH  MAIN  STREET 
SALT  LAKE  CITY,  UTAH 

General  Offices  Y.  W.  M.  I.  A. 

33  BISHOP'S  BUILDING 
SALT  LAKE  CITY,  UTAH 

Send  all  Correspondence  to  Committees  Direct  to  General  Offices 


General  Presidency 
Y.  W.  M.  I.  A. 

LUCY  GRANT  CANNON 

HELEN  S.  WILLIAMS 

VERNA  W.  GODDARD 

CLARISSA  A.  BEESLEY, 

Executive  Secretary 


Jo  J/wAfL  U)ho  iu&fcttG- 


w  f^NCE,  some  Wise  Men  were  guided  by  a  Star  to  a  manger  where  a  Child 

\^_y  lay.     They  brought  gifts  and  worshiped  Him,   as  the  Son  of  God. 

Today,  after  long  centuries,  wise  men  still  follow  the  star  of  faith  which  leads  to  Him  and  still  bring 
their  gifts  of  love  and  service  to  lay  at  His  feet. 

As  nineteen-thirty-eight  closes  and  a  New  Year  dawns,  we  greet  our  beloved  fellow  workers  in  the  Cause 
of  M.  I.  A.  and  extend  our  sincere  wishes  for  happiness,  peace  and  prosperity.  We  trust  that  success  may 
attend  the  efforts  of  every  faithful  officer  and  leader,  that  all  may  have  the  satisfaction  and  joy  which  come 
from  service  well  done. 

And  most  of  all  we  pray  that  love  of  God  may  be  in  every  heart,  and  the  assurance  that  Jesus  Christ  is 
His  Son  and  the  Redeemer  of  the  world.  May  we  make  Him  our  Companion  and  Friend.  May  we  read  His 
holy  Word.  May  we  do  His  works.  Thus  shall  the  Star  still  shine  about  us  and  our  lives  be  permeated  by 
its  radiance. 


Y .  M.  M.  I.  A.  General  Superintendency. 


Y.  W.  M.  /.  A.  Presidency. 


THEME-PROJECT 

Although  Marie  Curie  wished  to 
^*  have  a  radium  institute  built  in  her 
beloved  Poland,  she  felt  that  the  im- 
poverished condition  of  her  people 
after  the  World  War  made  such  an 
achievement  impossible.  Her  sister 
finally  evolved  a  plan  whereby  the  in- 
stitute could  be  built  without  too  great 
a  hardship  on  any  one  person.  Each 
was  to  contribute  one  brick  toward 
the  edifice.  In  this  manner,  a  close 
cooperation  was  effected  since  each 
could  do  one  simple  thing  which  by 
united  effort  would  rise  to  a  mag- 
nificent structure. 

Our  theme  this  year  is  capable  of 
just  such  a  united  service  and  significant 
results:  "By  love  serve  one  another, 
for  all  the  law  is  fulfilled  in  one  word, 
even   in   this,    'Thou    shalt   love    thy 


neighbor  as  thyself."  Each  of  us  is 
encouraged  to  act  separately  as  persons 
with  other  persons  until  the  result  will 
be  felt  for  good  throughout  the  Church. 
The  particular  assignment  for  the  Ex- 
ecutives is  to  aid  someone  in  over- 
coming the  desire  to  smoke  or  drink. 
In  many  cases,  this  theme-project  has 
been  accomplished  already.  But  there 
are  crying  instances  where  effort  on 
our  part  as  leaders  would  encourage 
those  who,  although  smokers  or  drink- 
ers, are  eager  to  overcome  their  failing. 

One  executive  talked  to  a  young 
man  and  told  him  that  he  had  built  up 
so  strong  a  habit  of  smoking  that  she 
was  sure  he  couldn't  overcome  it.  He 
laughed  and  said,  "Oh,  I'm  not  so  weak 
as  that.  I'm  sure  I  can  quit."  Each 
time  she  saw  him,  she  would  ask  him 
how  he  was  progressing.  One  week 
he  told  her  that  he  had  been  three  weeks 
without  touching  tobacco.  He  is  still 
trying  to  overcome  his  bad  habit. 

We  should  like  you  to  re-read  the 
article,    "So    You're    Going    to    Stop 


Smokinq?"  by  Dr.  Henry  C.  Link, 
which  appeared  in  the  September,  1938, 
Era.  This  article  is  stimulating  and 
will  be  conducive  of  good  if  passed 
to  those  who  are  inveterate  smokers. 
President  Grant  was  especially  pleased 
with  this  article  because  he  said  that 
when  he  visited  Dr  Link  a  year  or  so 
ago,  Dr.  Link  smoked  constantly.  Now 
he  has  learned  the  harm  of  smoking 
and  has  proved  that  he  can  quit.  An- 
other article  to  be  re-read  is  "Thanks, 
But  I  Don't  Drink,"  in  the  Era  of  De- 
cember, 1937. 

As  executives,  we  do  not  have  to 
reform  the  whole  Church  in  the  matter 
of  smoking;  we  work  with  one  person 
at  a  time.  To  fortify  ourselves,  we 
should  look  through  our  New  Testa- 
ments again  and  count  the  number  of 
times  that  Christ  did  His  work  with 
single  persons  in  contrast  to  the  very 
few  times  that  He  talked  to  multitudes. 
If  each  Executive  will  convert  one  per- 
son, soon  the  whole  Church  will  be 
made  better. 

(Continued  on  page  44) 

43 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


(Continued  from  page  43) 
If  you  have  made  positive  progress 
in  accomplishing  your  theme-project, 
we  should  like  to  hear  your  methods 
that  we  may  pass  the  information  and 
help  to  other  wards  and  stakes. 

ORIGINAL  ASSEMBLY 
PROGRAM 

HPhe  project  for  the  Assembly  pro- 
gram  committee  is  to  create  one 
program  in  addition  to  producing  those 
which  have  been  published  in  the  Ex- 
ecutive Manual.  The  time  has  now 
come  when  the  program  for  next  year 
is  being  prepared.  If  you  feel  that 
your  original  program  is  unusual 
enough  and  general  enough  to  merit 
use  in  other  wards,  will  you  please  get 
them  in  immediately  to  the  M.  I.  A. 
General  Board  offices  at  either  50  North 
Main,  or  33  Bishop's  Bldg.,  Salt  Lake 
City,  Utah. 

DANCE  FESTIVAL 

Cince  executives  and  dance  directors 
^  are  now  beginning  to  plan  for  their 
dance  festival,  this  report  of  a  suc- 
cessful affair  from  Pocatello  Stake,  held 
April  7,  1938,  in  the  Stake  Recreation 
Hall  under  the  direction  of  the  stake 
dance  directors,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Law- 
rence Walker,  should  prove  stimu- 
lating. The  total  number  of  partici- 
pants was  gratifying.  In  the  dances 
104  entered;  in  the  presentation,  there 
were  45;  30  singers  and  12  musicians 
performed,  bringing  the  total  to  191 
who  benefited  by  the  activities.  The 
event  included  the  following  numbers: 
1.  The  Gleam  Waltz,  M.  I.  A.  Official 
Waltz — All  Wards;  2.  Ladies  Chorus  (a) 
An  Old  Violin  (b)  Because — Third  Ward, 
Mrs.  George  L.  Matthews,  director;  3.  Gold 
and  Green  Cotillion,  1927-28  Contest  Dance 
— Fourth  Ward;  4.  Original  Waltz — North 
Pocatello;  5.  Gold  and  Green  Caprice, 
1928-29  Contest  Dance— Fifth  Ward;  6. 
Original  Waltz — First  Ward;  7.  Vocal  Solo 
— Anthony  Picciano;  8.  Original  Fox  Trot — 
Second  Ward;  9.  Gold  and  Green  Cen- 
tennial Waltz,  1929  Contest  Dance — Third 
Ward;  10.  Stake  Gleaner  Girls'  Sextette, 
directed  by  Ann  Pearson.  Presentation  of 
Queens  and  Attendants  of  all  Ward  Gold 
and  Green  Balls  held  this  season.  Directed 
by  Mrs.  S.  R.  Meadows  and  Charles  Green, 
Stake  Drama  Directors.  Designer,  Ann 
Meadows;  Stage  Lighting,  Wayne  Slaugh- 
ter, Roy  Cox,  and  Norton  Marler;  Violins, 
Ralphene  Varley,  Ann  Pearson,  Sybil  Mat- 
thews; Piano,  Lillis  Hill.  Announcer,  Lloyd 
Call;  Salutation,  June  Marshall.  Pocatello 
Stake  Original  Waltz — All  Ward  Dance 
Directors.  11.  Original  Fox  Trot — Sixth 
Ward;  12.  Gold  and  Green  Caprice,  M.  I. 
A.  Official  Group  Dance — -Third,  Sixth, 
North  Pocatello  and  American  Falls;  13. 
Original  Waltz — Fourth  Ward;  14.  Sen- 
orita  MIA,  1931-32  Contest  Dance— First 
Ward;  15.  Original  Fox  Trot— Fifth  Ward: 
16.  Gold  and  Green  Tango  Waltz,  1933-34 
Dance — Sixth  Ward;  17.  Rage  Quadrille. 
Special  Feature  Dance — Directed  by  Don 
Miner — Fifth  Ward;  18.  Original  Waltz — 
Third  Ward;  19.  Gold  and  Green  Fox  Trot 
—Rockland  Ward;  20  Aloha  Oe  (Goodbye 
and  Love  Go  With  Thee) ,  M.  I.  A.  Official 
Fox  Trot — All  Wards;  Song,  "Carry  On" 
— Congregation.  Orchestra:  Mildred,  Rich- 
ard Dale,  and  Margaret  Barrett. 

44 


SCENES  FROM    POCATELLO  STAKE  DANCE   FES- 
TIVAL (APRIL  7,   193S). 

NEW  Y.  M.  M  I.  A.  BOARD 
MEMBER  ANNOUNCED 

Alma  H.  Pettegrew,  for  eight  years 
*"*  General  Secretary  of  the  Y.  M.  M. 
I.  A.  has  been  made  a  member  of  the 
Y.  M.  M.  I.  A.  General  Board,  it  was 
recently  announced  by  the  General 
Superintendency.  Brother  Pettegrew's 
appointment  became  effective  August 
24,  1938.  He  will  continue  his  secre- 
tarial duties. 


number  of  officers  at  the  monthly  lead- 
ership meeting.  The  ward  Mutual 
winning  it  the  greatest  number  of  times 
during  the  year  will  be  awarded  it  per- 
manently. 

The  banner  is  in  the  form  of  a  shield 
and  is  made  of  heavy  green  felt  with 
gold  letters.  The  cost  was  $4.00. 
Considerable  interest  has  already  been 
manifested  in  good-natured  rivalry. 


I  * 


LIBERTY  STAKE  PROMOTES 
"LET'S  GO  TO  MUTUAL"  IDEA 
Asa  stimulator  in  the  campaign  to 
^*  increase  attendance  the  Liberty 
Stake  M.  I.  A.  has  provided  a  "Let's 
Go  to  Mutual"  banner.  It  will  be 
given  to  the  ward  having  the  greatest 


THE  ADVERTISERS 

and  Where  You  Will  Find 

Their  Messages 

American  Smelting  Co 

..59 

Beneficial  Life  Insurance  Co 

Back  Cc 

>ver 
..59 

Brigham  Young  University 

Continental  Oil  Company  

..59 

Deseret  News  Press  

..62 

Globe  Mills 

..35 

Hotel    Lankershim   

..59 

International  Harvester  Co 

..  1 

KSL  Radio  Station 

Inside   Back    Cover 

L.  D.  S.  Business  College.. 

..61 

Mountain  Fuel  Supply 

..63 

New  Grand  Hotel 

..57 

Ogden  School  of  Beauty  Culture. 

..59 

Provo  School  of  Beauty  Culture. 

..57 

Quish  School  of  Beauty  Culture- 

..63 

..57 

Shell  Oil  Company  

Inside  Front  Cc 

>ver 
..55 

Tee  Gee  Garment  Company 

Utah  Engraving  Company  

..57 

Utah  Home  Fire  Insurance  Co.... 

..57 

Utah  Oil  Refining  Co 

...  3 

Utah  Power  &  Light  Co 

57 

THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


EFFECTIVE  LIBRARIANSHIP 

By  Amelia  Bennion 

'T'he  question  has  been  asked  about 
A  the  equipment  and  material  needed 
for  the  starting  and  maintaining  of  a 
library.  Keeping  in  mind  the  simplest 
of  these,  I  suggest  the  following : 

1.  A  catalog  file  box. 

2.  A  box  in  which  to  keep  cards  of 
books  that  are  in  circulation. 

3.  Catalog  cards. 

4.  Book  cards. 

5.  Book  pockets. 

6.  Date-due  slips. 

7.  Book  plates. 

8.  Labels. 

9.  Accession  books. 

10.  Paste,  pen,  India  ink,  typewriter,  when 
possible. 

If  you  haven't  much  money  in  your 
budget  some  of  these  things  can  be 
made  at  home  as  I  have  suggested  in 
previous  articles.  Another  reason  for 
making  them  at  home  is  that  it  is  very 
expensive  to  buy  them  in  small  quan- 
tities. 

Of  course  library  procedure  ranges 
from  a  small  collection  as  in  most  wards 
to  collections  of  millions  of  volumes 
with  staffs  of  hundreds  of  people.  This 
makes  the  work  of  librarianship  very 
intricate  and  makes  special  library 
training  necessary.  There  are  about  a 
dozen  library  schools  in  the  United 
States  that  offer  postgraduate  work 
with  B.  A.  and  M.  A.  degrees  and  very 
intensive  training  for  one  or  two  years. 

During  this  fall,  have  you  been  col- 
lecting the  books  that  belong  to  the 
ward?  Try  in  every  way  possible  to 
do  this  and  also  to  collect  suitable  books 
that  people  wish  to  give  to  your  col- 
lection. Do  this  especially  if  you  live 
in  a  community  where  there  is  no  pub- 
lic library.  You  might  interest  some 
people  in  your  ward  or  community  to 
give  yearly  magazine  subscriptions. 
Prepare  your  magazines  for  circula- 
tion just  as  you  do  books,  with  pockets 
and  date-due  slips,  but  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  accession  them  unless  you  bind 
a  volume  of  them.  This  is  very  worth- 
while with  very  good  magazines,  espe- 
cially our  Church  ones. 

Another  thing  you  might  be  doing  to 
add  to  your  library  is  to  keep  news- 
paper clippings,  not  for  circulation.  It 
will  take  some  time  for  this  to  become 
especially  valuable,  but  the  sooner 
you  begin  the  better.  From  each  daily 
paper,  cut  out  the  articles  which  are 
of  interest  in  an  historical  way.  The 
Salt  Lake  Public  Library  has  done  this 
for  years  and  now  has  some  very 
valuable  historical  material  about  Salt 
Lake  City  and  about  Utah  that  cannot 
be  found  in  books  of  any  kind.  You 
know  your  community  and  you  will 
know  what  the  people  are  interested 
in.  To  keep  these  clippings,  get  manila 
folders  or  make  them  of  newspapers. 
Then  separate  the  clippings  according 
to  subject  and  file  to  make  them  easily 
accessible.  On  each  folder  write 
plainly  at  the  top  the  subjects  of  the 


articles.  For  instance,  in  a  beet-grow- 
ing district,  collect  articles  on  that  sub- 
ject and  file  them  together.  Somebody 
at  some  time  might  wish  quickly  to  find 
history  of  that  subject  in  your  com- 
munity. Always  write  the  name  of  the 
paper  and  the  date  of  publication  on 
the  clipping. 

You  who  are  doing  this  work  might 
be  interested  to  know  that  Harry  M. 
Lydenburg  of  the  New  York  Public 
Library  has  asked  that  the  Church 
send  to  his  library  a  copy  of  everything 
that  is  and  has  been  published  by  or 
about  the  Church. 


Axel  A.  Madsen  and  Grace  C.  Neslen,  chairmen; 
Richard  L.  Evans,  Dr.  L.  A.  Stevenson,  Aurelia 
Bennion,   Gladys  E.  Harbertson. 

ADULT  SOCIAL  EVENINGS 

A  n  important  part  of  the  Adult 
"^  M.  I.  A.  program  is  its  social 
features,  during  which  men  and  women 
come  down  from  the  formal  plane  of 
study  and  academic  deliberation  and 
learn  to  know  their  neighbors.  Many 
of  the  most  permanently  successful  and 
enjoyable  Adult  groups  in  the  Church 
have  been  built  upon  the  tradition  of 
neighborliness  and  social  riecreation. 
Below  are  cited  the  details  of  a  success- 
ful Adult  social  evening  held  recently 
in  Ensign  Stake.  From  it,  some  may 
take  ideas  for  their  own  wards: 

Adult  Social  of  the  Ensign  Stake 

HpHE  annual  Adult  party  of  the  Ensign 
A  Stake  was  held  November  8th, 
1938,  in  the  27th  Ward  Amusement 
Hall.  For  the  past  five  years  this  social 
has  been  the  culmination  of  the  efforts 
of  the  teachers  and  Stake  leader,  Mrs. 
Arthur  Adams  in  the  Ensign  Stake,  and 
the  party  this  year  was  considered  the 
most  successful  from  the  point  of  num- 
bers in  attendance  and  also  in  the  pres- 
entation of  a  superb  program  which  was 
enjoyed  by  those  in  attendance. 

Two  months  in  advance,  the  prepara- 
tions for  the  party  were  begun  and  the 
date  announced  in  each  of  the  Adult 
classes.  The  teacher  and  class  mem- 
bers formed  the  invitation  committee. 
Each  ward  was  responsible  for  one 
number  on  the  program.  A  finance 
committee  was  appointed  who  secured 
appropriations  from  each  ward  to  cover 
the  expense  of  an  orchestra  and  re- 
freshments. 

The  master  of  ceremonies,  Professor 
Joseph  F.  Smith,  announced  the  fol- 
lowing program: 

Singing:     "The  Lord  is  My  Light." 
Piano  selection:   Sister  Elizabeth  Haynes, 
of  the  13th  Ward,  who  is  eighty-five  years 
young. 

Song:      Mary  Ann  Madsen 
Piano  selection:     Mrs.  Don  Swenson. 
Trombone  solo:     Henry  Tanner 
Accordion  Band:      Twenty   young   girls 
and   boys    made   up    the   band. 


A  skit:  "The  Fussy  Mother,"  presented 
and  directed  by  Mrs.  Albert  Toronto  of 
the  University  Ward. 

Comic  reading:  "O!  How  He  Loved 
Me,"  Mrs.  Albert  Toronto. 

Penrose  Trio  of  the  11th  Ward:  Two 
selections. 

Song :     Jaceta  Johnson. 

The  last  number  on  the  program  was 
a  demonstration  of  dances  by  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  John  H.  Chapman,  who  were  in 
charge  of  the  dancing.  They  demon- 
strated a  number  of  old-fashioned 
dances  and  introduced  a  new  one.  The 
rest  of  the  evening  was  spent  in  a  grand 
ball  which  was  greatly  enjoyed  by  all 
present,  especially  by  the  older  members 
of  the  stake,  who  danced  until  the  party 
was  over.  The  waltz  was  the  favorite 
number  of  the  evening,  which  was  at- 
tested by  the  request  for  the  "Blue 
Danube  Waltz"  by  Strauss  to  be  play- 
ed three  times. 


Frank  W.  McGhie,  chairman;  Dr.  Franklin  S. 
Harris,  Homer  C.  Warner,  Floyed  G.  Eyre, 
Werner  Kiepe,  Dr.  Wayne  B.  Hales,  Alma  H. 
Pettegrew. 

BUILDING  M  MEN  MORALE 

A  n  M  Men  department  in  any  and 
all  of  its  activities  is  a  potent  factor 
of  the  M.  I.  A.  to  the  degree  that  it 
has  "mental  pep,"  group  compact, 
mental  and  social  alertness,  spirit,  or 
morale.  Our  department,  through  its 
morale,  should  give  the  intellectual,  so- 
cial and  spiritual  tone  to  the  M.  I.  A. 
The  morale  of  a  group  is  said  to  be  the 
zeal,  the  spirit,  or  the  confidence  of  the 
group.  It  is  not  a  mysterious  power. 
There  is  no  "hocus  pocus"  about  it. 
Griffith  says,  "Some  men  have  it;  all 
can  acquire  it.  It  is  a  frame  of  mind." 
High  morale  is  the  ideal  frame  of  mind 
and  spirit  for  our  deportment  for  it  is 
a  permanent  intellectual  virtue.  It  does 
not  come  easily.  It  takes  time  to  de- 
velop it.  It  is  not  rabid  emotionalism 
but  spiritedness  all  of  the  time. 

Professor  Griffith  in  his  book  The 
Psychology  of  Coaching,  chapter  eight, 
says:  "Morale  is  an  intangible  mental 
virtue.  It  is  a  state  of  mind  that  makes 
evasiveness,  slacking,  and  cowardice 
impossible.  It  is  a  kind  of  bodily  and 
mental  attitude  which  makes  an  indi- 
vidual 'fit'  for  any  task.  Morale  is  the 
measure  of  the  quality  of  a  man.  It  is 
mental  and  physical  integrity."  He 
further  says,  "A  mind  in  a  high  state  of 
morale  is  a  peppy,  spirited  mind.  It 
is  a  cold  weather  mind.  There  is  a 
sparkling  crispness  about  it.  It  is  a 
mind  that  knows  how  to  'snap  into  it.' 
Electric  currents  never  sleep,  and 
neither  do  spirited  minds." 

Here  are  a  few  practical  suggestions 
on  how  to  build  this  morale  in  our  M 
Men  department: 

(a)  Keep  up  with  the  Gleaners  in 
all  activities. 

{Continued  on  page  46) 

45 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


(Continued  from  page  45) 
(b)   Practice  it. 
{ c )   Control  fear  and  doubts. 

(d)  Use  slogans,  placards,  chal- 
lenges. 

( e )  Furnish  living  examples. 

(f)  Keep  a  healthy  spirit. 

(g)  Take  time. 

At  the  Ogden  M  Men  school  the  fol- 
lowing sportsmanship  code  was  given 
by  the  speaker,  Brother  Mark  Bailiff: 

1.  We  shall  try  to  be  graceful  winners, 
if  winners  we  may  be;  we  shall  try  to  be 
good  losers,  if  losers  we  must  be. 

2.  The  referee  was  chosen  by  mutual 
agreement  of  the  competing  groups.  We 
believe  he  is  competent  and  fair.  His  de- 
cisions are  to  be  respected. 

3.  "Booing"  is  the  worst  form  of  un- 
sportsmanship  known.  It  will  not  be  toler- 
ated. 

4.  It  shall  be  the  responsibility  of  the 
home  group  to  insist  that  any  person  who 
continually  evidences  poor  sportsmanship 
be  requested  not  to  attend  the  activities. 

5.  Recognize  and  applaud  an  exhibition 
of  fine  play  or  good  sportsmanship  on  the 
part  of  the  visiting  team. 

6.  It  is  good  sportsmanship  to  be  as  quiet 
as  possible  while  a  player  shoots  a  free 
throw. 

At  the  same  school  the  following 
ethics  for  our  coaches  was  given.  We 
suggest  it  to  your  coaches  and  urge  its 
use  in  spirit  and  practice. 

Basketball  Ethics  For  Coaches 

1.  Instruct  your  players  according  to  the 
letter  and  spirit  of  the  rules. 

2.  Insist  that  your  players  do  not  ques- 
tion the  judgment  decisions  of  a  referee. 
In  disputes  covering  misinterpretation  of 
rules,  have  your  captain  call  time-out  and 
discuss  in  a  gentlemanly  manner  with  the 
referee  the  situation,  insofar  as  the  rules 
cover  it. 

3.  Treat  the  visiting  team  coach  with  the 
same  friendly  attitude  that  you  would  hope 
for,  when  your  team  plays  on  an  opponent's 
court. 

4.  There  is  no  one  more  vitally  interested 
in  having  a  well-officiated  game  than  the 
official  himself.  A  basketball  official  is 
called  upon  to  make  many  judgment  decis- 
ions and  occasionally  he  will  make  mistakes. 
Usually,  however,  the  average  official  does 
not  make  the  number  of  mistakes  that  the 
average  coach  or  player  is  guilty  of  during 
the  course  of  a  game. 

5.  We  find  that  the  attitude  of  the  coach 
on  the  bench  either  encourages  good  spec- 
tator and  player  sportsmanship  or  throws 
fuel  on  the  fire  of  poor  sportsmanship  which 
we  are  attempting  to  eliminate.  If  the  coach 
is  in  the  habit  of  making  uncomplimentary 
gestures  every  time  the  official  calls  a  foul 
on  one  of  his  players,  then  you  can 
be  assured  that  the  patrons  of  his  team  will 
break  loose  in  their  loud  disapproval  of  the 

1.  South    Bountiful   Chorus,   at   Stake  Tabernacle. 

2.  The   Gold    and   Green    Ball   Queens    and    attendants 
from   Bakei-sfield,   California. 

3.  Queen  and  attendants  of  the   Gold  and  Green  Ball 
at  Gray's   Harbor  Mutual,  Aberdeen,   Washington. 

4.  The  crowning  of  the  Queen  of  the  Gold  and  Green 
Ball  held   in  Sevier  Stake. 

5.  Queen  and  attendants  of  Gold  and  Green  Ball  held 
in  Susanville    Branch    of   the    Nevada   District. 

6.  Queen   and  attendants  of  Provo   First   Ward,   Utah 
Stake,  Gold  and  Green  Ball. 

7.  North    Hollywood   Ward    Bee- Hive  Girls. 


46 


THE  IMPROVEMENT  ERA,  JANUARY,  1939 


decision.  This  condition  sometimes  leads  to 
worse  situations  of  the  court,  as  spectators 
exercise  a  tremendous  influence  in  determin- 
ing the  sportsmanship  attitude  or  the  lack 
of  it  among  the  contestants. 

6.  The  coach  should  make  efforts  prior 
to  the  opening  of  the  season  to  encourage 
good  spectator  sportsmanship.  The  coach 
should  stress  the  fact  that  it  is  unethical 
and  ungentlemanly  for  a  spectator  to  ex- 
press disapproval  in  a  vociferous  manner  of 
the  decision  of  an  official.  The  coach  also 
should  encourage  players  and  spectators  to 
regard  the  opposing  team's  players  as 
friendly  rivals,  who  happened  to  be  guests 
of  the  ward  or  stake,  and  not  as  hated  op- 
ponents. Making  disconcerting  noises 
when  an  opposing  player  is  attempting  a 
free  throw  and  booing  an  opponent  are  the 
principal  faults  in  unsportsmanlike  conduct. 

7.  Instill  in  your  players  that,  in  a  com- 
petitive sport  like  basketball,  it  is  necessary 
for  a  boy  or  young  man  to  mobilize  fre- 
quently, during  the  course  of  a  game,  all  the 
skill,  intelligence,  and  courage,  that  he 
possesses;  to  do  this  when  opposed  by  com- 
petent opponents  endowed  with  similar  abil- 
ity and  purpose;  to  do  this  with  a  spirit 
of  genuine  sportsmanship,  that  we  will  not 
permit  him  to  stoop  to  that  which  is  base 
and  mean  in  order  to  secure  some  advan- 
tage over  his  opponent. 

8.  Emphasize  to  your  players  that  when 
any  of  them  resort  to  unsportsmanlike  con- 
duct of  action  during  the  course  of  a  bas- 
ketball game,  he  injures  hundreds  of  per- 
sons other  than  himself.  Each  player  is  a 
representative  of  his  institution.  If  he 
violates  the  principles  of  good  sportsman- 
ship, he  brings  disgrace  upon  the  ward 
and  upon  the  stake. 


Katie  C.  Jensen,  chairman;  Freda  Jensen,  Grace 
Nixon  Stewart,  Helena  W.  Larson,  Florence 
B.  Plnnock. 

GOOD  NEWS! 

'HThe  Gleaner  Department  in  The  Im~ 
"*■  ptovement  Era  will  hereafter  be 
conducted  as  a  Suggestion  Box.  Mem- 
bers of  the  Gleaner  Committee  desire 
to  help  the  field  as  much  as  possible 
and  feel  that  if  they  answer  questions 
sent  by  you  on  your  own  problems  and 
also  print  suggestions  that  you  can 
make  because  of  your  experiences, 
■everyone  will  be  happy  about  it  and  will 
find  real  inspiration  in  this  new  material. 

Remember  that  it  will  take  about  two 
months  to  get  your  questions  into  the 
Era  after  you  write  them,  so  think 
ahead  and  let  us  have  them  and  also 
your  fine  suggestions.  Tell  us  what 
you  are  doing,  especially  those  things 
that  have  been  successful  and  helpful 
to  you. 

GLEANER  QUERIES 

1.  What  are  we  to  do  on  the  second 
comradery  night.  January  24th? 

This  is  an  excellent  time  to  present 
the  Gleaner  pins  to  the  girls  who  have 
applied  for  them.  Girls  appreciate  their 
pins  more  if  they  are  presented  to  them 


in  a  little  ceremony  rather  than  passed 
out  promiscuously  any  time.  ( See  page 
205  of  your  manual).  New  girls 
should  be  introduced  at  this  time,  too. 
The  most  important  thing  is  to  plan  a 
nice  social  evening  together.  Have  a 
program  and  light  refreshments. 

2.  What  requirements  must  a  girl  fill 
before  receiving  her  pin? 

The  Gleaner  Committee  has  specified 
only  that  girl  be  enrolled  in  the  Gleaner 
class  and  that  she  understands  before 
she  receives  the  pin  that  wearing  it 
means  she  is  trying  to  live  up  to  the 
Gleaner  Sheaf.  Some  wards,  however, 
make  the  requirements  of  a  certain  per- 
centage of  attendance,  participation  in 
an  assembly  program,  work  on  a  com- 
mittee, earning  money  for  the  pin,  etc. 
Use  your  own  plans,  but  don't  make 
them  too  difficult  to  achieve,  for  every 
girl  should  have  the  privilege  of  wearing 
a  pin. 

3.  Are  young  married  girls  of  Gleaner 
age  supposed  to  go  in  the  Senior 
class? 

No,  they  are  supposed  to  remain  in 
the  Gleaner  class  until  of  Senior  age, 
unless  local  conditions  make  this  in- 
advisable. In  such  case  they  should  go 
in  the  Senior  class  only  with  the  per- 
mission of  the  executives. 

4.  When  can  we  have  time  to  work 
on  our  Treasures  of  Truth  books? 

There  is  no  time  for  this  in  the 
Gleaner  Class,  but  some  groups  have 
become  so  interested  in  this  project  that 
they  are  meeting  at  each  other's  homes 
once  or  twice  a  month  on  some  night 
other  than  Tuesdays  or  on  Sunday  af- 
ternoons to  work  on  their  books. 

5.  May  we  have  a  Stake  Valentine 
Dance? 

The  M  Men  and  Gleaners  are  to  plan 
a  Valentine  party  for  their  own  Ward 
for  Tuesday  night,  February  14.  How- 
ever, you  might  have  a  stake  dance  on 
some  other  night  if  you  can  do  both 
well. 

SUGGESTIONS 

Tn  order  to  introduce  class  members 
*■  and  add  to  the  success  of  joint  work, 
one  ward  M  Men  Leader  asked  various 
people  to  change  seats  and  introduce 
themselves  to  their  neighbors  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  class.  It  was  arranged 
that  the  fellows  alternated  with  the 
girls  as  much  as  possible  and  all  sat  by 
someone  they  did  not  know  very  well. 
It  was  lots  of  fun  and  has  made  the 
young  people  like  to  meet  together  be- 
cause they  know  each  other  better. 

Another  ward  asked  members  whose 
birthdays  were  in  January  to  sit  in  the 
first  row,  February  second  row  and  so 
on.  This  gave  even  strangers  a  com- 
mon topic  for  conversation. 

Gleaner  Manuals  are  sold  out.  How- 
ever, you  can  get  the  lesson  material  by 
buying  an  M  Men  Manual.  In  order 
to  cover  the  Gleaner  special  activities, 
a  pamphlet  has  been  printed  including 
all  of  this  information  and  will  be  sent 


to  all  Gleaner  leaders  who  order  the 
M  Men  Manual. 


HThis  time  of  year  we  always  review 
■*■  our  past  and  try  to  pick  up  a  few 
broken  threads  and  mend  them.  These 
mends  are  resolves.  Will  you — and 
you — and  you — add  just  one  more  re- 
solve to  your  list?  Resolve  to  be  100% 
on  your  toes  as  Gleaner  and  M  Men 
officers?  To  do  this,  your  leadership 
meetings  must  be  worthwhile  and  help- 
ful. 

We  hope  you  have  found  Youth  and 
Its  Culture  just  what  you  need.  After 
all,  culture  is  the  art  of  knowing  ex- 
actly what  to  do  with  one's  self  at  all 
times.  Have  your  mutual  lessons  this 
year  helped  you  along  that  road  of 
knowing  exactly  what  to  do  with  your- 
selves? 

The  February  lesson,  "Poise  and 
Good  Manners  in  Public  Places"  is  es- 
pecially good.  Of  course  you  M  Men 
and  Gleaner  officers  are  thinking  and 
planning  for  this  lesson  already,  be- 
cause you  know  that  it  is  yours  to 
present  in  February.  You  stake  offi- 
cers, be  prepared  at  the  January  leader- 
ship meeting  to  give  some  good  helpful 
suggestions  to  the  ward  officers.  Have 
you  read  the  book,  The  Road  to  Cul- 
ture by  Charles  Gray  Shaw?  Your 
Life  magazine  for  December  contains 
the  book  in  a  condensed  form.  This 
lesson  for  the  seventh  of  February  may 
be  taught  effectively  by  demonstration. 
Young  couples  could  demonstrate  the 
correct  way  of  dancing,  entering  a 
room,  crossing  a  ballroom,  entering  a 
theatre,  etc.  Then,  too,  the  negative 
side  sometimes  shouts  the  lessons  louder 
than  the  positive.  A  few  of  the  don'ts 
in  the  lesson  could  be  dramatized.  This 
lesson  on  poise  and  good  manners  is 
one  of  the  most  important  ones  in  the 
manual.  A  good  lively  discussion 
could  follow  the  demonstration  if  lead- 
ing questions  were  asked. 

Have  you  appointed  committees  to 
work  on  your  Valentine  Party?  This 
is  to  be  a  ward  affair  and  the  executives 
have  given  the  Gleaners  and  M  Men 
the  responsibility  for  the  evening.  No 
lessons  have  been  outlined  for  Feb- 
ruary 14.  Plan  an  evening  to  be  long 
remembered,  M  Men  and  Gleaners. 
Suggestions  for  this  night  may  be  found 
in  the  manual  (page  14). 

Speaking  of  committees,  has  the  ban- 
quet committee  been  appointed  and  is 
it  at  work? 

A  happy  New  Year  is  our  wish  for 
every  M  Man  and  Gleaner. 

SOUTHERN  CALIFORNIA 
M  MEN-GLEANERS  CONVENE 
"PVelegates  from  San  Bernardino, 
^-*  Pasadena,  Hollywood,  Los  An- 
geles, and  Long  Beach  stakes,  together 
with  representatives  from  sections  of 
(Continued  on  page  48) 

47 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


(Continued  from  page  47) 
the  California  Mission  met  at  Long 
Beach  for  three  days,  from  December 
2  to  December  5,  in  the  first  annual 
M  Men  and  Gleaner  Girl  convention 
to  be  held  in  Southern  California. 
Conference  sessions  were  conducted  in 
the  spacious  concert  hall  of  the  muni- 
cipal auditorium.  An  historical  pageant 
to  which  the  public  was  invited  cul- 
minated a  full  program  of  luncheons, 
committee  meetings,  and  conference 
sessions. 


M.  Elmer  Christensen,  Chairman;  Mark  H.  Nichols. 
Elwood  G.  Winters. 

VANBALL 

TThe  Annual  Inter-council  Vanball 
A  Tournament  will  be  held  at  the 
Deseret  Gym,  Salt  Lake  City,  March 
3  and  4,  1939. 

Participation  in  the  official  competi- 
tive Athletic  Sport  for  Explorers  has 
been  much  greater  this  year  than  ever 
before.  With  keener  competition  and 
wider  representation,  this  year's  tourna- 
ment promises  to  be  the  best  one  ever 
conducted. 

Council  winners  who  will  partici- 
pate in  the  tournament  must  submit 
the  names,  ages,  scouting  rank,  and 
ward  affiliation  to  the  General  Board 
Y.  M.  M.  I.  A.,  50  North  Main,  Salt 
Lake  City,  by  February  20. 

SAFETY  SURVEYS 

HThe  Explorer  Theme-Project,  Safety 
Surveys,  should  be  intensively  pro- 
moted during  February,  1939.  Safety 
surveys  of  highways,  churches,  public 
buildings,  and  homes  should  be  thor- 
oughly conducted  and  the  results  sub- 
mitted to  proper  authorities.  Con- 
densed reports  of  such  activities  should 
also  be  sent  to  the  General  Board  of 
Y.  M.  M.  I.  A. 


^ 


umiou 


Marba  C.  Josephson,  chairman;  Lucile  T.  Buehner, 
Emily  H.  Bennett,  Angelyn  Warnick,  Evangeline 
T.   Beesley. 

A  new  day  is  always  a  happy  thing 
*^  to  have  before  us — and  a  whole 
New  Year  should  be  a  "joy  forever." 
It  offers  unlimited  opportunities  and 
hopes  to  the  girl  or  woman  who  is  young 
in  spirit  and  who  does  not  let  the  mis- 
takes and  disappointments  of  last  year 
blot  her  vision  for  the  promise  of  1939. 

Shall  we  as  Junior  leaders  make  new 
resolutions?  Best,  perhaps  to  call  them 
"plans."  The  most  satisfactory  plan- 
ning is  done  with  a  pencil  and  paper. 

First — ourselves — are  we  living  laws 
of  health  that  will  keep  us  "fit"  for 
our  work.  Let's  answer  it  "yes"  or 
"no,"  and  if  "no,"  let's  write  a  workable 
health  plan  that  will  keep  us  in  trim 
for  doing  a  good  job  and  doing  it  with 

48 


enthusiasm.  Then  are  we  "up"  pro- 
fessionally? Are  we  going  ahead  even 
a  little  on  our  teaching  ability?  Are 
we  alert  to  educational  systems,  do  we 
study  our  subject,  and  think  about  it — 
do  we  know  our  psychological  pat- 
terns? Again,  let's  answer  "yes"  or 
"no"  and  make  an  educational  plan  for 
ourselves.  And  last  (and  most  import- 
ant of  all)  are  we  near  to  our  Heav- 
enly Father — open  in  attitude  and  desire 
to  the  help  and  inspiration  which  He  is 
so  anxious  to  give  us?  Let's  make 
spiritual  plans  that  will  clear  divine 
channels  for  us  all. 

Secondly  —  others  —  have  we  our 
theme  in  mind  in  all  of  our  work?  These 
Junior  Girls  of  ours  are,  next  to  our 
own  families,  our  most  immediate  and 
important  "neighbors."  By  love  let's 
serve  them.  They  are  our  particular 
assignment  and  a  most  endearing  one, 
as  all  of  us  know.  Let's  plan  our 
service — let's  keep  it  to  1939,  to  the 
theme  and  to  the  Gospel  Message. 

It  seems  to  us  that  the  keynote  of 
1939  is  "speed" — we're  moving  faster 
scientifically,  technically  and  mechan- 
ically. Only  a  comparable  pace  spir- 
itually will  make  this  speed  serve  us 
in  life  instead  of  death. 

What  are  the  spiritual  implements 
for  handling  speed?  First,  control,  sec- 
ond, danger  signals,  and  third,  guid- 
ance. 

Control,  of  course,  means  self-control 
— control  of  moods,  fears,  irritations, 
appetites.  List  them  for  yourself.  Help 
your  girls  see  the  vitality  and  strength 
of  control  instead  of  its  inhibitions. 
Help  them  to  feel  smart  and  modern 
and  strictly  1939  in  being  spiritually 
prepared  for  "speed."  Is  this  any  help 
in  teaching  the  "Word  of  Wisdom?" 
Do  liquor  and  tobacco  entail  a  terrific 
loss  of  control,  and  are  you  serving  your 
girls  by  love  in  helping  them  see  this 
in  a  modern,  young  sense? 

Now — danger  signals — how  shall  we 
present  them?  It  seems  to  us  that  here 
again  is  a  grand  opportunity  to  dram- 
atize for  Junior  girls  the  significance 
of  "light".  All  over  the  country,  roads 
are  equipped  with  "reflectors"  which, 
when  lit  by  our  head  lights,  give  back 
the  guides — -"curve  ahead,"  "winding 
road,"  "slow"  and  so  forth.  Every  ex- 
perience of  our  lives  should  be  made  of 
this  "reflective  material"  so  that  when 
a  younger  or  less  experienced  person's 
searchlight  for  truth  is  turned  upon  us, 
every  force  of  our  life  will  inevitably 
give  off  these  warnings  or  encouraging 
signals  that  will  "light  up"  the  road 
for  others.  Have  you  sung  that  lovely 
song,  "The  Builder"?  Be  sure  and  do 
it.  And  you  will  have  another  graphic 
pattern  for  your  own  life  and  for  your 
Junior  girls. 

And  what  about  guidance?  All  of 
the  January  Gospel  lessons  are  on 
guidance — a  great  essential  in  the  New 
Year  of  a  speedy  world.  Let's  try  to 
give  our  Junior  girls  a  real  feeling  for 
the  Priesthood — that  it  is  authority 
from  God  Himself.     Let's  show  them 


their  guides  and  their  helpers — prayer, 
good  books,  good  friends — no  service 
could  be  more  potent  in  1939. 

We  hope  that  you  have  had  or  are 
having  a  delightful  holiday  party?  We 
hope  your  1939  plans  include  a  working 
calendar  correlating  all  your  endeavors 
and  that  you  have  been  able  to  put 
"fun"  and  joy  into  your  work.  We'd 
love  to  see  some  of  your  plans  and  to 
hear  of  your  successes  and  problems. 
Won't  you  write  us  and  help  us  in  the 
practical  phases  of  our  own  New  Year's 
work?  A  glorious  New  Year  to  all  of 
you — not  only  on  the  first  day  but 
throughout  the  entire  span — is  the  wish 
of  the  Junior  Committee. 


D,  E.  Hammond,  Chairman;   Philo  T.   Farnsworth, 
Arthur  E.    Peterson. 

Doy  Scout  Week  for  all  L,  D.  S. 
,*J  Scout  and  Explorer  Troops  should 
commence  with  appropriate  exercises 
Feb.  5,  1939.  The  Sunday  evening 
service  should  feature  the  Boy  Scout 
and  Explorer  departments  of  the  M. 
I.  A. 

Since  this  is  the  first  Anniversary 
Week  since  the  Jubilee  of  Scouting  in 
the  Church,  the  program  in  each  ward 
might  well  depict  the  progress  of 
Scouting  under  L.  D.  S.  sponsorship. 
The  history  of  Scouting  in  the  ward  and 
stake  should  be  reviewed  and  objec- 
tives for  the  future  adopted. 

The  program  should  be  well  planned 
and  executed.  Members  of  the  Boy 
Scout  and  Explorer  Troops  should  par- 
ticipate upon  the  program  in  the  form 
of  speeches,  dramatizations,  choruses, 
or  other  musical  renditions. 


Ethel  S.  Anderson,  chairman;  Margaret  N.  Wells, 
Bertha  K.  Tingey,  Ileen  Ann  Waspe,  Lucy  T. 
Andersen,   Caroline  Adams. 

/~\nce  again  a  New  Year  lies  ahead. 
^™/  Along  with  the  other  resolutions 
you  make  for  the  coming  year  why  not 
include  some  that  pertain  to  your  Bee- 
Hive  work.  Ask  yourself  a  few  ques- 
tions such  as  the  following  and  per- 
haps you  will  be  able  better  to  judge 
how  effective  you  are  making  your 
Bee-Hive  program:  Am  I  Bee-Hive 
conscious  the  week  through  or  just 
for  a  few  hours  Tuesday  night?  Do  I 
devote  enough  time  to  preparing  my 
work?  Am  I  alert  for  supplementary 
material  concerning  the  adolescent  girl 
that  I  may  better  understand  my  girls? 
How  is  the  order  and  discipline  in  my 
swarm?  Have  I  done  all  I  could  to 
arrange  for  adequate  and  pleasing 
equipment  for  my  Bee-Hive  room? 
What  have  I  contributed  to  the  Stake 
Swarm? 

Now  is  the  time  to  start  planning  for 
{Concluded  on  page  49) 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


the  March  Sunday  night  conjoint.  The 
following  is  a  suggested  program  for 
that  occasion.  You  will  note  it  is  slight- 
ly modified  and  in  greater  detail  than 
the  one  in  the  Executives'  Manual. 

1.  Preliminary  Music:      Bee-Hive  Songs. 

2.  Bee-Hive  Call  by  Bugle  or  Organ. 

3.  Bee-Hive  Girls  inarch  up  the  aisles  to 
soft,  appropriate  chapel  music.  Re- 
main standing  and  sing  the  Bee-Hive 
Call. 

4.  Song  Service:  "I'll  Serve  the  Lord 
While  I  am  Young,"  "Let  the  Holy 
Spirit  Guide,"  "Sunshine  in  the  Soul," 
"Have  I  Done  Any  Good  in  the 
World  Today."  (Choose  any  two  of 
the  above.) 

5.  Prayer:     Bee- Hive  Girl. 

6.  Chorus  by  Bee-Hive  Girls— "I  Hear 
the  Bees  a  Humming,"  "Spinning 
Song." 

7.  Words  of  Welcome:  Ward  Y.  W. 
M.   I.   A.   President  or  Ward  Bishop. 

8.  Choral  Reading:  The  Bee-Hive  Prom- 
ise with  the  Salute.  (Girls  should  have 
Bands. ) 

9.  Building  the  Band:  A  blue  paper 
Band  should  be  fastened  where  all  the 
congregation  can  see  it.  A  Bee-Hive 
girl  pins  on  the  awards  (which  have 
been  cut  from  stiff  paper  or  cardboard) 
on  the  Band  as  other  girls,  following 
the  outline  below  explain  and  tell  how 
they  may  be  earned.  The  Bee-Hive 
girl  who  gives  the  talk  which  precedes 
the  placing  of  the  awards  on  the  band 
should  conclude  by  turning  or  pointing 
to  it  and  stating  that  having  completed 
the  requirements  she  may  now  place 
the  violets  (substitute  other  awards)  up- 
on her  band.  When  completed  the 
Band  should  resemble  the  one  on  the 
cover  of  the  Handbook.  You  may, 
of  course,  use  other  symbols. 

a.  "What  our  Emblem  stands  for."  The 
purpose  and  ideals  of  the  Bee-Hive 
Girls'  organization  presented  by  a 
Bee-Hive  girl.  (At  the  conclusion 
the  brown  bee-hive  is  pinned  on  the 
Band.) 

b.  "My  Trial  Flights."  A  Builder  in 
the  Hive  gives  the  requirements  of 
the  Trial  Flight  and  tells  about  one 
of  the  Trial  Flights  she  enjoyed. 
(Hexagonal  Cell  is  pinned  on.) 

c.  "Filling  Cells."  A  Builder  in  the 
Hive  qives  a  short  statement  of  how 
she  filled  a  Foundation  or  Structural 
Cell  and  the  requirements  of  the 
Builder's  Rank.  (Two  violets  are 
pinned  on.) 

d.  Builder's  Purpose. 

e.  "What  our  symbols  do  for  us."  Ex- 
planation of  individual  and  Swarm 
symbols  by  Gatherer  of  Honey. 
(Symbols  are  pinned  on.) 

f.  "Honey  Gatherer's  Song."  (Gold 
bee  is  pinned  on.) 

g.  "Makinq  a  Bee-Line. "  A  Guardian 
of  the  Treasurer  may  tell  about  the 
Bee-Line  she  has  most  enjoyed  mak- 
ing, and  other  requirements  for  this 
Rank.      (Bee-Lines  are  pinned  on.) 

h.  Guardian's  Resolve. 

i.  "What  an  Honor  Badge  symbolizes" 
and  requirements  necessary  to  be 
an  Honor  Bee-Hive  Girl.  An  ex- 
planation, demonstration  or  exhibit 
of  the  accomplishments  for  an  Honor 
Badge.  It  would  be  well  to  have 
this  given  by  an  Honor  Bee-Hive 
Girl  of  last  year.  ( Honor  Badges  are 
then  pinned  on.) 
10.   Instrumental    trio   by    Bee-Hive    Girls. 


Suggestions:  Brahms  "Lullaby."  "Min- 
uet in  G,"  Beethoven.  "Melody  in  F," 
Rubenstein. 

11.  "As  I  have  seen  the  Bee-Hive  Girls  on 
the  Road  to  Happiness." 

a.  Personal  observation  of  their  activ- 

ities. 

b.  How  they  need  your  help. 

c.  Their  Theme  Project:  "I  will  taste 
the  sweetness  of  service  by  neigh- 
borly acts   for  children." 

d.  Call  for  responses  from  the  three 
Ranks. 

e.  One  girl  from  each  Rank  tells  of 
the  joy  they  have  found  in  carrying 
out  the  Theme-project. 

12.  "A    Prayer,"    by    Bee-Hive    Girls    (p. 
141). 

13.  Closing  prayer:     Bee-Hive  Girl. 

It  is  always  a  pleasure  to  hear  from 
you  and  the  special  activities  of  your 
Bee-Hive  Swarms.  The  following  re- 
port was  received  from  Sadie  Soren- 
son,  Stake  Bee-Keeper,  Benson  Stake: 

The  Benson  Stake  Bee-Hive  Buzz  was 
held  October  17th  at  the  stake  tabernacle 
in  Richmond.  During  the  evening  stunts 
and  musical  numbers  were  presented  by 
the  girls  from  each  ward  in  the  stake.  As 
a  special  event  of  the  program  recognition 
was  given  to  three  stake  and  two  ward  Bee- 
Keepers  who  had  become  Honor  Bee-Keep- 
ers during  the  summer.  At  the  close  of  the 
program  refreshments  were  served  to  one 
hundred  forty  girls  and  their  Bee-Keepers. 
The  girls  then  repeated  the  "Builder's  Pur- 
pose," the  "Guardian's  Resolve,"  and  sang 
"The  Honey  Gatherer's  Song." 


Lehi's  Route  to  America 

(Concluded  [com  page  28) 

Those  involved  in  that  stage  of  the 
migration,  if  Lehi's  descendants, 
moved  westward  to  the  Islands,  not 
eastward,  coming  immediately  from 
the  Americas,  rather  than  directly 
from  the  East  Indies.  Naturally  the 
islands  adjacent  to  America  would 
be  given  first  consideration  in  select- 
ing their  new  homes. 


A  Further  Point 


I 


f  the  relationship  of  the  Lehi 
colony  to  the  Hawaiians  is  accept- 
ed, there  is  further  evidence  that 
Lehi  followed  the  path  defined,  and 
in  particular  that  he  entered  the  Bay 
of  Bengal  as  a  step  in  his  migration 
to  the  new  land.  Sugar  cane,  claim- 
ed to  be  a  native  of  Bengal,18  was 
known  in  India  prior  to  327  B.  C.,17 
only  270  years  after  the  Lehi  colony 
passed  en  route  to  America,  and  it 
is  probable  that  it  was  cultivated 
there  well  in  advance  of  that  date. 
Also  it  is  claimed  that  it  was  culti- 
vated exclusively  in  India  until  the 
5th  century,18  A.  D.  Yet  it  was 
found  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands  by 
Captain  Cook  in  1778. 

10Dr.  Geo.  Thomas  Surface,  (citing  Karl  Ritter, 
German  scientist)  in  The  Story  of  Sugar  (D.  Appleton 
&  Co.,    1910,   page    15). 

i7Industrial  and  Engineering  Chemistry,  Vol.  27.  p. 
989,  Sept.,    1935. 


Traditionally,18  at  least,  the  cane 
was  carried  to  the  islands  by  early 
Polynesian  immigrants,  ancestors  of 
modern  Hawaiians. 

It  would  not  be  difficult  to  believe 
that  Lehi,  while  en  route  to  Amer- 
ica, visited  the  Bengal  shore,  or  ad- 
jacent islands,  and  that  he  added  to 
his  limited  cargo,  growing  sugar 
cane  plants,  cuttings,  or  perhaps 
even  seeds,  which  in  some  varieties 
are  fertile,  which  later  were  a 
source  of  sugar  for  his  people  in 
America.  Naturally,  if  these  plants 
were  available,  new  colonizers  leav- 
ing the  Americas  would  take  with 
them  the  necessary  starts,  and  it  is 
proposed  that  groups  migrating  from 
continental  America  to  the  islands 
carried  cane  with  them,  ultimately 
establishing  the  plant  in  many 
islands,  and  particularly  in  the 
Hawaiian  group. 

The  fact  that  early  explorers  in 
the  Americas  did  not  report  the  dis- 
covery of  sugar  cane  need  not  be 
considered  contradictory  to  the 
theory  presented,  since  the  native 
American  discovered  by  explorers 
in  the  late  15th  or  the  early  16th 
century  was  poorly  adapted  to 
agricultural  pursuits.  It  would  not 
be  surprising  to  learn  then  that  an  in- 
dustry depending  on  agriculture 
had  wholly  disappeared  as  the  early 
civilization  waned  in  America. 

Conclusion 

/~\N  the  basis  of  material  which  has 
been  presented,  it  is  not  difficult 
to  harmonize  the  account  of  the  jour- 
neying of  the  Polynesian  progeni- 
tors with  the  story  of  Lehi's  travels. 
It  appears  probable,  therefore,  that 
Lehi  followed  the  ocean  currents  to 
the  new  land,  as  outlined  above,  and 
furthermore,  that  he  made  the  jour- 
ney in  stages,  stopping  perhaps  only 
for  very  brief  periods  at  the  various 
places  perpetuated  in  the  traditions 
and  folklore  of  the  Hawaiians.  This 
information  makes  it  possible  to  out- 
line, tentatively  at  least,  the  possible 
path  of  the  journey,  as  shown  in  the 
accompanying  chart  (p.  26).  Since 
the  early  stages  of  the  journey  ap- 
pear to  have  followed  the  southwest 
monsoon  drift,  it  might  be  postulated 
that  the  Lehi  colony  embarked  in 
their  craft  and  left  the  Arabian 
peninsula  in  the  spring  or  early  sum- 
mer, some  twenty-five  centuries  ago. 

18Mr.  R.  S.  Kuykendall,  Assistant  Professor  of 
History,  The  University  of  Hawaii,  letter  to  Dr.  C. 
Douglas  Barnes,  May  15,  1936:  "I  have  talked  with 
members  of  the  Departments  of  Botany  and  Anthro- 
pology here  at  the  University  and  with  one  of  our 
local  anthropologists  not  connected  with  the  University, 
and  they  seem  to  agree  that  the  evidence  indicates 
(they  would  not  say  'proves')  that  sugar  cane  is  not 
indigenous  to  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  but  that  it  was 
brought  here  by  early  Polynesian  immigrants,  ancestors 
of   the   modern  Hawaiians." 

49 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


An  Imperial  Luau 

( Concluded  from  page  25 ) 

The  occasion  was  a  grand  affair. 
Colossal!  Gigantic!  The  biggest 
of  its  kind  since  the  days  of  the 
ancient  kings  of  Hawaii,  and  per- 
haps not  surpassed  then.  The 
weather  was  ideal;  the  air  full  of 
music.  Never  was  there  such  an 
entertainment  in  all  the  land! 

Many  were  reminded  of  by-gone 
days,  of  the  time  of  heroes,  eight  or 
nine  feet  tall,  who  wielded  spears 
ten  yards  long,  and  warriors  with 
feather  helmets  of  red  and  yellow; 
of  a  time  when  our  people  lived  in 
grass  huts  and  gray  old  bards  sat  at 
their  doors  to  chant  songs  of  love 
and  praise;  of  the  days  when 
George  Q.  Cannon  came  to  these 
islands  and  found  here  men  and 
women  of  faith  and  great  valor,  of 
men  who  gave  their  all  for  the 
Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Today,  their  children,  their  chil- 
dren's children,  and  Saints  from 
other  lands  are  to  build  here  a  tab- 
ernacle unto  the  Lord,  where  thou- 
sands will  come  to  hear  the  word 
of  God. 

Honolulu  is  to  become  the  spear- 
head of  Mormonism  in  the  Pacific 
area.  The  tabernacle  will  bring 
additional  beauty  and  increased  in- 
spiration to  a  community  already 
beautiful;  and  full  of  kindness  and 
love. 

We  are  grateful  to  the  Lord  that 
our  luau  was  a  success. 

The  Protestors  of 
Christendom 

(Continued  from  page  21) 

Though  there  had  been  two  cen- 
turies of  growing  criticism  of  the 
church,  Luther  nevertheless  began 
his  work  as  a  faithful  son  of  the 
church;  he  did  not  desire  to  found 
a  new  church,  but  only  to  correct 
certain  abuses  in  the  old  church  and, 
as  he  hoped,  according  to  her  own 
standards.  The  submission  of  cer- 
tain beliefs  and  practices  to  the  tests 
of  scripture  and  reason  as  he  under- 
stood them  gradually  drove  him  out 
of  the  Church. 

Chortly  after  Luther's  birth  at 
°  Eisleben  (Nov.  10,  1483),  his 
father  settled  at  Mansfeld,  a  rich 
mining  town.  In  Mansfeld,  Hans 
Luther  acquired  economic  independ- 
ence. However,  Luther's  early  life 
was  spent  in  poverty  and  he  was 
subjected  to  severe  discipline  both 
at  home  and  in  school.  The  people 
of  the  town  were  superstitious  and 
Luther  heard  stories  of  sorcery  and 
50 


The  Story  of  Our  Hymns   Melchizedek  Priesthood 


( Concluded  from  page  22 ) 
Now,  concerning  the  state  of  the  soul 
between  death  and  the  resurrection — Be- 
hold, it  has  been  made  known  unto  me  by 
an  angel,  that  the  spirits  of  all  men,  as  soon 
as  they  are  departed  from  this  mortal  body, 
yea,  the  spirits  of  all  men,  whether  they  be 
good  or  evil,  are  taken  home  to  that  God 
who  gave  them  life.  And  then  shall  it  come 
to  pass,  that  the  spirits  of  those  who  are 
righteous  are  received  into  a  state  of  hap- 
piness, which  is  called  paradise,  a  state  of 
rest,  a  state  of  peace,  where  they  shall  rest 
from  all  their  troubles,  and  from  all  care 
and  sorrow.     (Alma  40:11-12.) 

George  Careless  added  to  the  ar- 
tistic simplicity  of  this  hymn  when 
he  wrote  the  tune  to  "Rest,  Rest  For 
the  Weary  Soul."  It  was  probably 
conceived  at  the  burial  of  a  friend 
and  written  in  the  choir  loft  of  the 
Tabernacle,  where  he  often  com- 
posed his  music.  The  diapason  of 
the  great  pipes  of  the  organ  must 
have  inspired  the  bass  in  the  har- 
mony of  the  last  line  of  this  truly 
beautiful  song.  To  hear  it  sung,  on 
the  hillside,  in  the  red  glow  of  an 
evening's  setting  sun,  carries  one 
close  to  the  gates  of  paradise,  where 
the  righteous  await  the  glories  of  the 
resurrection.  Truly,  Henry  W. 
Naisbitt  and  George  Careless,  na- 
tives of  England,  in  the  combination 
of  their  poetic  and  musical  genius, 
have  given  solace  to  thousands  of 
bereaved  Saints,  and  added  a  pre- 
cious    contribution     to     Latter-day 

Saint  hymnody. 

■  »  ■ 

witchcraft,  of  evil  spirits  and  devils. 
He  grew  up  in  the  belief  that  the 
Emperor  ruled  by  divine  right  and 
that  the  pope  stood  at  the  head  of 
the  church  of  God.  His  deepest  re- 
ligious feeling  was  fear  and  the 
greatest  problem  how  sinful  man 
could  be  reconciled  with  God  and 
escape  His  punishments. 

After  frequenting  the  village 
school,  Luther  attended  school  for 
one  year  in  Magdeburg,  then  for 
three  years  (1498-1501)  at  Eisen- 
ach, where  he  acquired  Latin,  then 
the  indispensable  language  for  uni- 
versity work.  He  also  came  into  inti- 
mate contact  with  the  people.  At 
Eisenach  he  contributed  to  his  own 
support  by  singing  in  the  streets  and 
in  the  church  choir.  At  the  age  of 
eighteen,  he  left  Eisenach  to  attend 
what  was  then  the  foremost  German 
university  of  Erfurt.  As  a  univer- 
sity student,  he  was  outstanding, 
and,  in  1 502,  he  took  his  Bachelor's 
and,  in  1505,  his  Master's  degree. 

Luther  was  a  pious  member  of  the 
Roman  Church,  as  were  his  parents. 
Erfurt  possessed  a  drop  of  the  blood 


( Concluded  from  page  38 ) 
General  Tithing  Office — for  every  per- 
son who  is  not  able  to  come  must  send 
some  one  for  them — and  have  that  time 
profitably  employed,  there  will  be  but 
little  more  to  seek  for  their  sustenance. 
Get  a  house  in  your  Ward,  and  if  you 
have  two  sisters,  or  two  brethren,  put 
them  in  it,  make  them  comfortable,  find 
them  food  and  clothinq,  and  fuel,  and 
direct  the  time  now  spent  coming  to 
this  Tithing  Office  wisely  in  profitable 
labor.  (Brigham  Young,  Journal  of 
Discourses,  12:114.) 

12.  Some  people  have  so  much  faith 
that  although  the  grasshoppers  are 
around  in  such  vast  numbers,  they  are 
confident  of  an  abundant  harvest,  be- 
cause of  the  movements  made  to  gather 
the  poor  this  season.  They  say  the 
Lord  would  not  inspire  His  servants  to 
bring  the  poor  from  the  nations  that 
they  might  starve.  And  so  believing, 
they  will  go  and  sell  the  last  bushel  of 
wheat  for  comparatively  nothing,  trust- 
ing in  God  to  provide  for  their  wants. 
My  faith  is  not  of  this  kind;  it  is  rea- 
sonable. If  the  Lord  gives  good  crops 
this  season,  and  tells  us  to  lay  up  that 
abundance,  I  do  not  think  He  will  in- 
crease His  blessings  upon  us  if  we  fool- 
ishly squander  those  He  has  already 
given  us.  I  believe  He  will  bless  the 
earth  for  His  people's  sake;  and  I  will 
till  it  and  try  to  get  a  crop  from  it; 
but  if  I  neglect  to  take  advantage  of 
the  goodness  of  the  Lord,  or  misuse  or 
treat  lightly  His  mercies,  I  need  not 
expect  that  they  will  be  continued  upon 
me  to  the  same  extent.  (Brigham 
Young,  Journal  of  Discourses,  12:219- 
220.) 

of  Christ  and  each  year  celebrated 
the  Festival  of  the  Holy  Blood.  In 
1502,  a  Papal  Jubilee  was  celebrated 
in  the  city.  There  were  processions 
full  of  pomp;  relics  were  displayed, 
and  indulgences  sold.  Undoubted- 
ly, Luther  took  part  in  the  festival 
and,  probably,  with  no  thought  of 
dissent. 

Luther  had  gone  to  Erfurt  to  study 
law,  but  had  so  far  devoted  himself 
to  scholastic  philosophy  and  human- 
istic studies.  The  death  of  a  friend 
and  a  narrow  escape  from  death  in 
a  thunder-storm  on  his  own  part 
caused  him  to  enter  the  monastery  at 
Erfurt  (1505).  In  1507,  he  was 
ordained  a  priest.  In  1508,  he  was 
called  as  professor  of  philosophy  to 
the  University  of  Wittenberg, 
founded  six  years  earlier. 

It  was  probably  in  1509  that  he 
was  sent  on  a  mission  for  his  order 
to  Rome.  When  he  came  in  sight  of 
the  city,  "he  fell  upon  the  earth, 
raised  his  hands,  and  exclaimed, 
'Hail  to  thee,  holy  Rome'."18 

^Kostlin,   Martin    Luther,   ch.   2. 

(To  be  Continued) 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    193  9 


UTAH'S  PIONEER  WOMEN  DOCTORS 


(Continued  from  page  17) 

those  whose  need  is  great.  Their  in- 
fluence was  carried  so  far  by  those 
who  came  to  them  for  study.  With 
utter  simplicity  of  heart  and  man- 
ner, but  with  sublime  faith  in  the 
good  that  their  disciples  could  do, 
Utah's  pioneer  women  doctors  im- 
parted their  knowledge  to  their  stu- 
dent classes.  And  through  the  dark 
hours  of  night  as  well  as  the  long, 
busy  days  of  their  practice,  they — 
who  were  often  less  able  to  stand 
upon  their  feet  than  their  patients 
themselves — ministered  to  the  sick, 
the  unfortunate,  and  the  needy. 


PART  ONE 

Romania  B.  Pratt 

"Cor  what  a  bountiful  harvest  Brig- 
ham  Young  sowed  when  he  set 
apart  Romania  Bunnell  Pratt  to 
study  medicine!  .  .  Small  of  stature, 
irregular  in  feature,  brown-haired, 
brilliant-eyed,  Romania  Pratt  sat 
beside  her  husband  in  the  Salt 
Lake  Tabernacle  at  a  Confer- 
ence meeting,  1873,  and  heard  the 
voice  of  Brigham  Young,  her  proph- 
et-leader, as  it  rang  through  the  vast 
hall:  "From  fertile  lands  we  came 
to  these  sterile  plains  amid  the 
mountains  ..."  he  said.  Brigham 
Young  was  aging  now,  but  there 
was  work  yet  for  him  to  do.  In  this 
gathering  he  had  a  special  message 
for  the  sisters.  "If  some  women 
had  the  privilege  of  studying  they 
would  make  as  good  mathema- 
ticians as  any  man.  We  believe 
that  women  are  useful  not  only  to 
sweep  houses,  wash  dishes  and 
raise  babies,  but  that  they  should 
study  law  ...  or  physic  ..." 

Physic!  Romania's  spirit  was  at 
once  host  to  the  thought.  Her 
heart  responded  within  her  at  the 
very  suggestion  that  women  could 
prepare  themselves  for  a  life  of 
medicine.  How  well  she  would  like 
to  be  a  doctor! 

But  how  much  there  was  to  in- 
terfere with  that  course!  Could  it 
be  accomplished?  she  asked  herself 
as  she  sat  tense  and  alert  for  every 
word  that  might  follow  this  mo- 
mentous statement.  Suddenly  a 
great  well  of  silence  opened  with- 
in her.  She  herself  had  so  re- 
cently gone  through  the  valley  of 
the  shadow  to  bear  her  fifth  son, 
she  seemed  very  close  to  the  import 
of  this  meeting.  In  her  memory  the 
ordeal  of  travail  was  still  clear.  Her 
whole  being  was  tuned  to  this  mes- 


sage, to  the  remarkable  statements 
that  were  issuing  from  the  lips  of 
this  inspired  man:  "The  time  has 
come  for  women  to  come  forth  as 
doctors  in  these  valleys  of  the 
mountains ..." 

Why  Romania  saw  herself  in  the 
light  of  the  chosen,  she  did  not 
know.  But  it  seemed  to  her  as 
though  Brigham  Young  had  already 
released  her  from  the  usual  path  of 
life  to  minister  at  the  bedside  of  the 
sick. 

The  usual  path  of  life!  Hers  was 
one  of  responsibility.  .  .  .  She  had 
five  little  boys;  the  eldest  was  en- 
tering his  teens  .  .  .  but  the  young- 
est was  an  infant.  Had  she  lost  her 
reason  to  think  of  herself  in  this 
light?     "No!"  she  said. 

And  then  her  thoughts  ran  on: 
"The  man  to  whom  I  am  listening 
does  not  speak  from  his  heart  alone. 
As  surely  as  the  river  of  Galilee 
flows  from  the  heights  into  the  blue 
lake  of  the  plain  below,  the  words 
of  Brigham  Young  are  flowing  from 
a  divine  source  through  my  being. 
I  shall  study  medicine,  and  I  will  not 
delay!   .  .  ." 

"Parley,"  she  said  that  night  af- 
ter they  had  talked  the  matter  over 
in  their  home,  "It  is  such  a  tremen- 
dous step.    My  baby.  ..." 

But  Parley  encouraged  Romania 
to  pursue  this  course. 

There  was  a  special  mission  that 
he  himself  was  most  desirous  of 
performing.  His  father,  the  Apostle 
Parley  P.  Pratt,  had  written  his 
autobiography,  and  had  dedicated  a 
large  sum  of  money  to  its  publica- 
tion. Parley  had  been  living  for  the 
day  when  he  could  fulfill  this  wish. 
And  now,  strangely  enough  he  saw 
both  himself  and  his  wife  carrying 
into  effect  their  great  desires. 

'T'he  baby  stirred.  His  cry  was 
hardly  past  that  of  an  infant's. 
It  went  straight  to  Romania's  heart. 
But  even  as  the  baby  wailed,  Ro- 
mania recalled  her  mother's  strug- 
gle for  the  sake  of  the  Gospel.  And 
she  knew  that  this  great  woman 
would  help  her  to  further  its  cause. 
Surely,  Esther  would  care  for  all  of 
her  little  boys,  and  no  harm  would 
befall  the  baby. 

She  recalled  other  times  when  her 
mother's  role  had  indeed  been  he- 
roic. Swiftly  the  memories  of  a 
lifetime  flashed  before  her.  And  she 
thought  of  the  earliest  of  them  all  as 
the  solemn  voice  of  her  father  came 


back  to  her  from  the  close  of  one 
momentous  day: 

"Esther,  is  it  done?" 

"Yes,  Luther,  it  is,  ...  '  His 
wife  had  gone  down  into  the  waters 
of  baptism  to  become  a  despised 
Mormon. 

Why  the  tones  were  hushed  the 
baby  Manie  did  not  know.  Three 
years  of  life  were  not  enough  to 
tell  her  that  it  was  an  awesome 
deed  for  a  woman  to  take  such  a 
step  in  advance  of  her  husband,  nor 
why  the  harmony  that  came  to  their 
home  when  her  father's  immersion 
followed  was  also  reefed  about 
with  terrific  anxiety.  But  the  Bun- 
nells  traveled  the  badgered  course 
of  other  Mormons  in  moving  from 
settlement  to  settlement. 

Once  again  the  temple  under 
construction  in  Nauvoo  came  be- 
fore Romania's  eyes.  She  could 
see  the  glistening  white  font  sup- 
ported by  the  twelve  oxen.  "Mar- 
ble font!     White  marble  oxen!" 

Again,  as  she  sat  before  the  fire 
in  the  tiny  house  with  Parley,  the 
sound  of  martial  music  rang  through 
her  ears.  She  was  fired  with  the 
playing  of  the  flutes  as  she  had  been 
when  the  Mormon  Battalion  march- 
ed from  Winter  Quarters  on  their 
dire  way  to  Mexico. 

Romania  did  not  see  those  tat- 
tered men  in  the  lacerating  condi- 
tion of  their  return.  Had  she  done 
so  her  spirit  would  have  been 
marked  also  with  the  anguish  of 
their  suffering — her  heart  was  al- 
ways open  to  compassion. 

Her  parents  longed  to  gather 
with  the  Saints  in  Utah,  but  they 
were  forced  to  return  to  the  banks 
of  the  Mississippi.  Romania  was 
their  only  living  child.  Esther  was 
expecting  another  baby,  and  no 
chance  could  be  taken  with  her 
health.  Yet,  even  after  the  little 
Josephine  was  born,  the  Bunnells 
could  not  leave  for  the  West.  They 
had  no  money.  Reluctantly,  they 
returned  to  the  land  of  Luther's 
fathers  in  Ohio.  Here,  two  sons 
were  born. 

At  last,  with  one  desperate  hope 
of  making  the  migration  possible, 
Luther  left  his  family  and  went  to 
the  gold  fields  of  California  to  try 
for  the  stake  that  would  make  pos- 
sible their  dreams. 

He  found  his  gold;  his  pay-dirt 
glittered  with  it.  But  his  family 
never  saw  him  again.  He  died  of 
fever  among  his  diggings.  The 
recollection  of  the  years  that  fol- 
(Continued  on  page  52) 

51 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


UTAH'S  PIONEER  WOMEN  DOCTORS 


( Continued  from  page  5 1 ) 

lowed  brought  the  tears  now  to  Ro- 
mania's eyes.  Esther  sacrificed  for 
her  during  that  period  of  her  life. 
Luther  had  cached  his  treasure  so 
well  nothing  could  be  learned  of  it. 
But  poverty  did  not  deter  Roma- 
nia's attendance  at  a  female  semi- 
nary in  Indiana  where  the  family 
had  moved. 

It  came  to  Romania  in  this  mo- 
ment how  fortunate  it  was  that  she 
had  received  her  education.  Of 
what  avail  would  her  desire  for  a 
life  of  medicine  be  without  those 
years  in  the  Seminary? 

Curiously  enough,  and  though 
years  passed,  a  male  relative  event- 
ually found  Luther's  treasure.  Had 
the  widow's  guardian  prevailed, 
however,  she  would  have  taken 
none  of  it  to  Utah.  "The  Mormons 
themselves  will  be  the  first  to  rob 
you  of  it,"  he  had  said.  But  no  protest 
could  daunt  the  fervor  that  lived 
in  Esther  Bunnell's  breast.  Pur- 
chasing an  outfit,  she,  with  her  four 
children,  commenced  the  exodus  to 
the  Valley  in  1855.  Romania  was 
sixteen  years  old. 

There  were  many  admirers  in  In- 
diana with  whom  she  had  to  part. 
She  remembered  with  a  smile  how 
happy  her  mother  had  been  to  get 
her  away  from  "Babylon,"  where 
her  blooming  womanhood  was  an 
attraction  to  the  young  men  of  he* 
acquaintance.  Romania  had  tingled 
with  delight  at  the  very  thought  of 
seeing  the  "Promised  Land."  The 
trek  was  one  of  endless  pleasure  to 
her.  Her  heart  sang  with  antici- 
pation every  mile  of  the  way.  But 
no  disappointment  ever  equalled  the 
one  that  assailed  her  when  she 
reached  the  brow  of  Little  Moun- 
tain. As  she  looked  out  over  the 
high-walled  valley,  the  vision  failed 
to  impress  her  with  its  glory. 
Where  was  the  city  of  shining  tow- 
ers and  flashing  metallic  cupolas  of 
which  she  had  dreamed?  When  she 
learned  that  the  few  black  splotch- 
es on  the  plain  far  below  represent- 
ed the  City  of  Zion,  she  thought 
that  she  did  not  know  what  Zion 
meant.  But  faith  whispered,  and  the 
beauty  of  baptism  comforted  her. 

Privation  followed  the  arrival  of 
the  Bunnells.  To  add  to  the  hard- 
ship of  becoming  established,  fam- 
ine was  upon  the  land.  The  crick- 
ets descended;  the  streams  them- 
selves were  thirsty.  But  her  fam- 
ily was  not  entirely  without  bless- 
ings. She  was  chosen  to  teach  in 
Brigham  Young's  school. 
52 


"I'll  go  to  President  Young  and 

ask  him  for  his  blessing  now,"  she 

thought.    "As  he  set  me  apart  then, 

he     will     again.  .  .  .  Where     the 

money  will  come  from  I  do  not  know. 

But  I  must  have  faith.  ...  I  must 

have  faith.  ..." 

•     *     * 

VJ/ithout  foreseeing  its  result. 
Mother  Esther  Bunnell  had 
already  taken  one  step  for  the 
cause  of  Romania's  going  away. 
Not  long  after  she  and  her  family 
reached  the  Valley,  she  traveled  all 
the  way  to  St.  Louis  by  ox  team  to 
purchase  a  piano  for  her  two  daugh- 
ters. By  the  same  tedious  method 
she  returned,  bringing  a  massive 
oblong  instrument  of  ebony  and  ex- 
cellent workmanship  with  her.  Jo- 
sephine did  not  play  well,  but  Ro- 
mania was  a  good  musician,  and  the 
fine-toned  instrument  became  her 
own  when  Josephine  married  and 
moved  to  Indiana. 

Suddenly  it  seemed  to  Romania 
as  if  her  heart  was  wrenched  wide 
open  with  the  force  of  the  decision 
that  came  to  her.  "The  piano!"  she 
said.  "I'll  sell  it.  We'll  need 
every  dollar  that  we  can  lay  our 
hands  on.  No  matter  what  has  been 
set  aside  to  publish  the  book,  we'll 
need  more  money  for  my  work." 

It  took  months  to  prepare  for  the 
years  that  were  to  be  spent  away 
from  home,  but  Romania  was  reso- 
lute, and  one  day  she  said  to  her 
husband,  "Parley,  the  house.  .  .  . 

"Yes,  Romania,  the  house.  ..." 

That,  too,  was  sold  and  a  farm 
also,  which  had  been  part  of  Par- 
ley's inheritance.  They  had  to  in- 
crease their  funds  to  the  utmost. 
Everything  that  would  bring  any 
money  at  all  went  for  the  dual  enter- 
prise. But  there  was  another  part- 
ing that  was  even  more  poignant 
than  these  when  the  day  for  de- 
parture came.  Romania  took  her 
nine-months-old  baby  from  her 
breast  and  placed  him  in  her  moth- 
er's arms.  She  and  Parley  left  for 
the  train. 

Little  Parley,  fourteen  years  of 
age,  had  gone  to  Ogden  to  work  in 
a  broom  factory.  He  must  add  his 
mite  to  this  great  cause;  he  would 
send  his  grandmother  Bunnell  what 
he  could  to  help  with  the  care  of  the 
four  little  brothers.  Esther  had 
an  orchard,  and  there  was  a  gar- 
den where  she  raised  strawber- 
ries. Through  diligent  care  both 
brought  her  some  income.  The  lads 
should  not  go  hungry  while  their 
parents  were  away. 


Romania  entered  the  Woman's 
Medical  College  of  Philadelphia. 
She  had  a  terrific  struggle  during 
her  first  semester.  All  that  she 
could  do  was  to  get  her  bearings — 
and  pray  for  guidance. 

Her  second  term,  however,  told 
a  different  story.  She  spent  the 
summer  as  a  private  student,  toiling 
while  her  classmates  enjoyed  their 
holidays.  She  even  became  the  first 
woman  to  enroll  in  Bellevue  Col- 
lege, New  York.  In  the  fall  those 
students  at  Philadelphia  who  had 
before  derided  her  were  compelled 
to  yield  their  admiration. 

Although  Romania — individualist 
that  she  was — had  left  to  study 
medicine  presumably  for  the  sole 
purpose  of  midwifery,  she  special- 
ized in  the  study  of  the  eye  and 
ear.  But  her  funds  were  running 
dangerously  low,  and  continued 
schooling  looked  doubtful.  Unable 
to  remain  longer  in  Philadelphia 
she  boarded  the  train  for  Utah,  al- 
most penniless. 

When  she  arrived  she  was 
greeted  with  acclaim.  Almost  at 
once  she  was  made  president  of 
the  Retrenchment  Society,  fore- 
runner of  the  Young  Ladies'  Mu- 
tual Improvement  Association.  This 
society  was  organized  by  Brigham 
Young  to  encourage  simplicity  in 
dress.  She  was  the  very  person  to 
take  the  lead  in  this  endeavor.  But 
did  not  her  President  realize  that 
she  herself  was  beset  with  anxiety? 
That  she  could  see  but  vaguely  the 
way  to  accomplish  the  mission  on 
which  she  had  already  embarked? 
She  might  have  known  that  it  was 
not  for  him  to  see  her  profession  cut 
short.  He  who  so  long  ago  cre- 
ated projects  where  men  might 
earn  their  bread  could  certainly 
visualize  a  plan  to  get  her  through 
school.  The  Relief  Society,  spurred 
on  by  Zina  D.  Young,  Eliza  R. 
Snow  and  others,  raised  money  for 
her  to  continue. 

Had  the  great  mosaicist  seen  the 
changes  that  would  result  from  this 
woman's  completion  of  her  work  he 
still  would  not  have  altered  his 
course.  That  the  lines  of  personal- 
ity were  chiseled  more  deeply,  that 
shadows  were  lengthened  and  high 
lights  were  brightened  in  shifting 
the  pattern  of  a  life,  were  merely 
by-products  of  a  great  and  neces- 
sary result. 

Two  more  years  of  study  were 
lightened  for  Romania  by  remark- 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


UTAH'S  PIONEER  WOMEN  DOCTORS 


able  experiences  at  different  hos- 
pitals and  in  clinical  research  in 
Boston,  New  York,  and  Philadel- 
phia. A  great  stroke  of  fortune  came 
to  her  when  she  was  once  more 
deeply  troubled  over  the  lack  of 
money.  She  was  required  to  meet 
the  expenses  for  a  term  of  training 
at  a  lying-in  hospital,  but  she  had 
no  resources  for  the  purpose.  A 
friend  who  had  paid  for  one  in  Bos- 
ton was  called  away.  She  transfer- 
red the  privilege  of  her  entrance  to 
Dr.  Pratt. 

But  even  the  great  triumph  of  Ro- 
mania's graduation  was  shadowed 
by  this  dreadful  problem.  It  was 
June,  1877,  when  she  received  her 
diploma.  She  stood  upon  the  plat- 
form clothed  in  cap  and  gown, 
thirty-eight  years  old,  and  on  the 
verge  of  a  new  life.  Before  she 
stepped  over  the  boundary,  how- 
ever, she  had  one  more  case  of  fi- 
nancial stringency  to  overcome. 
How  was  she  to  get  home?  Truly,  she 
was  at  a  loss.  But  Josephine,  her  sis- 
ter, who  lived  in  Indiana,  was  expect- 
ing a  baby.  Her  husband  offered 
to  pay  Romania's  expenses  home  if 
she  would  serve  as  attending  phy- 
sician. Again  Romania  felt  that  the 
hand  of  destiny  had  touched  her 
shoulder.  .  .  .  This  offer  was  good 
pay.  Midwives  in  Utah  were  re- 
ceiving three  dollars  a  case! 

At  this  high  moment  of  her  life — 
the  occasion  of  her  first  case  in  her 
own  right — another  deeply  arrest- 
ing religious  experience  came  to 
her.  At  Clifton,  New  York,  where 
she  stopped  on  the  way  to  Indiana, 
the  manager  of  her  hotel  offered  to 
take  her  with  his  other  guests  as  a 
tourist  to  see  the  Hill  Cumorah.  But 
she — a  tourist?  She  who  had  missed 
being  sent  to  Europe  as  student 
representative  from  the  lying-in 
hospital  in  Boston  because,  while 
there,  she  had  ardently  defended 
her  religion?  Not  Romania! 

She  visited  the  sacred  hill  as  one 
who  belonged  to  its  tradition.  In 
her  heart  Cumorah  was  enshrined 
as  the  place  where  the  Angel  Mo- 
roni had  delivered  the  plates  of 
beaten  gold  into  the  hands  of  Jo- 
seph Smith,  the  prophet.  To  her 
this  experience  was  almost  of  as 
great  significance  as  the  projected 
trip  abroad  would  have  been.  It 
outshone  all  of  the  precariousness 
through  which  she  had  passed  on 
her  way  to  graduation. 

But  oh,  what  a  symbol  for  new 
life  in  the  far-away  "Valley"  that 
graduation  was!  It  was  the  begin- 


ning of  the  epoch  of  the  West  with 
the  caduceus  in  woman's  hand. .  . . 

A  fter  less  than  two  years  of  prac- 
tice Dr.  Romania  returned  to 
New  York  for  further  specializa- 
tion in  her  chosen  field.  But  this 
was  the  last  time  she  left  Utah 
while  her  mother  lived.  After  leav- 
ing Josephine  with  her  baby  in  her 
arms,  she  could  hardly  wait  to  see 
her  mother  and  her  sons  while  the 
train  made  its  laggard  way  to  Utah. 
Her  eyes  softened  with  maternal 
love  at  the  thought  of  seeing  her 
babies.  But  even  her  youngest 
boys  were  no  longer  babies  when 
she  returned.  Esther's  house  was 
silent  when  she  entered  it.  Roman- 
ia ran  to  the  orchard — that  same 
orchard  which  had  helped  to  feed  her 
boys.  "Children!  Mother!"  she 
cried.  But  the  smallest  child  greet- 
ed her  as  a  complete  stranger.  It 
was  hard  to  allay  that  pang. 

For  thirty  years  she  was  one  of 
the  chief  figures  in  Utah's  medical 
history.  Her  career  was  not  entire- 
ly to  the  satisfaction  of  the  male 
fraternity.  The  struggle  which  all 
of  the  women  doctors  of  Utah  went 
through  to  gain  the  respect  of  the 
men  was  indeed  comparable  to  the 
long  effort  of  their  educational 
achievement.  "How  is  Dr.  P.? 
Teaching  her  Sunday  School 
class?"  one  of  them  would  invari- 
ably ask  if  he  found  her  in  obstet- 
rical session  with  her  following. 

Still  she  was  never  refused  as- 
sistance by  the  men  if  she  asked 
for  it  in  difficult  operative  cases. 
She  removed  diseased  eyes;  she 
used  the  knife  upon  mastoids,  and 
she  subdued  other  dreadful  scourg- 
es. She  delivered  thousands  of  ba- 
bies, and  she  corrected  as  many 
cases  of  defective  vision  in  her 
well-equipped  office  in  the  Godbe- 
Pitts  building.  She  sponsored  the 
valiant  work  of  the  Deseret  Hos- 
pital; and  she  became  its  resident 
physician.  But  never  once  was 
this  professional  work  unaccompa- 
nied by  the  religious  theme  of  her 
life.  That  resisted  all  change.  For 
years  she  was  assistant  general  sec- 
retary to  the  Relief  Society.  Later 
she  was  a  member  of  the  organiza- 
tion's General  Board. 

She  loved  good  clothes,  and  she 
wore  fine  apparel  when  she  could. 
She  had  learned  the  joy  of  homage; 
a  good  appearance  was  part  of  that 
pleasure.  But  neither  had  she  for- 
gotten the  promptings  of  a  kindly 
heart.     To  the  needy  she  was  al- 


ways helpful.  She  was  generous 
to  her  sons,  whose  own  lives  had 
been  changed  through  this  new  life 
of  hers.  When  she  went  into  resi- 
dence at  the  Deseret  hospital,  the 
grandmother  again  cared  for  them. 
In  turn,  Romania  gave  her  the  most 
tender,  loving  care  throughout 
Esther's  aging  years.  Romania  was 
never  too  tired,  even  after  working 
day  and  night,  to  answer  her  moth- 
er's bedridden  greeting  with  fine 
cheer  when  she  entered  the  house. 
"Manie!  Manie  . .  ."  Esther  would 
call. 

"Yes,  dear.  .  .  ." 

"Can  you  come  here?" 

Manie  went  to  give  her  the  lov- 
ing caress  which  she  needed,  and 
to  perform  some  small  service 
which  was  invariably  requested. 
Esther  was  blind,  and  over  ninety 
years  old. 

And  now  into  Romania's  life 
came  the  last  great  change.  She 
became  the  third  wife  of  Charles 
W.  Penrose,  an  Apostle,  later  a 
member  of  the  First  Presidency  of 
the  Church.  Through  the  shifting 
of  the  mosaic  a  new  pattern  had 
emerged.  The  final  picture  of  her 
life  was  of  magnificent  design.  Her 
outlook  was  broadened  by  half  a 
world.  Some  time  after  their  mar- 
riage, Dr.  Pratt  Penrose  accompa- 
nied her  husband  to  England,  where 
he  presided  over  the  British  and 
European  missions. 

Always  certain  that  Mormonism 
represented  the  true  and  everlast- 
ing Gospel  of  Christ,  she  was  un- 
compromising toward  the  practices 
of  others.  She  gloried  in  the  cathe- 
drals of  Germany  architecturally, 
but  she  deplored  the  worship  that 
went  on  within  those  beautiful 
buildings.  Seated  at  the  window  of 
her  hotel  opposite  the  Dom,  she 
wrote: 

"I  sat  long  gazing  on  this  grand 
structure,  and  wondered  when  the 
mummery  which  is  used  in  the 
name  of  religion  would  be  stilled 
and  the  sublime  structure  dedicated 
to  the  true  and  living  God." 

And  again:  ",  .  .  It  is  an  actual 
positive  truth  that  the  Christians, 
so-called,  worship  an  unknown 
God,  just  as  much  as  they  did  in 
Paul's  day,  and  the  only  difference 
between  them  and  the  heathen  is 
they  have  nothing  in  their  mind's 
eye,  while  the  heathen  look  upon 
a  tangible  idol." 

But  she  had  always  been  high- 
(Continued  on  page  54) 

53 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,   JANUARY,    1939 


UTAH'S  PIONEER  WOMEN  DOCTORS 


(Continued  from  page  53) 

spirited,  and,  at  times,  uncompro- 
mising in  her  attitude.  In  her 
rounds  at  the  Deseret  Hospital,  she 
had  been  kindness  itself  to  one  pa- 
tient, while  to  a  sufferer  in  the  very- 
next  bed  she  was  sometimes  curt 
and  sharp-spoken. 

Even  now,  during  this  European 
experience,  hers  was  not  the  heart 
for  universal  sympathy,  nor  the 
mind  for  wide  tolerance — the  fire 
of  enthusiasm,  the  fearlessness  of 
decision  distinguished  her.  But  now 
indeed  her  religion  was  coupled 
with  a  world  movement! 

She  was  fervent  in  the  cause  of 
equal  suffrage.  Who  could  remain 
indifferent  to  this  great  question 
when  associated  with  Emmeline  B. 
Wells? — and  Dr.  Romania  had 
been  so  associated.  But,  had  it  not 
been  for  the  dignity  of  her  profes- 
sional calling,  she  might  not  have 
played  the  active  part  in  suffrage 
gatherings  which  now  became  her 
privilege.  At  no  meeting  of  this  kind 
in  America  had  a  Mormon  woman 
ever  been  allowed  to  speak.  The 
question  of  polygamy  was  too  sore 
a  point.  But  when  Dr.  Penrose  was 


afforded  the  opportunity  in  Europe 
she  expressed  herself  fearlessly.  At 
the  International  Suffrage  Alliance 
in  Amsterdam,  and  in  London  two 
years  later,  she  did  not  hesitate  to 
invoke  religious  testimony. 

There  she  stood,  gazing  into  the 
countenances  of  this  vast  audience. 
Her  brown  eyes  were  sparkling — 
age  had  not  dimmed  them.  Her 
small  figure  was  plumped  by  the 
years,  but  she  still  was  heroic  and 
commanding. 

After  speaking  of  political  offices 
for  which  women  were  especially 
adapted,  she  said,  ".  .  .  This  (the 
fortuitous  use  of  the  ballot)  has 
been  exemplified  in  the  workings  of 
equal  suffrage  in  my  own  community, 
and  the  universal  acceptance  of  this 
righteous  equality  cannot  fail  to 
bring  to  the  world  greater  freedom, 
higher  justice,  and  closer  union  and 
advancement  in  everything  that 
will  elevate  humanity,  and  bring 
them  to  that  condition  of  harmony, 
fraternity  and  peace,  foreseen  by 
the  prophets  ...  of  ancient  and 
modern  times.  .  .  ." 

The  prophets  ...  of  modern 
times!  To  speak  so  in  such  a  gath- 


ering was  truly  a  courageous  act. 

But  Romania  loved  her  religion 
above  any  earthly  way  of  life.  It 
comforted  her  when  near-blindness 
came  upon  her  after  she  passed  her 
ninety-second  birthday.  She  was 
past  her  ninety-third  when  the  mists 
of  death  surrounded  her. 

But,  because  she  had  pursued  the 
path  of  righteousness  within  the 
close  of  her  faith,  because  she  was 
at  times  intolerant,  because  hers 
was  not  the  heart  for  universal 
sympathy,  who  can  say  that  she  did 
not  worship  the  Most  High  God? 
That  she  did  not  sense  the  spirit 
of  universal  love?  In  the  first  flush 
of  wifehood  she  had  used  the  ex- 
quisite craft  of  her  fingers  to  em- 
broider tiny  garments  in  anticipa- 
tion of  the  holy  joy  of  motherhood; 
on  her  mission  abroad  she  served 
long  and  diligently  for  the  poor; 
as  a  doctor  she  devoted  her  fine 
skill  not  only  to  the  cause  of  suffer- 
ing in  her  own  city,  but  to  her  sis- 
terhood as  a  whole;  as  a  traveler 
she  reveled  in  the  glory  of  nature; 
in  the  seas  of  molten  gold  whose 
tide  washed  the  shores  of  the  North 
Cape,  "where  the  midnight  sun  did! 
not  sink  but  rose  to  shine  again.  .  .  " 


( Continued  from  page  8 ) 

The  governor  of  the  state;  the 
mayor  of  the  city;  a  Catholic  bishop; 
a  public  utilities  executive;  the  chair- 
man of  the  board  of  trustees  of  a 
university;  the  publisher  of  two 
newspapers;  the  general  manager 
of  one  of  the  world's  largest 
mining  operations;  a  young  man  be- 
ginning his  career;  and  a  Church 
associate  were  among  thosei  who 
spoke  their  tributes.  The  Taber- 
nacle Choir  sang  its  praises.  Hun- 
dreds of  tributes  came  by  letter, 
telephone,  and  telegraph,  and  the 
guests  assembled — and  hundreds  of 
thousands  who  were  not — said  an 
honest  and  thankful  "amen"  to  all 
that  was  there  done  and  said. 

The  birthday  cake,  more  than  six 
feet  high  on  its  pedestal,  with  spun- 
sugar  flower  adornments  of  unbeliev- 
able realism,  was  the  work  of  art  of 
Chef  Hans  Bendl  of  the  Hotel  Utah 
staff.  The  unusual  decorations  car- 
ried a  theme  of  progress  from  1856 
to  1 938 — and  did  it  well.  A  printed 
souvenir  program,  prized  and  much 
in  demand  during  and  since  the  ban- 
quet, was  also  a  feature.  The  verse, 
54 


TRIBUTE  TO  A  LEADER 

written  for  the  occasion  by  the  Hon- 
orable John  M.  Wallace,  Mayor  of 
Salt  Lake  City,  as  part  of  his  tribute 
(reprinted  on  page  8)  was  also 
noteworthy.      And    then   came   the 


Tribune   Photograph. 

THE  COPPER  CHEST  CONTAINING  A  THOUSAND 

SILVER   DOLLARS,   PRESENTED  TO   PRESIDENT 

GRANT. 

presentation  to  the  President  of  a 
beautifully  hand-fashioned  copper 
chest  ( the  work  of  the  Utah  Copper 
Company),  filled  with  a  thousand 
new  silver  dollars  for  the  President's 
disposal  in  any  work  of  charity  or 
benevolence  he  chooses.  Then  fol- 
lowed the  response  from  the  guest 


of  honor,  with  a  fulness  of  gratitude 
and  appreciation. 

The  General  Committee  who  or- 
ganized and  executed  the  banquet 
consisted  of: 

John  F.  Fitzpatrick,  Chairman; 
Orval  W.  Adams,  Nelson  W.  Aid- 
rich,  Gus  P.  Backman,  Julian  M. 
Bamberger,  Harold  H.  Bennett, 
Richard  L.  Evans,  George  M. 
Gadsby,  Edward  O.  Howard,  Rob- 
ert L.  Judd,  James  J.  Kelly,  David  D. 
Moffat,  Wendell  M.  Smoot,  Elias 
S.  Smith,  Guy  R.  Toombes. 

J.  Spencer  Cornwall  directed  the 
Tabernacle  Choir.  Dr.  Frank  W. 
Asper  was  at  the  organ.  Edith 
Grant  Young,  one  of  the  President's 
daughters,  appeared  as  a  soloist. 
The  KSL  String  Orchestra,  under 
the  direction  of  Gene  Halliday,  was 
supplemented  by  the  singing  of  An- 
nette Dinwoodey  and  Virginia 
Barker.  Harold  H.  Bennett,  Earl 
J.  Glade,  and  Tracy  Y.  Cannon  con- 
stituted the  Music  Committee. 


HpYPiCAL  excerpts  from  the  tributes 
of  the  evening  are  here  quoted: 


THE  IMPROVEMENT  ERA,  JANUARY,  1939 


John  F.  Fitzpatrick,  publisher,  Salt 
Lake  T  ribune-T  elegvam: 

It  would  be  difficult  anywhere  else  in  the 
world  to  draw  together  such  a  representa- 
tive group  as  a  result  of  the  leadership  of 
a  single  individual.  Represented  here  is  a 
cross-section  of  the  business,  civic,  and  re- 
ligious life  of  a  state  to  pay  honor  to  a  man 
who  has  been  a  leader  in  each  of  these  fields. 
Your  presence  here  is  a  sincere,  beautiful 
tribute   to   him.      All   are   his   friends. 

George  M.  Gadsby,  President  and 

General  Manager,   Utah  Power  & 

Light  Co.: 

We  are  here  to  honor  a  man  who  has  im- 
pressed the  richness  of  a  full  life  on  the 
community  and  has  exerted  an  influence  for 
good,  an  influence  for  integrity  and  all  the 
finer  things  in  life. 

Hon.  John  M.  Wallace,  Mayor  of 

Salt  Lake  City: 

This  occasion  belongs  neither  to  today 
nor  this  year,  but  to  the  long  years  to  come 
that  will  be  enriched  by  the  good  deeds  of 
President   Grant. 

Hon.  Henry  H.  Blood,  Governor 

of  Utah: 

He  is  a  citizen,  business  man,  and  civic 
leader  with  the  courage  and  vision  to  strive 
unceasingly  until  his  dreams  come  true.  He 
is  a  man  with  vision  whose  face  is  always 
turned  toward  the  rising  sun  of  progress. 
.  .  .  Where  there  is  no  vision,  the  people 
perish  .  .  .  You  have  said  that  age  is  a 
quality  of  mind,  so  we  do  not  salute  your 
age  as  much  as  we  acclaim  the  spirit  of 
youth  that  is  in  you. 

Frederick   P.   Champ,   Chairman 

of  the  Board  of  Trustees,  Utah  State 

Agricultural  College: 

We  of  Utah  can  recount  with  pride  the 
various  manifold  fields  in  which  our  guest 
has  and  continues  to  manifest  himself.  .  .  . 
He  has  made  notable  contributions  to  the 
economic  and  industrial  life  of  this  country. 
His  is  an  inspiring  example  of  what  can  be 
accomplished  by  hard  work  and  devotion 
to  high  ideals. 

Bishop  D.  G.  Hunt  of  the  Catholic 

diocese  of  Utah: 

I  have  found  you  and  your  people  to  be 
very  wonderful  neighbors.  I  say  this  be- 
cause it  is  a  tribute  we  of  the  Catholic 
Church  feel  is  due  and  this  is  a  happy  oc- 
casion   to  say  so. 

Lane  W.  Adams,  young  business- 
man of  Salt  Lake  City: 

He  is  a  man  of  varied  life  and  spiritual 
leadership  and  has  injected  his  religious 
philosophy  into  his  business  life,  in  which 
he  has  practiced  the  great  principle  of  the 
Golden  Rule.  .  .  .  President  Grant's  life 
and  influence  have  given  courage  to  every 
young  man  who  comes  after  him. 

President  J.  Reuben  Clark.  Jr.,  of 

the  First  Presidency: 

He  stands  today,  like  the  great  mountain 
which  has  resisted  the  chiselers  of  nature, 
all  the  dross  and  refuse  washed  away  and 
the  enduring  elements  of  his  nature  stand 
serene  among  the  clouds.  .  .  He  is  a  man 
that  it  is  a  privilege  to  know,  a  man  that  can 
come    into    our    lives    rarely.  .  .  He    has 


TRIBUTE  TO  A  LEADER 

sounded  the  depths  of  spiritual  humility  and 
has  mounted  to  spiritual  heights.  .  .  God 
give  him  many  years  to  come. 

D.  D.  Moffat,  Vice-President  and 
General  Manager,  Utah  Copper 
Company: 

Nothing  has  pleased  you  more  through- 
out your  life  than  to  help  the  needy.  .  .  . 
We  give  you  Utah  silver  to  carry  on  your 
unselfish  work.  .  .  This  will  give  you  in- 
creased power  and  opportunity  to  express 
your  generosity. 

Dart  of  the  evening's  procedure 
was  devoted  to  the  reading  of 
greetings  from  those  who  were  un- 
able to  be  in  attendance.  Limited 
time  necessarily  shortened  this  fea- 
ture of  the  program,  but  among  those 
read  were  messages  from: 

W.  A.  Harriman  of  New  York  City, 
Chairman  of  the  Board  of  the  Union  Pacific 
Railroad  Company;  Ralph  Budd,  Chicago, 
President  and  Board  Chairman  of  the  Chi- 
cago, Burlington  &  Quincy  Railroad  Com- 
pany; Alfred  L.  Aiken,  New  York  Citv, 
President  of  the  New  York  Life  Insurance 
Company;  Henry  C.  Link,  New  York  City, 
of  the  Psychological  Service  Center;  Merle 
Thorpe,  Washington,  D.  C,  Editor  of  Na- 
tion's Business;  General  Charles  G.  Dawes, 
Chicago,  former  Vice-president  of  the 
United  States  and  financier;  George 
Sutherland,  Washington,  former  justice  of 
the  supreme  court  of  the  United  States; 
General  Frank  T.  Hines,  Washington,  Vet- 
erans' Bureau  Administrator;  Dr.  Herman 
L.  Kretschmer,  Chicago;  William  M.  Jeffers, 
Omaha,  President  of  the  Union  Pacific  Rail- 
road Company;  H.  F.  Dicke,  Allentown, 
Penn.,  President  of  the  Lehigh  Valley  Tran- 
sit Company;  Bernard  M.  Culver,  New 
York  City,  insurance  executive;  W.  S.  Rose- 
crans,  President  of  the  Los  Angeles  Cham- 
ber of  Commerce;  L.  B.  Hampton,  formerly 
of  Salt  Lake  City,  now  District  Manager 
of  Crane  Company  at  Portland,  Oregon; 
Ross  Beason,  formerly  of  Salt  Lake  City, 
New  York  City  financier,  who  telegraphed 
from  Sarasota,  Florida;  M.  F.  Taggart, 
South  Bend,  Indiana;  Newcomb  Carlton, 
New  York  City;  S.  R.  Inch,  New  York  City: 
Carl  R.  Gray,  New  York  City,  Vice  Chair- 
man of  the  Board  of  the  Union  Pacific  Rail- 
road Company;  Charles  Elsey,  San  Fran- 
cisco, President  of  the  Western  Pacific 
Railroad  Company;  Louis  S.  Cates,  New 
York  City,  President  of  Phelps-Dodge 
Corporation. 

Colonel  D.  C.  Jackling,  President 
of  the  Utah  Copper  Company,  wired 
greetings  and  congratulations  from 
Omaha,  Nebraska,  as  follows: 

Seldom,  if  ever  before  in  my  lifetime, 
have  I  experienced  such  grave  disappoint- 
ment— amounting,  in  fact,  to  real  sorrow — 
as  now  befalls  me  in  being  prevented  by 
causes  beyond  my  control  from  joining 
President  Grant's  associates  and  friends  in 
doing  honor  to  him  on  the  occasion  of  his 
eighty-second    birthday. 

It  has  been  a  rare  privilege  to  me,  as  with 
countless  others,  to  know  this  upright, 
kindly  man;  to  observe  the  exemplification 
of  his  high  principles  as  patriotic  citizen 
and  as  counselor  and  leader  in  the  great 
spiritual,  social,  and  economic  causes  in 
which  he  has  been  so  ardently  and  effectively 
engaged  for  well   beyond   a  half  century. 


On  previous  occasions  President  Grant 
has  heard  me  proclaim  my  indebtedness  to 
him,  his  associates,  and  the  wonderful  or- 
ganization of  which  he  is  now  the  preceptor 
and  stalwart  guide,  for  their  character- 
molding  examples. 

Shortly  after  my  first  arrival  in  Utah, 
about  43  years  ago,  I  became  deeply  im- 
pressed by  the  fine  tenets  of  good  fellow- 
ship, righteous  purpose,  and  fair  dealing 
evidenced  in  the  teachings  and  practices  in- 
herent in  the  institutions  over  which  this 
reverend  and  exalted  guest  of  honor  presides. 

These  early  observances,  respecting  con- 
sideration of  human  rights  and  welfare  and 
of  rectitude  in  dealing  with  the  life  prob- 
lems of  mankind,  contributed  much  of  in- 
spiration with  me  toward  whatever  attrib- 
utes I  may  now  possess  of  straight  thinking 
and  considerately  honest  dealing. 

Thus  my  privilege  of  joining  in  tribute 
to  President  Grant  is  manifold.  I  do  this 
with  high  admiration  and  deep  respect  for 
his  person  and  character,  with  profound 
reverence  for  the  great  cause  he  leads,  and 
with  utmost  esteem  for  his  fine  citizenship 
as  demonstrated  by  his  conduct,  which  af- 
fects all  of  us,  in  public  relationships. 

May  the  Great  Giver  of  all  good  afford 
him  continuing  health  and  happiness,  and 
spare  him  for  prolonged  usefulness  to  hu- 
mankind, as  it  now  prevails,  not  only  in  his 
home  region,  but  throughout  the  civilized 
world. 

And  thus  it  was  that  a  man  was 
honored  by  his  friends. 

WANT 

Peifect  Posture? 

The  TEE  GEE  GARTER  WAIST 
for  GIRLS  and  BOYS 

Aids  perfect  „ 
comfortable 
positions,  sid 
tening   back  garters 
elastic  in  shou*  * 
Sizes  2  to  12, 
paid  in  U.  S. 
Canada  .  .  • 

Only 

ALSO 
Doctors  recom- 
mend the  TEE 
GEE  MATER- 
NITY GARTER  WAIST.  Ad- 
justable to  any  size,  com- 
fortable, cool,  balanced, 
side-fastening  back  garters, 
elastic  in  shoulders. 
Prepaid  in  U.  S.  and  Canada 
.  .  .  only  $2.00.  TEE  GEE 
garments  are  the  only  garter 
■waists  actually  giving  bal- 
a  n  c  e  d  posture-perfecting 
stocking  support  from  the 
shoulders.  Specify  TEE  GEE 
at  your  dealer's,  or  send 
check  or  money-order  to 

TEE  GEE  GARMENT  CO. 

Room  C— 5029  17th  N.E.— Seattle,  Wash. 

U.  S.  Patent  No.  2,078,972 

55 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


(Continued  from  page  19) 

gay  take  his  place  a  day  with  the 
sheep. 

On  the  morning  of  the  hunt,  hav- 
ing never  said  a  word  or  attempted 
any  arrangement  with  the  real 
owner  of  the  mares,  the  old  man 
rode  away  on  the  black  followed 
by  the  medicine  man's  son  on  the 
bay.  Begay  sat  up  there  in  great 
dignity  as  he  rode  off,  at  least  he 
seemed  so  to  the  little  girl,  and  she 
followed  him  with  admiring  eyes. 

Peejo,  too,  fixed  his  eyes  on  them 
as  they  mounted  the  rise  towards 
the  mesa,  but  not  with  the  least  ad- 
miration. He  was  left  with  the 
sheep,  a  woman's  work,  while  they 
rode  his  father's  choice  horses!  The 
hot  blood  throbbed  in  his  temples  as 
he  thought  of  it.  He  was  tempted 
to  get  the  white  mare  and  follow 
them — or  maybe,  better  still,  to 
leave  the  country. 

The  old  man  had  been  compelled 
for  the  safety  of  the  flock  to  recog- 
nize that  Peejo  was  not  able  to  tend 
them  alone,  and  however  much  he 
may  have  disliked  it,  he  sent  the 
shepherdess  to  help  him.  She  found 
Peejo  in  a  sullen  humor.  He  was 
angry  not  only  at  her  father  and  Be- 
gay, but  also  at  her  for  the  fickle 
change  of  her  preference. 

"See  my  hand  away  over  there?" 
he  pouted,  indicating  the  big  "Mit- 
ten," and  regarding  her  steadily 
from  under  his  straight  brows,  "It 
is  raised  in  anger — it  says  your 
father  shall  not  even  see  Black- 
horse." 

They  stopped  on  a  hill  above  the 
sheep. 

"Your  father  will  not  even  see  so 
much  as  the  track  of  the  black 
horse  today!"  he  swore  in  vengeful 
exultation,  and  closed  his  firm  jaw 
with  a  pronounced  emphasis. 

"Why  do  you  say  that?  How 
do  you  know?"  she  asked,  opening 
her  innocent  black  eyes  in  aston- 
ishment. "You  don't  know  he  won't 
see  the  track." 

"I  do  know!"  he  insisted,  "That 
big  hand  says  so,"  and  he  eyed  her 
unblinkingly  from  under  his  level 
brows,  "Your  father  will  come  back 
early  and  tell  us  Blackhorse  is  not 
there." 

"You'll  see,"  he  added  after  a 
long  pause,  and  his  fiery  eyes  and 
square  face  showed  a  commanding 
wrath  and  resolution  she  had  never 
seen  there  before.  More  than  that, 
his  looks  betrayed  possession  of 
some  mysterious  knowledge  which 
he  had  will  power  to  with-hold,  and 
56 


THE  NATIVE  BLOOD 

it  restored  all  the  honor  his  rival 
had  tried  to  claim. 

Xvestored  again  to  her 
favor  more  surely  than  if  she  had 
told  him  so  in  words,  he  went  on 
in  tones  more  mild  but  none  the 
less  positive,  "Your  father  will 
never  see  the  black  horse  nor  his 
track  again  till  he  gives  me  my 
sheep  and  my  horses." 

She  was  startled — there  was 
something  in  it  dreadful  and  un- 
failing, but  the  sheep  had  started 
down  a  sandwash  and  he  turned  to 
run  after  them. 

Yoinsnez  returned  while  the  sun 
was  still  high  in  the  west,  and  he 
was  troubled.  Blackhorse  was  due 
to  have  been  there  with  his  band, 
but  he  was  not  with  them,  no  trace 
of  him,  his  following  was  scattered 
on  a  dry  ridge  with  no  leader  to 
sound  the  alarm  or  direct  the  course 
of  their  flight.  Then  the  little  shep- 
herdess told  him  he  would  never 
see  the  horse  nor  his  track  till  he 
restored  Peejo's  sheep  and  horses. 
The  furrows  deepened  quickly 
across  his  sloping  brow  as  he 
frowned  threateningly.  When  he 
got  the  whole  account  of  what 
Husteele's  son  had  said,  he  was 
furious,  but  he  was  also  disturbed. 

He  called  the  boy  to  the  hogan, 
"Why  did  you  say  I  would  not  find 
the  black  horse's  track  today?"  he 
demanded,  his  long  teeth  muddy 
from  riding  in  the  dust. 

"I  said  it  because  it  is  true,"  came 
the  dogged  answer,  "you  didn't  find 
them,"  and  he  eyed  the  old  man 
steadily  from  under  his  straight 
brows. 

"Why  did  you  say  I  will  never 
see  Blackhorse  till  I  give  you  all  the 
sheep  and  horses  you  want  to 
claim?"  he  pursued  severely,  the  fire 
rising  in  his  bloodshot  eyes,  "What 
do  you  know  about  it?  You  de- 
clared to  me  at  the  first  that  you 
knew  nothing." 

Stung  by  the  veiled  accusation 
that  he  was  claiming  more  than  his 
own,  the  boy  straightened  up  stoic- 
ally, "Watch  and  see  whether  I 
know  anything  about  it,"  he  coun- 
tered, closing  his  square  jaw  with 
emphasis. 

The  old  man  studied  him  in 
astonishment  and  alarm,  "Ingrate!" 
he  broke  out,  after  a  troubled  pause. 
"What  kind  of  witchery  are  you 
trying  to  practice  against  me?  Who 
took  you  from  among  the  dead  and 
nursed  you  to  health?" 


The  outraged  blood  of  Husteele 
would  condescend  to  no  further 
answer,  and  the  boy  reclined  sul- 
lenly on  his  sheepskin. 

Serving  his  private  purposes  and 
his  private  fears,  but  also  modified 
in  his  policy  by  the  mildness  of  his 
motherly  noloki,  the  old  man  re- 
frained from  the  punishment  he  was 
furious  to  give.  He  simply  sent 
Peejo  back  to  the  sheep,  compelling 
him  more  often  to  care  for  them 
alone.  And  still  Begay  and  Elt- 
ceesie  were  often  with  him,  and  he 
had  to  endure  the  bully  in  silence. 
All  the  same  the  spirit  of  invincible 
championship  in  his  heart  swore  si- 
lently but  fervently  that  this  score 
would  sometime  be  evened  to  the 
last  degree. 

When  Blackhorse  had  had  more 
time  to  return  to  his  band,  Yoinsnez 
went  hopefully  on  another  hunt. 
And  again  he  rode  the  black  mare, 
followed  by  the  bay  carrying  the 
medicine  man's  son,  while  Peejo  and 
the  shepherdess  watched  them 
mount  the  trail  towards  the  mesa. 

At  first  he  was  just  an  ominous 
cloud,  dark  and  silent,  and  when 
at  length  he  spoke,  he  seemed  to 
bite  his  words  as  he  let  them  go. 

"I  have  been  robbed,"  he  declared 
bitterly,  "and  I  have  been  made  a 
slave!" 

He  told  her  to  look  at  his  big 
hand  raised  away  over  there  on  the 
horizon — it  was  giving  furious  com- 
mand to  the  desert  mists  to  hide 
Blackhorse  and  his  track  from  her 
father.  "He  will  see  nothing  but 
hateful  mirage,"  the  boy  declared 
emphatically,  "and  he  will  hear 
nothing  but  the  mocking  wind 
across  the  mesa.  He  will  come  back 
again  discouraged.  I  know.  You 
see  if  I  don't  know." 

He  closed  his  jaw  with  that  pe- 
culiar threatening  emphasis  and 
looked  at  her  from  under  his 
straight  brows  with  a  steadiness 
that  compelled  her  to  believe  all  he 
said. 

Again  she  told  her  father  when 
he  came  home  early  as  predicted, 
and  again  the  old  man  was  angry, 
more  so  than  before,  and  more 
alarmed.  He  called  for  the  boy  to 
give  an  accounting,  and  his  long 
teeth  between  his  parted  lips  meant 
something  violent  and  unusual 
would  happen.  Husteele's  son  was 
mocking  at  his  kindness  with  some 
dark  treachery,  and  he  would  be 
forced  to  confess  everything. 
(To  be  Continued) 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,   1939 


uO  Frabjous  Day" 

{Continued  from  page  15) 

and  be  quick  about  it!"  Mr.  Beam- 
ish hissed,  and  Cuthbert,  protesting 
but  obedient,  modestly  retired  be- 
hind a  convenient  cupboard  and  re- 
moved the  offending  trousers,  though 
he  privately  considered  them  far 
more  decorative  than  his  thin,  hairy 
shins. 


luBBY,  still  smarting  from 
his  bout  with  the  redoubtable  Mr. 
Beamish,  cast  as  his  Nephew,  and  in 
whose  acting  even  he  could  find  no 
flaw,  was  mightily  affronted  when 
he  saw  said  Nephew  yank  Marley's 
Ghost  away  at  the  precise  moment 
he  was  due  to  appear.  Consequently 
he  out-Scrooged  Scrooge  himself, 
when  the  ghostly  Marley  finally 
clanked  himself  in.  That  is,  until 
his  eyes,  straying  from  the  ghastly 
features  and  clanking  chain,  wan- 
dered to  the  long  sharp  shins  and 
knobby  knees  displayed  beneath  the 
winding  sheet. 

The  audience  was  puzzled  there- 
after, by  a  Scrooge  who  seemed  sud- 
denly shaken  by  grief  or  some  other 
emotion,  which  kept  his  head  buried 
in  his  hands  and  his  voice  curiously 
muffled.  Overcome  presently  by  its 
onslaughts,  which  sounded  strangely 
like  smothered  snorts  of  laughter, 
Scrooge  jumped  up  and  rushed  wild- 
ly behind  the  wings.  Marley's 
dreary  warning  ceased  abruptly  and 
he  gazed  vacantly  after  the  flying 
coat-tails. 

Past  Miss  Norwood's  reproachful 
face  Tubby  rushed  and  threw  him- 
self, pell-mell,  upon  a  white-covered 
bench.  Miss  Norwood's  horrified 
exclamation  coincided  with  the 
squashing  sound  of  smashed  food 
and  crunch  of  crockery.  Simul- 
taneously, Tubby  was  drenched  in 
vinegar  sauce  and  currant  jelly,  with 
smattering  of  other  edibles  here  and 
there.  The  wreckage  was  supreme. 
While  Tubby  scraped  and  sopped 
vinegar  sauce  from  his  person,  the 
indignant  Cratchits,  including  Tiny 
Tim,  gathered  up  the  scattered  re- 
mains of  the  Christmas  feast.  At 
this  inauspicious  moment  came  Miss 
Norwood's  frantic  call  for  Scrooge. 

"Come  on,  Harold,  come  on!  The 
Spirit  of  Christmas  Past  is  waiting!" 

"I  can't,"  croaked  Tubby,  in  an 
agonized  whisper,  "I'm  still  dripping 
pudding  sauce!" 

Miss  Norwood  gazed  about  wild- 
ly. "O,  what  can  we  do?  O,  how 
awful!  Come,  Cuthbert,  you'll  have 
(Continued  on  page  58) 


rmVffj^vjJAVffJwuwJAmJWVSttM.^vs^vjwvtJ,JVffffffff 


WITH 


CHEAP 
ELECTRICITY! 


UTAH  POWER  &  LIGHT  CO. 


When  YOUR 
Home  Burns... 


There's  a  certain  amount  of 
comfort  to  know  that  should 
fire  destroy  your  home  tonight 
that  you  are  covered  by  Fire 
Insurance. 

Such  insurance  will  indemnify 
you  for  the  loss  incurred  and 
allow  you  to  rebuild  your 
home  without  financial  hard- 
ship. 

It's  worth  a  good  deal  to  have 
this  protection  in  these  times. 
See  our  agent  in  your  town. 


UTAH  HOME  FIRE 
INSURANCE  CO. 


! 


NEW  GRAND 


M.  H.  THOMPSON 

Manager 


HOTEL' 


AT     ,"OURTH     SOUTH     AND     MAIN    STREET 


HEBER  J.  GRANT  &  CO. 

General  Agents 

22  South  Main  Street 

Salt  Lake  City,  Utah 


a 

J 


Let  me  do  your  IRONING  just 

One   Week!  Signed— Fred  Schoss 


T 


t 


ronrrie 

Takes  you  off  your  feet. 
Ask  for  free  demon- 
stration. 

SCHOSS-READ  ELECTRIC  CO  J 

OGDEN  TBEMONTON 


WE  OFFER  . . . 

A  COMPLETE 
ENGRAVING  SERVICE 

From  Missionary  Portraits  to  the  Largest 

Catalogues 

Mail  Orders  Given  Prompt  Attention 

UTAH  ENGRAVING  CO. 

113  Regent  St.  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah 


ATTEND 

Provo  School  of  Beauty  Culture 

The  School  Where  the  Promise  is  Kept 

11  East  1st  No.,  Provo,  Utah 
A  Life's  income  for  a  meager  investment 

Fill  in  coupon  lor  further 

information  or 

Phone  No.  2 


57 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,   JANUARY,    1939 


"O  FRABJOUS  DAY 


it 


(Continued  from  page  57) 

to   be   Scrooge  this   time!     Please, 
come  on!" 

Poor  dazed  Cuthbert  found  him- 
self being  pushed  onto  the  stage 
from  which  he  had  just  gladly  es- 
caped. As  he  passed  Miss  Nor- 
wood, she  clutched  frantically  at  his 
shroud. 

"Take  that  thing  off!  Take  it 
off!"  she  hissed  forcefully. 

Cuthbert  clutched  it  just  as  fran- 
tically to  his  person;  he  had  not  for- 
gotten his  missing  trousers  if  she 
had.  "Not  a  chance!"  he  gritted, 
hoarsely  and  clanked  on,  to  be  con- 
fronted, not  by  the  original  Spirit  of 
Christmas  Past — that  Spirit  was 
spending  the  evening  in  bed  in 
swollen  solitude — but  by  the  ubiqui- 
tous Mr.  Beamish.  Mr.  Beamish 
was  no  less  taken  aback  to  be  met 
by  Marley's  shrouded  ghost  when 
he  had  expected  Scrooge.  It  was 
disconcerting,  but  he  was  gifted  with 
more  presence  of  mind  than  Cuth- 
bert. 

"I  am  the  Spirit  of  Christmas 
Past!"  he  intoned  deeply,  and  after 
a  pause  which  Cuthbert  made  no  ef- 
fort to  fill,  he  amplified,  "Of  Christ- 
mases  long  past!"  Still  Cuthbert 
stood  as  one  petrified.  Mr.  Beam- 
ish's  smile  became  a  bit  stiff.  "Say 
something,"  he  muttered,  out  of  the 
corner  of  his  mouth,  "Say  some- 
thing!" 

"What?",  whispered  Cuthbert, 
vacantly.  He  had  never  learned 
Scrooge's  speeches,  being  one  who 
had  his  hands  full  with  his  own,  and 
now  he  felt  himself  deprived  of  even 
his  usual  modest  resources. 

"Anything!"  insisted  Mr.  Beam- 
ish, and  even  to  Cuthbert's  numbed 
senses  the  smile  on  the  Spirit's  round 
face  seemed  thinly  spread  over  a 
fast-mounting  rage.  Frantically,  he 
cudgelled  his  brain.  He  must  say 
something,  something,  anything  at 
all.  He  must  forget  the  audience 
and  say  something  to  Mr.  Beamish. 
Mr.  Beamish  looked  mad.  Say 
something  quick  to  Mr.  Beamish. 
Beamish,  a  funny  name.  Beamish 
boy.  That's  what  Tubby  said, 
Beamish  boy.  Say  something  quick 
to  the  Beamish  boy!  And  suddenly, 
to  his  own,  as  much  as  to  everyone 
else's  amazement,  Cuthbert's  voice 
rang  out,  loud  and  clear: 

And  hast  thou  slain  the  Jabberwock? 

Come  to  my  arms,  my  beamish  boy! 
O,  frabjous  day!    Callooh,  callay! 

He  chortled  in  his  joy! 

Amid  shouts,  whoops  and  cat- 
calls, Miss  Norwood  presently  suc- 
58 


ceeded  in  having  the  curtain 
dropped.  But  when  she  was  free  to 
deal  with  him  she  was  unable  to  find 
Cuthbert.  For  Cuthbert  had  felt 
suddenly,  an  urgent  desire  to  be 
somewhere  else,  immediately.  When 
the  last,  incredible  words  of  the  Jab- 
berwocky  had  left  his  startled  lips, 
his  next  impulse  was  to  be  safely  at 
home.  He  longed  for  his  own  room, 
with  the  light  turned  off  and  his 
head  under  the  pillow.  An  ache  for 
solitude  possessed  him.  If  he  never 
saw  any  of  his  dear  friends  and 
classmates  again,  it  would  still  be 
too  soon.  So  with  a  furtive  glance 
about,  he  slipped  out  the  back  door 
and  stole  silently  away.  Silently, 
that  is,  except  for  his  still  clanking 
chains,  which  he  had  been  unable, 
so  far,  to  unfasten  from  his  wrist. 
Thus  he  missed  the  scene  which  a 
few  minutes  later  put  Tubby  in  his 
own   felonious  class. 

JMr.  Beamish,  trembling 
with  rage  at  Cuthbert's  unheard  of 
affront,  refused  point  blank  to  ap- 
pear on  the  stage  again.  Presently, 
however,  he  succumed  to  Miss  Nor- 
wood's tearful  pleas  and  hastily 
stuck  on  the  long,  red-tipped  putty 
nose,  he  had  gaily  modelled  in  a  hap- 
pier hour.  It  was  to  be  the  point  of 
distinction  between  the  seedy  Bob, 
and  gay  young  Nephew.  It  sat 
strangely  in  the  expanse  of  his 
round,  beaming  face  and  Tubby 
stood  transfixed  when  the  humble 
fellow  sidled  onto  the  stage  to  im- 
plore him  pitifully  for  a  Christmas 
holiday  with  his  family.  It  was  not 
the  ludicrous  appearance  of  the  nose 
that  struck  Tubby,  so  much  as  the 
fact  that  it  trembled  violently  at 
Cratchit's  every  movement.  Before 
his  fascinated  eyes,  it  parted  com- 
pany with  the  left  side  of  Mr.  Beam- 
ish's  face  entirely,  and  hung,  quiv- 
ering to  the  right  as  he  indignantly 
repeated  his  cue. 

There,  it  was  certainly  going  to 
fall!  With  desperate  and  unthink- 
ing haste,  Tubby  reached  up  to  press 
it  more  firmly  onto  Mr.  Beamish's 
more  static  feature,  before  that  much- 
tried  actor  should  suffer  the  crown- 
ing calamity  of  losing  his  nose;  but 
the  disillusioned  gentleman  misun- 
derstood the  gesture.  At  Tubby's 
touch,  he  drew  back  haughtily,  but 
not  until  Tubby  had  grasped  the 
nose  and  stood  looking  very  foolish, 
indeed,  with  the  misshapen  thing  in 
his  hand.  Mr.  Beamish,  in  spite  of 
the  flecks  of  putty  here  and  there  on 
his  own  original  nose,  did  so  deadly 


a  job  of  glaring,  as  would  strike 
envy  to  the  heart  of  a  seasoned  vil- 
lain. 

The  curtain  descended  quickly  on 
this  moving  tableau  and  the  audience 
howled  with  merriment.  Slap-stick 
comedy  finds  a  warm  welcome  with 
a  large  per  cent  of  humanity  and 
here  was  low  comedy  at  its  lowest. 
Brought  out  this  cold  winter  night 
by  the  various  urges  of  family  or 
school  loyalty,  hoping  for  the  best, 
but  prepared  for  an  evening  of  mar- 
tyred boredom,  they  were,  for  the 
time  being,  mightily  diverted  at  the 
turn  the  play  had  taken;  though  later 
there  was  to  be  much  head-shaking 
and  speculation  as  to  the  probable 
fate  of  such  boys  as  Cuthbert  and 
Tubby. 

While  the  hilarity  was  at  its  wild- 
est, Miss  Norwood,  very  pink  as  to 
eyes  and  nose,  stepped  out  and 
rapped  for  sufficient  order  to  make 
the  announcement  that  "owing  to 
unforeseen  circumstances"  the  play 
could  not  be  finished  and  the  aud- 
ience was  dismissed.  Into  the  en- 
suing hub-bub,  came  hurtling  a 
black  bomb  on  a  blast  of  icy  air,  as 
the  street  door  was  burst  violently 
open  and  a  colored  boy  threw  him- 
self into  the  hall,  shouting  wildly, 
"A  ghos',  a  ghos'!  Ghos's  is  walk- 
in'!  I  saw  it  wif  my  own  eyes!  I 
saw  it!  Seven  feet  tall,  it  was,  a- 
runnin'  and  a-rattlin'  chains!"  His 
anguished  tones  were  lost  in  the 
general  tumult,  as  the  throng  rushed 
out  in  quest  of  new  thrills. 

Poor  Cuthbert  reached  the  haven 
of  his  own  room  just  in  time,  for 
it  had  suddenly  occurred  to  some- 
one who  the  ghost  must  be,  and  a 
crowd  of  yelling  boys  had  struck 
down  the  street  to  catch  him  if  pos- 
sible and  prolong  the  joke.  He  lay 
in  his  room  at  home  steeped  in  an 
agony  of  remorse  as  the  receding 
shouts  died  away.  For  suddenly  all 
his  personal  humiliation  was  forgot- 
ten in  the  realization  of  how  the 
teachers  must  feel  at  this  fiasco.  Poor 
Miss  Norwood,  how  horribly  they 
had  wrecked  her  kind  plans!  And 
she  had  tried  so  hard!  And — yes, 
poor  Mr.  Beamish!  He  was  really 
a  good  guy  after  all!  He  had  only 
been  trying  to  help  the  class  out,  and 
it  wasn't  his  fault  he  had  such  a 
funny  name! 

Cuthbert  sprang  up  and  pounded 
his  pillow,  viciously.  Why,  the 
whole  thing  was  Tubby's  fault! 
Tubby  never  had  his  heart  in  the 
play.  And  if  he  hadn't  gone  and 
got  all  jealoused  up  over  Mr.  Beam- 


uO  Frabjous  Day" 

ish,  he  would  never  have  reminded 
Cuthbert  of  that  silly  old  verse  in 
Alice,  and  it  wouldn't  have  lodged 
in  his  subconscious — he'd  heard 
Professor  Norris  describe  it  all  in 
Psychology  class — and  he  would 
never  have  spouted  it  out  when  he 
got  stage  fright  and  could  not  think. 
He  dropped  off  to  sleep,  finally, 
resolving  to  be  such  a  model  student 
in  Natural  History  and  English 
classes  (poor  hopeful  Cuthbert!) 
that  it  would  atone  for  the  whole 
sorry  business.  "And  if  I  ever  get 
mixed  up  in  another  of  Tubby's  love 
affairs,"  he  muttered,  drowsily,  "I 
hope  somebody — I  hope — I — ' 

-Liny  Tim,  dozing  on  a 
property  trunk,  was  awakened  by 
the  commotion  of  the  departing 
audience.  He  sat  up  and  stared 
about  in  dismay.  All  around  him, 
would-be  actors  were  gathering  up 
belongings  in  disgruntled  silence. 
He  dashed  out  onto  the  stage.  Why, 
the  people  were  all  leaving!  His 
lips  began  to  quiver.  He  had  borne 
the  destruction  of  the  Cratchit's 
Christmas  dinner  fairly  well,  but 
now  they  were  all  going  before  he 
had  said  his  speech!  He  had  stayed 
out  of  bed  long  past  his  usual  bed- 
time and  kept  himself  awake — or 
nearly  awake — by  sheer  will  power, 
and  now  he  had  no  intention  of  be- 
ing cheated  out  of  his  Big  Moment. 
Swiftly  he  ran  to  the  front  of  the 
stage,  and  standing  on  tip-toe, 
stretched  out  his  little  arms  toward 
the  oblivious,  departing  backs,  "God 
bless  us  every  one!"  cried  Tiny  Tim, 
imploringly. 

"Amen!"  murmured  Mr.  Beamish, 
reverently,  from  the  wings,  and 
gathering  Miss  Norwood  into  his 
arms,  he  tenderly  kissed  her  tear- 
stained  face.  She  relaxed  against 
his  shoulder  for  an  instant,  with  a 
heart-felt  sigh.  It  was  the  end  of 
a  perfectly  awful  day,  but — the  end 
was  not  so  bad! 


HOTEL  LANKERSHIM 

nil  *  8  ROAD  WAY 


LOS  ANGELES 

'TWO  PERSONS     -     ONE  CHARGE' 


ENROLL     NOW 

(Commence  Later  if  Desired) 

$25.  Discount  on  a  Complete 

COURSE    IN   BEAUTY    CULTURE 
A  State  Accredited  School 

Ogden  School  of  Beauty  Culture 

Over  Egyptian  Theatre  OGDEN,    UTAH 

Same  _ 

Address   City  State  _ 


OIL-PLATE 


FOR  FAST 
STARTING 


Last  night  when  your  car  went  to  bed, 
did  all  the  oil  drain  down,  leaving  the 
working  parts  dry- — and  the  morning 
start  doubtful?  No,  not  with  Con- 
oco Germ  Processed  oil  keeping  the 
engine  OIL-PLATED.  The  Germ 
Process  bonds  oil  to  metal  like  a  plat- 
ing.    Platings  don't  drain  down! 

That's  why  your  OIL-PLATED  en- 
gine is  safely  sliding — easing  the 
starter — before  any  oil  that  depends 
on  free-flow  alone  could  come  climb- 
ing up.  So  starting  wear  is  out,  along 
with  starting  delay.  And  your  Germ 
Processed  oil  stays  close  to  "Full" 
weeks  longer.  Change  today,  at 
your  Mileage  Merchant's.  Contin- 
ental Oil  Co. 

CONOCO  GERM 
PROCESSED  OIL 


cXt#2.  Jtd  Qtdu  SmL... 

This  theme  for  the  18th  Annual  Leadership  Week  characterizes  the 
message  of  the  five  glorious  days  which  await  you  this  month  at  Brigham 
Young  University.  Inspirational  talks  by  Church  and  civic  leaders,  stimu- 
lating department  sessions,  and  cultural  entertainments  combine  to  make 
this  week  a  notable  event  for  the  entire  Church. 

"Life  at  Its  Best",  too,  is  found  in  the  rich  educational  opportunities 
given  the  year  'round  at  the  Church  university.  Courses  are  more  numer- 
ous and  varied,  cultural  attractions  more  valuable  than  ever  before. 


LEADERSHIP  WEEK  JANUARY  23-27 
WINTER  QUARTER  JANUARY  3— MARCH  17 

BRIGHAM   YOUNG    UNIVERSITY 

PROVO,  UTAH 


AMERICAN    SMELTING    &    REFINING    CO. 


Seventh  Floor  McCornick  Building 


SALT  LAKE  CITY.  UTAH 


Address  correspondence 
as  follows: 

American  Smelting 
&  Refining  Co. 

700  McCornick 
Building 


Purchasers  of 

Gold,  Silver,  Lead  and  Copper  Ore 
and  Smelter  Products 

Consign  all  ore  shipments  to: 

American  Smelting  and  Refining  Company 
Ship  Lead  Ores  to  Murray  Plant,  Murray,  Utah 
Ship  Copper  and  Siliceous  Ores  to  Garfield  Plant, 
Garfield,  Utah 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 


PORTRAIT  OF  A  YOUNG  MAN 


(Continued  from  page  13) 
After  dinner  spent  an  hour  or  two 
at  the  office.  Took  the  3:40  train 
for  Woods  Cross.  Called  on  my 
sisters  Mrs.  Marshall  and  Mrs. 
Muir  and  on  Aunt  Susan  Grant. 
Met  Hyrum,  Lewis,  and  Frank 
Grant.  A  little  before  six  o'clock 
I  started  for  home  on  my  horse  Dan, 
...  I  feel  somewhat  tired  this  eve- 
ning, having  traveled  since  3  p.  m. 
yesterday  40  miles  by  team,  1 0  miles 
horseback  and  139  by  rail. 

"Am  much  pleased  to  be  home 
again*  with  my  family.  Have  en- 
joyed the  trip  to  Oakley  very  much, 
feel  that  our  visit  was  greatly  appre- 
ciated. They  were  very  hospitable 
and  kind  and  our  party  were  enter- 
tained as  well  as  could  possibly  be 
asked." 

"Saturday,  September  30th,  1882: 
I  spent  the  day  at  the  office,  I  wrote 
up  an  account  of  our  Idaho  trip  for 
the  Deseret  News.  Should  not  have 
done  so  had  not  Brother  Lyman  re- 
quested me  to  write  said  account. 
This  letter  is  the  first  and  only  thing 


I  ever  wrote  for  publication,  and  it 
was  not  of  sufficient  interest  to  pub- 
lish and  I  should  never  have  thought 
of  handing  it  in  for  publication  had 
I  not  been  requested  to  do  so. 

"Wife  and  I  attended  the  theatre. 
The  Madison  Square  Company 
played  'Hazel  Kirke'  in  a  most  pleas- 
ing manner." 

A  little  over  two  weeks  later  Fa- 
ther was  called  to  be  an  Apostle 
while  he  was  still  under  twenty-six 
years  of  age.  Thus  his  work  as  a 
stake  president  ended.  A  later  entry 
in  his  journal  expresses  his  feelings 
regarding  the  people  with  whom  he 
had  been  so  closely  associated  for 
two  years: 

"I  hope  when  I  get  through  my 
labors  as  an  Apostle  that  I  shall  have 
as  much  pleasure  in  looking  back 
over  the  same,  as  I  do  when  recall- 
ing my  labors  for  the  past  two  years 
in  Tooele.  Not  that  I  have  a  great 
deal  to  be  thankful  for  or  praise  for 
my  own  labors,  but  the  kindness 
and  respect  and  the  aid  and  assist- 


ance that  I  received  from  my  breth- 
ren and  the  support  of  the  people  is 
something  that  I  will  always  re- 
member with  feelings  of  pleasure  as 
well  as  gratitude.  There  is  a  pleas- 
ure which  a  person  has  when  looking 
back  over  missionary  life  and  ex- 
periences that  is  almost  beyond  the 
person's  power  to  explain. 

"I  do  not  think  that  among  any 
other  people  but  Saints  that  a  young 
man  could  have  had  the  same  ex- 
perience as  I  had  in  Tooele.  Look- 
ing at  things  naturally  the  people 
should  have  been  disgusted  at  hav- 
ing a  young  man  called  to  preside 
over  them  who  could  only  talk  from 
five  to  eight  minutes;  instead  of  be- 
ing disgusted  they  endeavored  to 
help  me  out  by  being  as  faithful  as 
possible.  There  were  exceptions  to 
this  rule,  but  I  am  glad  to  say  that 
they  wetfe  few  and  far  between. 
The  people  of  Tooele  County  will  al- 
ways have  a  warm  place  in  my  af- 
fections; especially  will  this  be  the 
case  with  the  brethren  with  whom  I 
was  most  closely  associated." 


THE  POWER  TO  ACHIEVE 


( Continued  from  page  11) 
Suggestion: 

This  is  January,  a  month  of  be- 
ginnings. Let's  each  of  us  set  up  a 
definite  savings  program,  'with  a 
specific  objective,  to  be  reached  one 
year  hence,  January,  1940. 

As  a  rule,  in  settling  our 
debts,  we  pay  everyone  but  the 
Lord  and  ourselves.  If  we  will 
but  tithe  our  earnings,  and  then 
set  aside  a  comparable  amount 
for  savings  to  be  held  inviolate 
for  ourselves  against  a  future 
need,  and  make  the  remaining 
80%  meet  our  obligations,  in 
honor,  we  shall  be  definitely  on 
the  way  to  a  new  power  in  our 
personal  affairs. 

Saving  has  a  way  of  building 
cumulatively,  and  its  compensations, 
once  momentum  is  attained,  are  so 
varied  as  to  be  incredible.  Chief  of 
these  is  the  attaining  of  a  position 
of  credit-solidarity  among  our  fel- 
lows.   That  is  priceless! 

The  gaining  of  the  first  nucleus 
is  the  real  struggle — the  first  $100 
or  $500  or  $1000— after  that  the  ac- 
crued power  one  has  already  at- 
tained makes  the  way  toward  the 
future  easier. 
60 


Saving  Makes  Us  Value- 
Conscious 

YVThen  we  earn  and  save,  we 
gradually  come  to  know  values 
better.  A  noted  university  presi- 
dent recently  inquired  at  a  men's 
shop  the  price  of  a  belt.  "$2.50," 
said  the  clerk.  "Why,  that,"  re- 
sponded the  president,  "is  the  price 
of  five  bushels  of  wheat." 

Now,  even  urban  folk  know  that 
it  takes  a  lot  of  energy,  besides  that 
of  the  sunshine  and  moisture,  to  sow, 
raise,  and  harvest  five  bushels  of 
wheat;  therefore,  the  belt,  when 
purchased,  was  truly  appreciated. 

If  boys  and  girls,  when  buying 
the  things  youngsters  like,  will  just 
pause  a  moment  to  recall  how  hard 
that  money  was  to  earn,  they  will 
develop  a  fine  ability  to  appraise 
values.  One  value-conscious  young- 
ster, in  treating  a  group  of  friends, 
recently  said:  "Well,  here  goes  the 
interest  on  a  dollar  for  ten  yeafs." 
That  says  it  graphically.  At  \x/i% 
per  annum  it  takes  a  dollar  a  long 
time  to  earn  a  silver  quarter. 

On  the  death  of  his  father,  a  high 
school  boy  was  sent  to  the  factory 
to  bring  home  his  father's  work 
clothes.  In  the  locker,  the  youngster 
found  the  soiled  shirt,  and  the  worn, 


grease-covered  overalls.  On  the 
floor  of  the  locker  were  the  father's 
shoes,  in  the  soles  of  which  were 
large  holes  covered  on  the  inside  by 
improvised  inner  soles  rudely  cut 
from  cardboard.  As  the  boy  stoop- 
ed to  pick  the  shoes  up,  his  eyes 
dimmed  and  for  the  first  time  he 
realized  the  sacrifice  the  father  had 
made  that  his  son  might  go  to  high 
school. 

Experiences  of  this  sort  are 
freighted  with  significance  when  it 
comes  to  building  appreciation  of 
money  and  its  power. 

While  the  Sales  Tax  has  its 
annoying  aspects,  this  good 
thing  can  be  said  about  it:  it 
has  taught  us  all  how  much 
money  a  penny  really  is — espe- 
cially in  those  states  where  mills 
are  in  use. 

Most  of  us  had  never  seen  the 
equivalent  of  a  mill  before  the  ad- 
vent of  the  tax;  in  fact,  we  hardly 
knew  there  was  such  a  thing.  And 
to  think  that  a  penny  is  ten  of  them! 

These  foregoing  suggestions  are 
not  to  be  construed  as  a  curb  on 
buying  at  its  best,  for  that  we  must 
have  and  plenty  of  it.  It  is  the  ap- 
preciation   of    a    keener    sense    of 


THE    IMPROVEMENT   ERA,   JANUARY,    1939 


THE  POWER  TO  ACHIEVE 


values  that  we  are  trying  to  stimu- 
late. 

Power  Through  Attitude  and 
Interest 

(Certainly  some  forms  of  work  are 
*  not  what  might  be  called  inter- 
esting. However,  this  condition  can 
be  largely  counteracted,  if,  in  con- 
templating the  job  and  what  it  offers, 
the  mind  can  be  interested. 

So-called  prosaic  work,  like  that 
of  monotonous  routines,  can  be 
boresome,  and  boresomeness,  in  al- 
most no  time,  will  bring  about  dis- 
content and  fatigue.  Just  the  same, 
if  we  make  it  part  of  our  work  to 
strike  an  attitude  of  active  interest, 
as  for  instance,  in  ways  to  improve 
the  methods  used,  or  to  achieve  an 
excellence  never  before  attained, 
that  very  work,  instead  of  being 
boresome,  will  actually  become 
stimulating — it  will  energize,  instead 
of  enervate! 

Edison  proved  this;  so  did  Bur- 
bank.  The  late  Jesse  Knight  dem- 
onstrated this  when  he  prospected 
for  years  before  he  hit  upon  his  now 
famous  Humbug  mine,  from  which 
more  than  ten  million  dollars  is  said 
to  have  been  taken  before  his  death. 
Always  the  -drive  of  a  tremendous 
interest  was  there  to  prod  him,  re- 
gardless of  the  monotony  of  drilling, 
blasting,  and  mucking. 

So  then,  in  building  power  to 
achieve,  especially  in  the  fields 
of  manual  work,  we  must  realize 
how  utterly  vital  are  one's  atti- 
tude toward  and  interest  in  the 
work  immediately  at  hand.  The 
query,  therefore,  is  not  so  much 
whether  the  work  is  interesting, 
as  it  is  whether  the  mind  is  in- 
terested. 

Power  Through  One's  Vocation 

N  these  trying  days  of  job-hunting 
and  work-finding,  it  is  not  enough 
to  know  how  to  do  one  thing  inimit- 
ably well.  One  must  also  be  ac- 
quainted with  several  kinds  of  work 
activity.  Especially  should  we  all 
learn  to  do  some  things  well  with 
our  hands.  In  the  days  ahead,  a 
real  premium  will  be  paid  young  men 
who  acquire  important  manual 
skills. 

For  example:  the  press  and  radio 
recently  carried  a  notice  of  the  ele- 
vation of  Ray  T.  Elsmore  to  a  po- 
sition of  executive  responsibility 
with  the  Western  Air  Express.  Mr. 
Elsmore  is  a  lawyer  by  profession. 


At  the  time  of  the  war,  he  went  into 
the  air  service  where  he  acquitted 
himself  with  great  honor,  and  for 
the  last  decade  or  so  has  been  flying 
the  Western  Air  Express  transports 
on  the  northern  route  from  Salt  Lake 
City.  He  is  one  of  the  most  highly 
skilled  pilots  in  America.  He  is 
also  a  reserve  officer  in  the  United 
States  Army  Air  Corps.  His  train- 
ing, therefore,  for  his  new  executive 
assignment,  is  ideal.  His  versatility 
and  resourcefulness  have  made  his 
services  very  valuable. 


Mathematics  of  Versatility 


D' 


I 


|R.  Pitkin  has  suggested  that  to- 
day, according  to  the  mathe- 
matic  theory  of  probability,  two- 
skill,  three-skill,  and  four-skill  men 
will  arrive  much  sooner  than  one- 
skill  men.  Their  chances  pile  up  in 
geometric  progression.  For  instance, 
a  three-skill  man  has  seven  times 
the  chances  of  locating  work  that  a 
one-skill  man  has.  A  four-skill  man 
is  at  least  fifteen  times  better  off  in 
finding  work  than  a  one-skill  man. 

Versatility,  therefore,  means  ad- 
ditional power  to  achieve  because  it 
enhances  the  number  of  opportuni- 
ties to  be  of  service. 

Today,  there  has  come  al- 
most a  reverence  for  work.  Em- 
ployment, as  it  is  known  in  com- 
merce and  industry,  is  so  scarce 
that  those  letters  W-O-R-K, 
arranged  in  this  sequence,  al- 
most seem  to  have  a  quality  of 
sanctity.  Versatility  generally 
means  work. 

The  Trades  to  the  Front 

Tn  the  days  ahead,  the  trades  are 
coming  to  their  own.  Skilled 
craftsmanship  will  undoubtedly  be 
well  paid  and,  it  is  hoped,  the  hours 
of  service  will  be  fair  to  all. 

The  crafts  will  be  respected  very 
much  as  the  professions  are  today. 
This  is  certainly  as  it  should  be. 
Surely  the  work  of  the  truly  skilled 
baker  or  auto  mechanic,  each  of 
whom  has  served  an  adequate  ap- 
prenticeship, is  not  far  removed,  in 
significance,  from  that  of  profes- 
sional men. 

Young  men  should,  therefore, 
start  now  to  get  into  apprentice- 
ships in  the  physical  sciences — ma- 
chine work,  cabinet  making,  archi- 
tecture, bridge-building,  highway 
construction,  steel  construction,  con- 
tracting, automobile  and  airplane 
construction,  etc. 

(Concluded  on  page  63) 


L.  D.  S.  Training  Pays! 

INVEST  THE 
NEW  YEAR  IN 
BUSINESS 
TRAINING... 


Our  short,  intensive  courses 
will  qualify  you  for  positions 
that  offer  unlimited  possibili- 
ties for  advancement. 

There  is  work  to  do — and 
trained  men  and  women  are 
given  first  consideration! 

J_j.  JL/.  15. 

BUSINESS 
COLLEGE 

70  North  Main  Street 
Salt  Lake  City,  Utah 


L.  D.  S.  Business  College 

Salt  Lake  City,  Utah 

Please  send  me  information 
about  your  courses,  rates  of  tui- 
tion, employment  service,  etc. 


Name:  ... 
Address: 


61 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,    JANUARY,    1939 

Solution  to  December  Puzzle         Scriptural  Crossword  Puzzle-Lent  to  the  Lord  (I  Sam.  1:  27;  28) 


nd 


our 


ras . . . 


^Preserve  in  bound  vol- 
umes the  vast  amount  of 
valuable  reading  in  your 
Era. 

Handsome,  durable  cloth 
binding,  stamped  in  gold, 
$2.00  per  volume. 

SPECIAL  PRICES  FOR 

TEN  OR  MORE 

VOLUMES 

BRING  THEM  IN  NOW 

The  Deseret 
News  Press 

29  Richards  Street 
Salt  Lake  City,  Utah 


62 


ACROSS 


1  Through  faith  Abraham  almost 
...  7  across;  a  ram  took  his 
place 

7  His  son  Jacob  deceived  him 

11  "Samuel  arose  .  .  .  went  to    Eli" 

12  "he  shall  be  lent  to  .  .  .  Lord" 

13  "neither      was      the  ...  of      the 

Lord   yet   revealed  unto  him" 

14  Part  of  the  Bible 

15  State;  note 

16  "I   did   but   taste   a   little  honey," 

said     Jonathan,     "and,  .  .  .  ,  I 
must  die" 

17  River  in  Europe 

18  "smooth     stones     out  .  .  .  the 

brook" 

20  "and  .   .  .  ark  of  God  is  taken" 

21  "That   the  .  .  .  called   Samuel" 

22  Eli  can  be  seen  in  this  deception 
24  Mother 

26  "Now  Eli  .  .  .  very  old" 

27  "my  soul  was  ...  in  thine  eyes" 
32  Autocrat;  Roman  cot  (anag.) 

34  King  of  Israel  1  Kings  16:  23 


the 


35  "My     heart     rejoiceth    .    . 

Lord" 

36  "it  came  to  pass  in  .  .  .  days" 

37  "and  the  .  .  .  were  not  expired" 

38  "then  he  shall   ...  his  head" 

40  "And    he    worshipped    the    Lord 

41  "but  her  voice  .  .  .  not  heard" 

42  "it     is  .  .  .  good    report     that     I 

hear" 

44  Lot  lived  here  Gen.  19:  23 

45  Indian  millet;  raid  (anag.). 

47  "Wherefore  the  ...  of  the  young 

men  was  very  great" 
'O  Lord,   .  .  .  thou  my  lips" 
'Samuel     feared     to     shew     Eli 

the  .  .  ." 
'The    Lord  .   .  .  thee,    and    keep 

thee" 
'The  .  .  .  God  is  thy  refuge" 


48 
50 

52 

53 


Our  Text  from  Samuel  is  11,  12,  13, 
18,  20,  21,  26,  27,  35,  36,  37,  40, 
41,  42,  48,  and  50  combined 


DOWN 


l 


of   God   unto 


'there  came   a  . 
Eli" 

2  "he  will  give  you  .  .  .  our  hands" 

3  Northwestern  4   down 

4  "the     last  ...  of     that     man     is 

worse  than  the  first" 

5  Expression  of  inquiry 

6  Erase 

7  Isle  of  Wight 

8  Passable 

9  The  sandarac  tree;  on  the  way  to 

Ararat 
10  Babylonian  god ;  repeated  notice 
19  Cake  with  special  filling 
21  Resinous  substance 

23  Certain   lines   on   the   earth's    sur- 

face;  tie  horses    (anag.) 

24  "with  what  measure  ye  .  .  ." 

25  Egyptian  goddess 

26  David  .  .  .  when    he   fought   Go- 

liath with  a  sling  and  stones 


27  "for  I  have  not  .  .  .  them." 

28  ".  .  .  it,    even   to    the   foundation 

thereof" 

29  Containing  iodine 

30  Grandson  of  Esau;   roam    (anag.) 

31  The  needlebush  (Australia) 

32  Middle 

33  Burn 

38  "descended  in  a  bodily  .  .  ." 

39  "I    will  ...  up    against    you     a 

nation" 

40  "if  thou  lift  up  thy  .  .  .  upon  it, 

thou  hast  polluted  it" 

41  The  Bible  is  "Holy..." 

42  Feminine  name 

43  "And  the  child  Samuel  grew  .  .  ." 

46  Salutation 

47  "he  had  a  .  .  .  ,  whose  name  was 

Saul" 
49  Canadian  province 
51  A  Benjamite  1  Chron.  7:  12 


THE    IMPROVEMENT    ERA,   JANUARY,    1939 


THE   POWER   TO    ACHIEVE 


( Concluded  from  page  6 1 ) 
When  a  young  man  becomes  truly 
skilled  in  a  craft,  he  has  an  acquisi- 
tion that  is  priceless,  and  he  forth- 
with becomes  a  power  to  be  reckoned 
with. 

Power  Through  Property 
Ownership 

f^UR  Mormon  youth  should  be  en- 
couraged in  every  possible  way 
to  become  owners  of  real  property. 
The  financial  companies  may  well 
afford  to  encourage  our  young  men 
into  property  ownership  with  all  of 
the  liberality  compatible  with  good 
business.  This  goes  not  only  for 
the  ownership  of  the  home,  but  also 
for  that  of  business  property.  Real 
estate  bought  at  a  fair  price  provides 
an  incomparable  anchorage.  Our 
young  men  should  want  to  own  prop- 
erties and  do  everything  in  their 
power  honorably  to  acquire  them. 

Power  Through  the  Creation 
of  Work 

A  MAN  who,  through  his  initiative, 
vision,  enterprise,  and  courage 
builds  a  factory  in  which  Tie  manu- 
factures a  quality  product  that  so- 
ciety needs  and  in  this  process 
makes  agreeable  work  opportunities 
for  men  and  women,  has  done  a 
noble  thing.  His  effort  is  just  as 
important  and  vital  as  that  of  almost 
anyone  in  the  community.  A  fac- 
tory that  is  properly  operated  and 
performing  a  great  public  service 
deserves  to  stand  side  by  side  in 
importance  with  the  school,  and,  in 
some  respects,  with  the  Church. 

Every  reasonable  thing  that  can 
be  done  to  foster  such  enterprise 
should  be  forthcoming.  Our  peo- 
ple have  long  excelled  in  the  pro- 
fessions of  medicine,  dentistry,  law, 
teaching,  and  finance.  They  should 
now  be  given  every  inducement  to 
qualify  for  leadership  in  commerce 
and  industry.  Therein  lies  real 
power.  Our  own  home  folk  should 
prepare  for  this  leadership.  It  re- 
quires preparation,  vision,  courage, 
and  capital,  all  of  which  we  have 
or  can  secure. 

Power  Through  Agriculture 

"VTothing  would  help  our  common- 
wealth more  than  a  well  in- 
trenched, prosperous  farming  in- 
dustry. Combined  with  animal  hus- 
bandry and  poultry,  many  inter- 
mountain  farmers  and  ranchers  have 
achieved  a  brilliant  success. 


Our  youths  will  do  well  to  look 
carefully  into  the  opportunities  af- 
forded by  agriculture.  When  the 
problem  of  crop  distribution  has  been 
happily  disposed  of,  farmers  should 
come  into  their  own.  The  poultry- 
men  have  done  it;  why  can't  the 
other  divisions  of  the  industry? 
Much  time  must  be  devoted  to  the 
study  of  marketing. 

Again,  our  farm  youth  must  also 
watch  the  development  of  propa- 
gating crops  with  chemicals.  It  is 
in  the  laboratory  stage  now,  but  one 
of  these  days,  out  it  will  come! 

There  is  no  more  admirable  figure 
in  American  life  than  a  successful 
farmer.  Right  there  opportunity 
beckons  to  real  men  who  want  to>  be 
near  the  earth  and  who  want  to  serve 
as  the  true  builders  of  our  common- 
wealth. 

Summary 

"Ror  years  our  Church  leadership 
has  importuned  us  of  the  Priest- 
hood to  realize  the  power  that  is 
actually  and  potentially  ours.  They 
have  urged  us  "to  rise  and  shine" 
and  to  capitalize  that  power  for 
good. 

Obviously,    much    of    this    great 


power  is  spiritual  and  mental;  but  a 
good  deal  of  it  also  has  directly  to 
do  with  business  affairs. 

The  hour  has  struck  for  the  youth 
of  the  Church  to  realize  this  and  to 
go  out,  in  honor,  to  earn  and  claim 
their  own! 

The  Great  Executive  wants  us  to 
want  things  properly — not  /or  the 
love  of  money  and  property  them- 
selves— but  for  the  good  that  can 
be  done  with  them  by  men  of  power, 
actuated  by  the  loftiest  of  Christian 
motives. 

The  challenge  is  here!  May  our 
youth  prove  worthy  of  it! 


BE    INDEPENDENT 

No  Other  Vocation  So  Profitable 

ENROLL   NOW 

For  a  Complete  Course  at  the 

Quish  School  of  Beauty  Culture 

The  Best  in  the  West 

3S6-340  S.  MaiH,  American  Blag., 
SALT  LAKE   CITY,    UTAH 

For  Further  Information 

or  Catalog  Call 

Wasatch  7560  or 

Fill  in  This 

Coupon 


*«» 


-'V 


r<^ 


1939 (  GAS    APPLIANCES 
offer  you  happier  years 


Years  are  made  up  of  days — and 
days  are  full  of  pleasant  living, 
comfort  and  convenience  in  homes 
using  modern  Natural  Gas  service. 

Gas  ranges  that  do  almost  every- 
thing hut  mix  the  recipes  .  .  .  gas 
refrigerators  that  are  permanently 
silent,  and  more  beautiful  than  ever 


.  .  .  gas  water-heaters  that  supply 
all  the  hot  water  you  need,  auto- 
matically and  most  economically 
.  .  .  gas  furnaces  that  keep  "June 
in   January"    in    your   home. 

Come  in  and  see  the  latest  models 
of  Gas  appliances  that  do  the  4 
big  jobs  .  .  .  cooking,  refrigeration, 
water-heating,  house-heating. 


CONVENIENT  PURCHASE  TERMS 
k 


MOUNTAIN  FUELiUPPLY  COMPANY 


36  So.  State 


Salt  Lake  City 


Serving  Twenty-one  Utah  Communities 


63 


LET'S  SAY  IT  CORRECTLY 

Real  is  an  adjective:  That  flower  is  real;  Mary  is  a  real  girl. 
Very  is  an  adverb  and  as  such  is  used  to  modify  either  an 
adjective  or  an  adverb:  We  had  a  very  pleasant  time  at  the 
party;  The  car  was  going  very  swifdy  when  the  light  changed. 

$ 

Dear  Brother: 

LET  me  compliment  you  again  upon  the  fine  magazine  which 
you  are  putting  out  each  month. 

(Signed)  Harvey  Fletcher, 

Director  of  Physical  Research, 
Bell  Laboratories,  New  York. 

WE  wouldn't  know  how  to  keep  house  without  the  Era.    It 
has  been  a   regular  part  of  our  home  since  we  were 
married  twenty-four  years  ago. 
Respectfully, 
(Signed)  John  Thornton, 

Box  586,  Blackfoot,  Idaho. 

FROM  DUNEDIN 

16  Tennyson  St. 
Dunedin,  New  Zealand 
August  26,  1938. 
Dear  Brother: 

I  would  like  to  assure  you  of  the  good  work  the  Era  is  doing 
in  this  end  of  the  "Vineyard"  (this  is  the  city  Admiral 
Byrd  used  as  a  base  during  his  South  Pole  Expedition),  and 
express  our  appreciation  for  your  good  work  and  the  way 
that  you  are  aiding  us  in  our  missionary  work. 

We  are  doing  our  utmost  to  put  the  Era  in  the  homes  in 
place  of  the  detective  magazines  and  other  deteriorators  of 
the  mind. 

May  you  have  continued  success  in  your  work  and  the  bless- 
ings of  the  Lord  always  is  the  hope  of  your  brother  in  the 
Gospel. 

(Signed)  Elder  Del  M.  Beecher. 


^>- 


3  Nov.  1938 
Dortmund 
Bruckstr.  39/3 
Germany 
Dear  Editor: 

Enclosed  you  will  find  a  snapshot  taken  in  front  of  the 
Maas  Station  in  Rotterdam,  Holland.  It  shows  the  mis- 
sionaries of  the  West  German  Mission  reading  the  Era  as  they 
are  waiting  to  meet  their  brethren  who  were  arriving  later. 


WEST  GERMAN  MISSIONARIES  READING  THE  "ERA" 
IN  ROTTERDAM,  HOLLAND.  AT  THE  TIME  THE 
GERMAN  MISSIONARIES  WERE  TRANSFERRED  OUT 
OF  GERMANY,  IN  SEPTEMBER,  1938.  TAKEN  BY 
EUGENE  H.  HILTON,  SUPERVISING  ELDER  OF  THE 
RUHR   DISTRICT,  WEST  GERMAN    MISSION. 

We  certainly  do  appreciate  the  Era  and  the  closer  contact 
it  gives  us  with  the  Church  and  with  our  loved  ones  at  home. 
We  wish  you  many  years  of  success  in  the  publication  of  this 
fine  magazine. 

Sincerely  yours, 

Eugene  S.  Hilton. 


"Fk? 


The  portly  gentleman  had  bumped  into  the  rather  "lean  and 
hungry  Cassius." 

"From  the  looks  of  you,"  he  said  belligerently,  "there  must 
have  been  a  famine." 

"And  from  the  looks  of  you,"  replied  the  lean  one,  "you're 
the  guy  who  caused  it." 

INFLUENCE 

Father:  "Aren't  you  glad  now  that  you  prayed  for  a  baby 
sister?" 

Son  (after  viewing  his  twin  baby  sisters) :  "Yes;  and 
aren't  you  glad  I  quit  when  I  did?" 

POOR  MR.  SMITH 
"You  can't  see  Mr.  Smith,"  retorted  the  sharp-faced,  sharp- 
tongued  woman  to  the  political  canvasser  at  the  door. 

"But,  Madam,  I  merely  wish  to  find  out  what  party  he 
belongs  to." 

"Well,  then,  take  a  good  look  at  me.  I'm  the  party  he 
belongs  to." 

INFLATED 

The  weighing  machine  was  out  of  order,  but  no  notice  to 
that  effect  had  been  posted.  An  unsuspecting  fat  lady  clamb- 
ered on  and  inserted  a  penny.  Among  the  curious  bystanders 
was  an  inebriated  gentleman  intently  watching  the  dial.  The 
scale  registered  seventy-five  pounds.  "My  gosh,"  he  whispered 
hoarsely,  "she's  hollow." 

ALL  FOR  CHARITY 

Maud:  "I'm  going  to  sell  kisses  at  the  Charity  Bazaar  to- 
night. Do  you  think  a  dollar  apiece  is  too  much  to  charge 
for  them?" 

Marie:  "No,  I  think  not.  People  expect  to  get  cheated  at 
these  charity  affairs." 

ANTEDATED 

Politician:  "Don't  forget,  the  Constitution  was  written 
away  back  in  the  horse  and  buggy  days." 

Voter:  "Yes,  and  don't  forget,  the  Ten  Commandments 
aren't  yet  out  of  date,  even  though  they  were  written  back 
in  the  horse  and  chariot  days." 

HOSPITABLE  SON 

Dad  (giving  Billy  a  lecture) :  "Now  when  I  was  your  size, 
Billy,  I  didn't  have  a  big  house  like  this  to  five  in  and  I  didn't 
have  pretty  clothes  like  yours  to  wear.  Why  I  had  to  go  to 
bed  without  my  supper  sometimes  because  there  wasn't  any." 

Billy:  "Gee,  Daddy,  ain't-cha  glad  you're  living  with  us 
now." 

THE  BAIT 

The  boss  called  the  manager  into  the  office  one  morning. 

"I  find,"  he  said,  "that  last  year's  trading  was  the  best  since 
I  went  into  the  business.  I  know  how  much  hard  work  you 
have  put  in  the  firm,  and,  as  a  mark  of  esteem,  I  have  made 
out  a  check  for  five  hundred  dollars  in  your  favor." 

The  manager  beamed  his  thanks. 

"Yes."  went  on  the  boss,  "and  if  next  year's  business  is  as 
good,  I'll  sign  it." 


64 


A 


NOTHER  L AGE 


Time  turns  another  page  as  1938 
becomes  1939.  For  KSL,  this 
signalizes  the  end  of  one  momen- 
tous  year  and  the  beginning  of 
another. 


As  in  each  year  since  1922, 
KSL  prepares  to  meet  your 
demands  for  more  hours  of  jp 
worthwhile  radio  entertainment. 
And  as  in  every  year  past,  this 
station  pledges  you  the  out- 
standing pleasure  you  expect  from 
"The  Voice  of  the  West". 


Day  by  day  during  1939,  keep  tuned 

to  KSL  for  music,  drama,  comedy, 

the  progress  of  the  world's  news, 

and  for  KSL's  newly-conceived  programs 

contributing  to  your  cultura 

advancement. 


-. 


KSL 


Columbia's  50,000  Watt 
Affiliate  in  Salt  Lake  City 


y 


m 


'0*»'  ■■ 


00*-" 


.'.'■..'.."■■■.■■: 


will  (fou, 


fifatit  alone  -  -  beaten, 
(rtoken  and  unprotected? 


%> 


... 


9S«: 


sMi|cli|S 


isiiiiei 


"Is  your 


fiiiwnsn/insM 


BENEFICIAL 


©  Oi&PA-JfY